Professional Documents
Culture Documents
g I
Lecture 0
Syllabus
Reinforced Concrete Design
I
Instructor D N
Dr. Nader
d OkOkasha.
h
Email nao204@lehigh.edu
Offi Hours
Office H A needed.
As d d
Reinforced Concrete Design
If you d
dont
meet this
hi criteria
i i you will
ill not be
b
allowed to continue this course.
Reinforced Concrete Design
References:
Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and
commentary (ACI 318M-08). American Concrete Institute,
2008.
2008
Reinforced Concrete Design
Design
g is an analysis
y of trial sections. The strength
g
of each trial section is compared with the expected
load effect.
Reinforced Concrete Design
Reinforced Concrete Design
Course outline
Week Topic
Introduction:
Syllabus and course policies.
-Syllabus policies
-Introduction to reinforced concrete.
1
-Load types,
yp load p paths and tributaryy areas.
-Design philosophies and design codes.
Analysis and design of beams for bending:
-Analysis of beams in bending at service loads.
-Strength analysis of beams according to ACI Code.
2 3,4
2, 34 -Design of singly reinforced rectangular beams.
beams
-Design of T and L beams.
-Design of doubly reinforced beams.
4 Design of beams for shear.
5 Midterm
Midterm.
Reinforced Concrete Design
Course outline
Week Topic
Design of slabs: One way solid slabs One way
6
ribbed slabs.
7 Design of short concentric columns.
columns
9 Staircase design.
10 Final
Reinforced Concrete Design
Grading
Exam Policy
Mid-term exam:
Only one A4 cheat-sheet is allowed.
Necessary figures and tables will be provided with the exam forms.
Final exam:
Open book.
Reinforced Concrete Design
Homework Policy
You may get the HW points if you copy the solution from
other students. However, you will have lost your chance in
practicing the concepts through doing the HW. This will lead
you to loosing points in the exams, which you could have
gained if you did your HWs on your own.
Reinforced Concrete Design
Violation of discipline
p rules mayy have you
y dismissed from
class and jeopardize your participation points.
Reinforced Concrete Design
In all equations,
equations the input and output units are as follows:
Distance (L,b,d,h
L b d h): mm
Area (Ac,Ag,As): mm2
Volume (V): mm3
Force (P,V,N): N
Moment (M): N.mm
N mm
Stress (fy, fc): N/mm2 = MPa = 106 N/m2
Pressure (qs): N/mm2
Distributed load per unit length (wu): N/mm
Distributed load per unit area (qu): N/mm2
Weight per unit volume (): N/mm3
Reinforced Concrete Design
Distance (L,b,d,h
L b d h): cm , m
Area (Ac,Ag,As): cm2, m2
Volume (V): cm3, m3
Force (P,V,N): kN
Moment (M): kN.m
kN m
Pressure (qs): kN/m2
Distributed load per unit length (wu): kN/m
Distributed load per unit area (qu): kN/m2
Weight per unit volume (): kN/m3
Reinforced Concrete Design
Unit conversions
1 m = 102 cm = 103 mm
1 m2 = 104 cm2 = 106 mm2
1 m3 = 106 cm3 = 109 mm3
1 kN = 103 N
kN m = 106 N.mm
1 kN.m N mm
1 kN/m2 = 10-3 N/mm2
1 kN/m3 = 10-66 N/mm3
Reinforced Concrete Design
ACI Equations
The equations taken from the ACI code will be indicated throughout the
slides by their section or equation number in the code provided in
shading.
Examples:
4 00 f c
Ec = 4700 ACI 8.5.1
851
f r = 0.62 f c ACI E
Eq. 9-10
9 10
Some of the original equations may have included the symbol = 1.0
for normal weight concrete and omitted in slides.
Reinforced Concrete Design
Re-do
Re do the lecture examples
examples.
DO YOUR HOMEWORK!!!!!
Check your solution with the HW solution uploaded to upinar.
upinar
Reinforced Concrete Design
Reinforced Concrete Design I
Lecture 1
Introduction to reinforced concrete
Contents
1. Concrete-producing materials
3. Steel reinforcement
2
Part 1:
Concrete-Producing
Materials
3
Advantages of reinforced concrete
as a structural material
1. It has considerable compressive strength.
4
Advantages of reinforced concrete
as a structural material
6. It is usually the only economical material for footings,
basement walls, etc.
5
Disadvantages of reinforced
concrete as a structural material
1. It has a very low tensile strength.
2. Forms are required to hold the concrete in place until it
hardens.
3. Concrete members are very large and heavy because of the
low strength per unit weight of concrete.
4. Properties of concrete vary due to variations in
proportioning and mixing.
6
Compatibility of concrete and steel
1. Concrete is strong in compression, and steel is strong in
tension.
2. The two materials bond very well together.
3. Concrete protects the steel from corrosive environments
and high temperatures in fire.
4. The coefficients of thermal expansion for the two
materials are quite close.
7
Concrete
Concrete is a mixture of cement, fine and coarse
aggregates, and water. This mixture creates a formable
paste that hardens into a rocklike mass.
8
Concrete Producing Materials
Portland Cement
Aggregates
Water
Admixtures
9
Portland Cement
The most common type of hydraulic cement used in the
manufacture of concrete is known as Portland cement, which is
available in various types.
10
Types of Cement
Type I: General Purpose
11
Types of Cement
Type IV: Low Heat of Hydration
Slowly dissipates heat less distortion (used for
large structures).
Coarse Aggregates
Coarse aggregates consist of gravel or crushed rock particles
not less than 5 mm in size.
Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregates consist of sand or pulverized rock particles
usually less than 5 mm in size.
13
Water
Mixing water should be clean and free of organic materials that
react with the cement or the reinforcing bars.
14
Admixtures
Applications:
Improve workability (superplasticizers)
Accelerate or retard setting and hardening
Aid in curing
Improve durability
15
Concrete Mixing
In the design of concrete mixes, three principal
requirements for concrete are of importance:
Quality
Workability
Economy
16
Part 2:
Mechanical Properties of
Concrete
17
Mechanical Concrete Properties
'
f
Compressive Strength, c
18
Mechanical Concrete Properties
'
f
Compressive Strength, c
19
Mechanical Concrete Properties
'
f
Compressive Strength, c
20
Mechanical Concrete Properties
Compressive-Strength Test
21
Mechanical Concrete Properties
Modulus of Elasticity, Ec
Corresponds to the secant modulus at 0.45 c
'
f
For normal-weight concrete:
Ec 4700 f c ACI 8.5.1
22 0.002 0.003
Mechanical Concrete Properties
Tensile Strength
Tensile strength ~ 8% to 15% of f c'
23
Mechanical Concrete Properties
Tensile Strength
Modulus of Rupture, fr
P
unreinforced
concrete beam
fr
Mc 6M
fr 2
24 I bh
Mechanical Concrete Properties
Tensile Strength
Splitting Tensile Strength, fct
Poissons
Effect
2P
f ct
Ld
25
Creep
Creep is defined as the long-term deformation caused
by the application of loads for long periods of time,
usually years.
26
Creep
The total deformation is divided into two parts; the first
is called elastic deformation occurring right after the
application of loads, and the second which is time
dependent, is called creep
27
Shrinkage
Shrinkage of concrete is defined as the reduction in
volume of concrete due to loss of moisture. As a
result, shrinkage cracks develop.
Shrinkage continues for many years, but under ordinary
conditions about 90% of it occurs during the first
year.
28
Part 3:
Steel Reinforcement
29
Steel Reinforcement
Tensile tests
30
Steel Reinforcement
Tensile tests
31
Steel Reinforcement
Stress-strain diagrams
fs = Es fy
Yield point
elastic plastic
All steel grades have same modulus of elasticity Es= 2x105 MPa
= 200 GPa 32
Steel Reinforcement
Bar sizes, f, #
Bars are available in nominal diameters ranging from 5mm
to 50mm, and may be plain or deformed. When bars have
smooth surfaces, they are called plain, and when they have
projections on their surfaces, they are called deformed.
Steel grades, fy
ksi MPa
40 276
60 414
80 552
33
Steel Reinforcement
Bars are deformed to increase bonding with concrete
34
Steel Reinforcement
Marks for ASTM Standard bars
35
Steel Reinforcement
Bar sizes according to ASTM Standards
U.S. customary units
36
Steel Reinforcement
Bar sizes according to ASTM Standards
SI Units
37
Steel Reinforcement
Bar sizes according to European Standard (EN 10080)
W Number of bars
mm N/m 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6 2.2 28 57 85 113 141 170 198 226 254 283
8 3.9 50 101 151 201 251 302 352 402 452 503
10 6.2 79 157 236 314 393 471 550 628 707 785
12 8.9 113 226 339 452 565 679 792 905 1018 1131
14 12.1 154 308 462 616 770 924 1078 1232 1385 1539
16 15.8 201 402 603 804 1005 1206 1407 1608 1810 2011 Areas
18 19.9 254 509 763 1018 1272 1527 1781 2036 2290 2545
20 24.7 314 628 942 1257 1571 1885 2199 2513 2827 3142
are in
22 29.8 380 760 1140 1521 1901 2281 2661 3041 3421 3801 mm2
24 35.5 452 905 1357 1810 2262 2714 3167 3619 4072 4524
25 38.5 491 982 1473 1963 2454 2945 3436 3927 4418 4909
26 41.7 531 1062 1593 2124 2655 3186 3717 4247 4778 5309
28 45.4 616 1232 1847 2463 3079 3695 4310 4926 5542 6158
30 55.4 707 1414 2121 2827 3534 4241 4948 5655 6362 7069
32 63.1 804 1608 2413 3217 4021 4825 5630 6434 7238 8042 38
Reinforced Concrete Design I
Lecture 2
Load types, load paths and tributary areas
Load paths
Structural systems transfer gravity loads from the floors
and roof to the ground through load paths that need to
be clearly identified in the design process.
Load is distributed over the area of the floor. This distributed load
has units of (force/area), e.g. kN/m2.
w {kN/m}
q {kN/m2} Loads
P {kN}
Beam Beam Column
Slab Beam
Footing
Slab
Beam Beam
Soil
6
Load paths loads on (one-way) beams
In order to design a beam, the tributary load from the floor carried
by the beam and distributed over its span is determined. This load
has units of (force/distance), e.g. kN/m.
Notes:
-In some cases, there may be concentrated loads carried by the beams as well.
-All spans of the beam must be considered together (as a continuous beam) for design.
w {kN/m}
7
Load paths loads on (one-way) beams
This tributary load is determined by multiplying q by the tributary
width for the beam.
8 S1 S2
Load paths loads on (two-way) beams
The tributary areas for a beam in a two way system are areas which
are bounded by 45-degree lines drawn from the corners of the
panels and the centerlines of the adjacent panels parallel to the long
sides.
A panel is part of the slab formed by column centerlines.
9
Load paths loads on (two-way) beams
An edge beam is bounded
by panels from one side.
An interior beam is
bounded by panels from
two sides.
qD
11
Load paths loads on (two-way) beams
12
Load paths loads on columns
The tributary load for the column is concentrated. It has units of
(force) e.g., kN. It is determined by multiplying q by the tributary
area for the column.
13
Load paths loads on structural members
Example
Determine the loads acting on beams B1 and B2 and columns C1
and C2. Distributed load over the slab is q = 10 kN/m2. This is a 5
story structure.
B1
4m
B2
5m
4.5 m C2
C1
6m 5.5 m
14
Load paths loads on structural members
Example
B1:
w = 10 (4)/2 = 20 kN/m
B1
4m
B2
5m
4.5 m C2
C1
6m 5.5 m
15
Load paths loads on structural members
Example
B2:
w = 10 (4+5)/2 = 45 kN/m
B1
4m
B2
5m
4.5 m C2
C1
6m 5.5 m
16
Load paths loads on structural members
Example
B1:
w = 20 kN/m
B2:
w = 45 kN/m
17
Load paths loads on structural members
Example
C1:
P = 10 (4.5/2 6/2) 5 = 337.5 kN
B1
4m
B2
5m
4.5 m C2
C1
6m 5.5 m
18
Load paths loads on structural members
Example
C2:
P = 10 [(4.5+5)/2 (6+5.5)/2] 5 = 1366 kN
B1
4m
B2
5m
4.5 m C2
C1
6m 5.5 m
19
Load types
Classification by direction
1- Gravity loads
2- Lateral loads
20
Load types
1- Dead loads
2- Live loads
3- Environmental loads
21
Loads on Structures
All structural elements must be designed for all loads anticipated to
act during the life span of such elements. These loads should not
cause the structural elements to fail or deflect excessively under
working conditions.
22
Minimum live Load values on slabs
com/icod/ibc/2009/index.ht Wholesale 5
Exit facilities 5
m?bu=IC-P-2009- Manufacturing
000001&bu2=IC-P-2009- Light 4
23
000019 Heavy 6
Environmental loads
Wind load (W.L)
The wind load is a lateral load produced by wind pressure and
gusts. It is a type of dynamic load that is considered static to
simplify analysis. The magnitude of this force depends on the
shape of the building, its height, the velocity of the wind and the
type of terrain in which the building exists.
Earthquake load (E.L) or seismic load
The earthquake load is a lateral load caused by ground motions
resulting from earthquakes. The magnitude of such a load depends
on the mass of the structure and the acceleration caused by the
earthquake.
24
Reinforced Concrete Design I
Lecture 3
Design philosophies and design codes
Design Versus Analysis
Design involves the determination of the type of structural system to
be used, the cross sectional dimensions, and the required
reinforcement. The designed structure should be able to resist all
forces expected to act during the life span of the structure safely and
without excessive deformation or cracking.
2
Structural Design Requirements:
The design of a structure must satisfy three basic requirements:
1)Strength to resist safely the stresses induced by the loads in the
various structural members.
2)Serviceability to ensure satisfactory performance under service
load conditions, which implies providing adequate stiffness to
contain deflections, crack widths and vibrations within acceptable
limits.
3)Stability to prevent overturning, sliding or buckling of the
structure, or part of it under the action of loads.
There are two other considerations that a sensible designer should
keep in mind: Economy and aesthetics.
3
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:
4
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:
Model Codes: Consensus documents that can be adopted
by government agencies as legal documents.
5
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:
3 Model Codes in the U.S.
6
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:
International Building Code (IBC): published by International
Code Council (2000 ,1st edition). To replace the 3 model codes for
national and international use.
7
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:
Summary:
8
Design Methods (Philosophies)
Two methods of design have long prevalent.
Working Stress Method focuses on conditions at service
loads.
Strength Design Method focusing on conditions at loads
greater than the service loads when failure may be imminent.
The Strength Design Method is deemed conceptually more realistic
to establish structural safety.
The Working-Stress Design Method
This method is based on the condition that the stresses caused by
service loads without load factors are not to exceed the allowable
stresses which are taken as a fraction of the ultimate stresses of the
materials, fc for concrete and fy for steel. 9
The Ultimate Strength Design Method
At the present time, the ultimate-strength design method is the
method adopted by most prestigious design codes.
In this method, elements are designed so that the internal forces
produced by factored loads do not exceed the corresponding
reduced strength capacities.
11
Safety Provisions (the strength requirement)
The strength design method, involves a two-way safety measure. The
first of which involves using load factors, usually greater than unity
to increase the service loads. The second safety measure specified by
the ACI Code involves a strength reduction factor multiplied by the
nominal strength to obtain design strength. The magnitude of such a
reduction factor is usually smaller than unity
R i Li
i
ACI 9.3 ACI 9.2
12
Load factors
ACI 9.2.1
Dead only
U = 1.4D
Dead and Live Loads
U = 1.2D+1.6L
Dead, Live, and Wind Loads
U=1.2D+1.0L+1.6W
Dead and Wind Loads
U=1.2D+0.8W or U=0.9D+1.6W
Dead, Live and Earthquake Loads
U=1.2D+1.0L+1.0E
Dead and Earthquake Loads
U=0.9D+1.0E
13
Load factors
ACI 9.2
Symbols
14
Strength Reduction Factors ACI 9.3
According to ACI, strength reduction factors are given as follows:
a- For tension-controlled sections = 0.90
b- For compression-controlled sections,
Members with spiral reinforcement = 0.75
Other reinforced members = 0.65
c- For shear and torsion = 0.75
15
Reinforced Concrete Design I
Lecture 4
Analysis of beams in bending at service loads
Introduction
A beam is a structural member used to support the internal moments
and shears and in some cases torsion.
2
Basic Assumptions in Beam Theory
Plane sections remain plane after bending. This means that in an initially straight
beam, strain varies linearly over the depth of the section after bending.
4
Stages of flexural behavior
w {kN/m}
If load w varies from zero to until the beam fails, the beam will
go through three stages of behavior:
1. Uncracked concrete stage
2. Concrete cracked Elastic Stress stage
3. Beam failure Ultimate Strength stage
5
Stage I: Uncracked concrete stage
At small loads, when the tensile stresses are less than the
modulus of rupture, the beam behaves like a solid rectangular
beam made completely of concrete.
6
Stage II: Concrete cracked Elastic Stress range
Once the tensile stresses reach the modulus of rupture, the
section cracks. The bending moment at which this
transformation takes place is called the cracking moment Mcr.
7
Stage III: Beam failure Ultimate Strength stage
As the stresses in the concrete exceed the linear limit (0.45
fc), the concrete stress distribution over the depth of the beam
varies non-linearly.
8
0.002 0.003
Stages of flexural behavior
w {kN/m}
9
Flexural properties to be determined:
1- Cracking moment.
11
Cracking moment Mcr
Example 1:
Calculate the cracking moment
for the section shown
750 mm
1500 mm2
1 3
Ig bh
12
1
I g (350)(750) 3 1.2305 1010 mm4
12 f c 30MPa
f r 0.62 f c 0.62 30 3.4MPa
fr I g 3.4 1.2305 1010
M cr 1.1143 108 N .mm 111.43kN.m
yt (750 / 2)
12
Elastic stresses Cracked section
After cracking, the steel bars carry the entire
tensile load below the neutral surface. The
upper part of the concrete beam carries the
compressive load.
In the transformed section, the cross sectional area
of the steel, As, is replaced by the equivalent area
nAs where
n = the modular ratio= Es/Ec
To determine the location of the neutral axis,
bx x n As d x 0
2
1 b x2 n As x n As d 0
2
The height of the concrete compression block is x.
The normal stress in the concrete and steel
My My
fc fs n
It It 13
Elastic stresses Cracked section
Example 2:
f c 30MPa
Calculate the bending stresses for the
section shown, M= 180 kN.m
15
Elastic stresses Cracked section
Example 3:
Calculate the allowable moment for the f c 30MPa
section shown, f s(allowable)= 180 MPa,
f c(allowable)= 12 MPa
f s It 180 3.8295 109 750 mm
Ms 1500 mm2
ny ( 7.77 )( 700 185.16 )
M s 1.7234 108 N .mm 172.34kN .m
f c I t 12 3.8295 109
Mc
y 185.16
M c 2.4819 108 N .mm 248.19kN .m
M allowable 172.34kN .m
16
Reinforced Concrete Design I
Lecture 5
Strength analysis of beams according to ACI Code
Strength requirement for flexure in beams
Md Mu
M d Design moment strength (also known as moment resistance)
M u Internal ultimate moment
M u 1.2M D 1.6M L
Md Mn
M n Theoretical or nominal resisting moment.
2
The equivalent stress (Whitney) block
Actual Approximate
Strain
Stress Distribution Stress Distribution
Distribution
3
The equivalent stress (Whitney) block
The shape of the
stress block is not
important.
However, the
equivalent block must
provide the same
resultant (volume)
acting at the same
location (centroid).
The Whitney block
has average stress
0.85fc and depth
a=b1c. ACI 10.2.7.1
4
The equivalent stress (Whitney) block
Fx=0 C=T
6
Derivation of beam expressions
7
Derivation of beam expressions
Design aids can also be used:
Assume
Md = Mu = Mn
= Rn fMn=fRnbd2
Rn is given in tables and figures of design aids. 8
Design Aids
9
Design Aids
10
Tension strain in flexural members
fy
y
Es
t y ? Strain Distribution
11
Types of flexural failure:
12
Types of flexural failure:
[1] Balanced Failure
The concrete crushes and the steel yields simultaneously.
cu=0.003
cb
d
h
t = y
b
c>c
c>cb b
d
h d
h
b t <t y< y
b
c<cb
c<cb
d
h d
h
b
b
16
Allowed strains for sections in bending ACI 10.3.5
17
Strength reduction factor
cu=0.003
y
y
Es
at
c
b1
t
d c
y
c
c
18
ACI R9.3.2.2
Balanced steel
0.003
cb d
0.003 f y E S
Es 2105 MPa
600
cb d
600 f y
=b1c
0.003
cmax d
0.003 0.005
3
cmax d
8
3
=b1c b1cmax db1
8
3 0.85 b1 f c '
max
8 fy
20
Minimum steel allowed
ACI 10.5.1
0.25 f c
bw d
fy
A s,min max
1.4 b d
f
w
y
bw = width of section
d = effective depth of section
21
Design Aids
22
Summary:
To calculate the moment capacity of a section:
0.25 f c
bw d
fy
1-) As,min max
1.4 b d
f
w
y
As f y df y
2-) a or a
0.85f c b 0.85f c
a
6-) M d M n As f y d
2
or fMn=fRnbd2 (find Rn from table)
A singly reinforced concrete beam has the cross-section shown in the figure
below. Calculate the design moment strength. Can the section carry an
Mu = 350 kN.m?
f y 414MPa
25
Example
Solution
a) f c 20.7MPa
0.25 f c 0.25 20.7
bw d (254)(457)=319 mm 2
fy 414
1 A s,min max
1.4
bw d
1.4
(254)(457)=393 mm 2
fy 414
=393 mm 2 < A s,sup =2580 mm 2 OK
As f y 2580 414
2 a 239mm
0.85f c b 0.85 20.7 254
a 239
4 c 281mm
b1 0.85
d c 457 281
5 t 0.003 0.003 0.00186
c 281
t 0.004 Section is compression controlled
==> Does not satisfy ACI requirements
==> Reject section
27
Example
Solution
b) f c 34.5MPa
0.25 f c 0.25 34.5
bw d (254)(457)=412 mm 2
fy 414
1 A s,min max
1.4
bw d
1.4
(254)(457)=393 mm 2
fy 414
=412 mm 2 < A s,sup =2580 mm 2 OK
As f y 2580 414
2 a 143.4mm
0.85f c b 0.85 34.5 254
0.05( f c ' 28 )
3 b1 0.85 0.65 for f c ' 34.5MPa 28 MPa
7
0.05( 34.5 28 )
b1 0.85 0.804 0.65 28
7
Example
Solution
b) f c 34.5MPa
a 143.4
4 c 178.5mm
b1 0.804
d c 457 178.5
5 t 0.003 0.003 0.00468
c 178.5
0.004 t 0.005 Section is in transision zone
29
Example
Solution
b) f c 34.5MPa
a
6 M d M n A s f y d
2
143.4
0.874 2850 414 457 360 10 6
N .mm
2
360 kN .m
7 M u 350kN .m M n 360kN .m
Section is adequate
30
Example
Solution
c) f c 62.1MPa
fy 414
1 A s,min max
1.4
bw d
1.4
(254)(457)=393 mm 2
fy 414
=552 mm 2 < A s,sup =2580 mm 2 OK
As f y 2580 414
2 a 80mm
0.85f c b 0.85 62.1 254
31
Example
Solution
c) f c 62.1MPa
0.05( f c ' 28 )
3 b1 0.85 0.65 for f c ' 62.1MPa 28 MPa
7
0.05( 62.1 28 )
b1 0.85 0.61 0.65
7
b1 0.65
a 80
4 c 123mm
b1 0.65
d c 457 123
5 t 0.003 0.003 0.0081
c 123
t 0.005 Section is tension controlled
==> Satisfes ACI requirements ==> f =0.9 32
Example
Solution
c) f c 62.1MPa
a
6 M d M n A s f y d
2
80
0.9 2850 414 457 520 106 N .mm
2
520kN .m
7 M u 350kN .m M n 520kN .m
Section is adequate
33
Reinforced Concrete Design I
Lecture 6
Design of singly reinforced rectangular beams
Design of Beams For Flexure
The main two objectives of design is to satisfy the:
1) Strength and 2) Serviceability requirements
1) Strength
M d M n Mu
M d Design moment strength (also known as moment resistance)
M u 1.2M D 1.6M L
2
Design of Beams For Flexure
Derivation of design expressions h d
As
Assume
Mn = Mu b
Beam cross section
Solve for r:
0.85 f c' 2M u
1 1 As = rbd
fy 0.85 f c' b d 2
3
Remember: 1 kN.m = 106 N.mm
Design of Beams For Flexure
Design aids can also be used:
0.85 f c' 2M u
1 1
fy 0.85 f c' b d 2
Calculate:
4
Design Aids
5
Design of Beams For Flexure
2) Serviceability
The serviceability requirement ensures adequate performance
at service load without excessive deflection and cracking.
6
Minimum Beam Thickness
ACI 9.5.2.2
hmin
h d
h hmin As
b
7
Beam cross section
Detailing issues:
Concrete Cover
Concrete cover is necessary for protecting the reinforcement from
fire, corrosion, and other effects. Concrete cover is measured from
the concrete surface to the closest surface of steel reinforcement.
Side
cover
Bottom 8
ACI 7.7.1 cove
Detailing issues:
Spacing of Reinforcing Bars
The ACI Code specifies limits for bar spacing to permit concrete to
flow smoothly into spaces between bars without honeycombing.
According to the ACI code, S Smin must be satisfied, where:
bar diameter, d b
ACI 7.6.1
S min max 25 mm
4/3 maximum size of coarse aggregate
ACI 3.3.2
When two or more layers are used, bars in
the upper layers are placed directly above
the bars in the bottom layer with clear distance Clear
distance
between layers not less than 25 mm.
ACI 7.6.2 Clear spacing S 9
Estimation of applied moments Mu
Beams are designed for maximum moments along the spans in both
negative and positive directions.
10
Estimation of applied moments Mu
The magnitude of each moment is found from structural analysis of the
beam. To find the moments in a continuous (indeterminate) beam, one
can use: (1) indeterminate structural analysis (2) structural analysis
software (3) ACI approximate method for the analysis.
+
+ +
+
+ +
12
Estimation of applied moments Mu
Approximate Structural Analysis
ACI 8.3.3
ACI Code permits the use of the following approximate moments for
design of continuous beams, provided that:
There are two or more spans.
Spans are approximately equal, with the larger of two adjacent spans
not greater than the shorter by more than 20 percent.
Loads are uniformly distributed.
Unfactored live load does not exceed three times the unfactored dead
load.
Members are of similar section dimensions along their lengths
(prismatic).
13
Estimation of applied moments Mu
Approximate Structural Analysis
ACI 8.3.3
More than two spans
14
Estimation of applied moments Mu
Approximate Structural Analysis ACI 8.3.3
Two spans
l n = length of clear
span measured
face-to-face of
supports.
For calculating
negative moments,
l n is taken as the
average of the
adjacent clear span
lengths.
15
Design procedures
Method 1: When b and h are unknown
1- Determine h (h>hmin from deflection control) and assume b.
Estimate beam weight and include it with dead load.
2- Calculate the factored load wu and bending moment Mu.
3- Assume that =0.9 and calculate the reinforcement ( and As).
4- Check solution:
(a) Check spacing between bars
(b) Check minimum steel requirement
(c) Check = 0.9 (tension controlled assumption)
(d) Check moment capacity (Md Mu ?)
5- Sketch the cross section and its reinforcement.
16
Design procedures
Method 2: When b and h are known
1- Calculate the factored load wu and bending moment Mu.
2- Assume that =0.9 and calculate the reinforcement ( and As).
3- Check solution:
(a) Check spacing between bars
(b) Check minimum steel requirement
(c) Check = 0.9 (tension controlled assumption)
(d) Check moment capacity (Md Mu ?)
4- Sketch the cross section and its reinforcement.
17
Example 1
Design a rectangular reinforced concrete beam having a 6 m simple span. A
service dead load of 25 kN/m (not including the beam weight) and a
service live load of 10 kN/m are to be supported.
Use fc =25 MPa and fy = 420 MPa. wd=25 kN/m & wl =10 kN/m
6m
Solution:-
b & d are unknown
1- Estimate beam dimensions and weight wu=50.5 kN/m
hmin = l /16 =6000/16 = 375 mm
Assume that h = 500mm and b = 300mm 6m
Beam wt. = 0.5x0.3x25 = 3.75 kN/m
2- Calculate wu and Mu
wu = 1.2 D+1.6 L =1.2(25+3.75)+1.6(10)
227.3 kN.m
=50.5 kN/m
Mu = wul2/8 = 50.5(6)2/8 =227.3 kN.m
18
Example 1
3- Assume that =0.9 and calculate and As
d = 500 40 8 (20/2) = 442 mm
(assuming one layer of 20mm reinforcement and 8mm stirrups)
0.85f c ' 2 Mu
1 1
fy 0.85f c ' b d 2
0.85(25) 2 227.3 106
1 1 0.0116
420 (0.9) 0.85(25) 300 (442) 2
19
W Number of bars
mm N/m 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
25 mm OK
b) Check minimum steel requirement
0.25 f c 0.25 25
bw d (300)(442)=395 mm 2
fy 420
A s,min max
1.4
bw d
1.4
(300)(442)=442 mm 2
fy 420
=442 mm 2 < A s,sup =1571 mm 2 OK
21
Example 1
c) Check =0.9 (tension controlled assumption)
As f y 1571 420
a 103.5 mm
0.85f c ' b 0.85(25)300
a 103.5
1 0.85 for f c ' 25MPa 28 MPa c 121.7 mm
1 0.85
dc 442 121.7
t 0.003 0.003 0.0079 0.005
c 121.7
for t 0.005 0.90, the assumption is true the section is tension controlled
2
M d 231.7 kN.m M u 227.3kN.m OK 22
Example 1
50 44.2
520
30
23
Example 2
The rectangular beam B1 shown in the figure has b = 800mm and h =
316mm. Design the section of the beam over an interior support. Columns
have a cross section of 800x300 mm. The factored distributed load over the
slab is qu =14.4 kN/m2.
Use fc =25 MPa and fy = 420 MPa.
L1 = L2 = L3 = 6 m
S1 = S2= S3 = 4 m
B1
Solution:
b & d are known
1- Calculate wu and Mu
wu=4(14.4) = 57.6 kN/m
ln = 6 0.3=5.7 m
wu
24
Example 2
0.85f c ' 2 Mu
1 1
fy 0.85f c ' b d 2
0.85(25) 2 187.5 106
1 1 0.0102
420 (0.9) 0.85(25)800 (260) 2
3- Check solution
a) Check spacing between bars
800 2 40 2 8 1116
sc 52.8 mm d b 16 mm
11 1
25 mm OK
b) Check minimum steel requirement
0.25 f c 0.25 25
bw d (800)(260)=620 mm 2
fy 420
A s,min max
1.4
bw d
1.4
(800)(260)=693 mm 2
fy 420
=693 mm 2 < A s,sup =2212 mm 2 OK
27
Example 2
c) Check =0.9
As f y 2212 420
a 55 mm
0.85f c ' b 0.85(25)800
a 55
1 0.85 for f c ' 25MPa 28 MPa c 64 mm
1 0.85
dc 260 64
t 0.003 0.003 0.0091 0.005
c 64
for t 0.005 0.90, the assumption is true the section is tension controlled
1116
316 260
800
29
Reinforced Concrete Design I
Lecture 7
Design of T and L beams
T Beams
Reinforced concrete systems may consist of slabs and dropped
beams that are placed monolithically. As a result, the two parts act
together to resist loads. The beams have extra widths at their tops
called flanges, which are parts of the slabs they are supporting, and
the part below the slab is called the web or stem.
Flange
web
2
Flange Width b
Parts of the slab near the webs are more highly stressed than areas
away from the web.
hf
d
stirrup
bw bw
L-beam T-beam
4
Effective Flange Width be
ACI Code Provisions for Estimating be ACI 8.12.2
According to the ACI code, the effective flange width of a T-beam,
be is not to exceed the smallest of:
1. One-fourth the span length of the beam, L/4.
2. Width of web plus 16 times slab thickness, bw +16 hf .
3. Center-to-center spacing of beams, b.
L /4
beff min b w +16hf
b
5
Effective Flange Width be
ACI Code Provisions for Estimating be ACI 8.12.3
According to the ACI code, the effective flange width of an L-beam,
be is not to exceed the smallest of:
1. bw + L/12.
2. bw + 6 hf .
3. bw + 0.5(clear distance to next web).
b w L /12
beff min b w 6hf
b 0.5b
w c
6
A T-beam does not have to look like a T
7
Various Possible Geometries of T-Beams
Single Tee
Double Tee
Box
8
Various Possible Geometries of T-Beams
Flange Flange
web web
Same as
9
T- versus Rectangular Sections
If the neutral axis falls within the slab depth: analyze the beam as a
rectangular beam, otherwise as a T-beam.
10
T- versus Rectangular Sections
When T-beams are subjected to negative moments, the flange is
located in the tension zone. Since concrete strength in tension is
usually neglected in ultimate strength design, the sections are treated
as rectangular sections of width bw.
Tension
Compression zone zone
+ +
Section at midspan Section at support
11
Moment Diagram Positive moment Negative moment
Analysis of T-beams
T C
Asf y a
a M n A s f y d
0.85 f c b e 2
12
Analysis of T-beams
C f 0.85 f c be bw hf
C w 0.85 f c bw a
T As f y
From equilibrium of forces
T C f Cw
A s f y 0.85 f c be bw hf
a
0.85 f c bw
a hf
M n C w d Cf d
2 2
13
Minimum Reinforcement, As,min
ACI 10.5.2
be
+ve Moment
hf
d
0.25 f c As
bw d
fy
A s,min max bw
1.4 b d
f
w be
y
As hf
-ve Moment
d
bw
14
Analysis procedure for calculating he ultimate strength of T-beams
To calculate the moment capacity of a T-section:
1- Calculate be
2- Check As,sup> As,min
3- Assume a hf and calculate a using:
Asf y
a
0.85 f c b e
If a hf a is correct
As f y 0.85 f c be bw hf
If a > hf a
0.85 f c bw
a
As f y
5000 420 71.9mm h 150mm OK
0.85f c b e 0.85 25 1370
f
a 71.9
c 85 mm
b1 0.85
d c 400 85
es 0.003 0.003 0.011 0.005 Tension controled
c 85
17
Example 1
Calculate Md
a
M d A s f y d
2
71.8
0.9 5000 420 400
2
688 106 N.mm 688 kN.m
18
Example 2
10
Solution:- 10
h= 75
1- Check min. steel
25
d 750-40-10-32- 655.5mm 832
2
0.25 f c ' 1.4 30
A s,min max bw d ; bw d
f y fy
0.25 25 1.4
A s,min max 300 655.5 ; 300 655.5
420 420
A s,min 656 mm 2 A s,sup 6434 mm 2 OK
19
Example 2
10
10
h= 75
a= 141.3> hf = 100 mm
i.e. assumption is wrong
832
20
Example 2
A s f y - 0.85 f c be bw hf
a
0.85 f c bw
6434 420 0.85 25 900 300 100
a 224mm
0.85 25 300
a 224
c 264 mm
1 0.85
dc 655.5 264
t 0.003 0.003
c 264
t 0.00447 0.004 0.005 Transision zone
4- Calculate Md
Cf 0.85f c ' (be b w ) h f 0.85 25 900 300 100 1275 103 N 1275 kN
Cw 0.85f c ' a b w 0.85 25 224 300 1427.4 103 N 1427.4 kN
a hf
M d C w d C f
d
2 2
224 3 100
0.855 1427.4 103 655.5 1275 10 655.5
2 2
1323.4 106 N .mm 1323.4 kN .m
22
Design of T-Beams --- Positive moment
To analyze the section, the steel is divided in two portions: (1) Asf, which provides a
tension force in equilibrium with the compression force of the overhanging flanges, and
providing a section with capacity Muf and (2) Asw, the remaining of the steel, providing
a section with capacity Muw.
M u M uf M uw
Step 1
24 Step 2
24
Design of T-Beams --- Positive moment
M u M uf M uw M uw M u M uf Step 3
Asw bw d Step 5
be be
Same as
bw
26
Design of T-Beams --- Negative moment
be
bw
Design as a rectangular
section with width bw
27
Flange Reinforcement
When flanges of T-beams are in tension, part of the flexural
reinforcement shall be distributed over effective flange width, or a
width equal to one-tenth of the span, whichever is smaller
Additional Additional
Reinforcement min (beff & l/10)
Reinforcement
-ve moment
Main Reinforcement
1 1 u
fy 0.85 f ' b d 2 hf
c e d
As f y As
As = be d a
0.85 f c ' b e bw
5- If a hf: the assumption is right continue as rectangular section
If a > hf: revise As using T-beam equations (steps 1-6).
6- Check the =0.90 assumption (t 0.005) and As,sup As,min
29
Example 3
A floor system consists of a 14.0cm
concrete slab supported by continuous
T-beams with a span L. Given that
bw=30cm and d=55cm, fc =28 MPa and
fy = 420 MPa.
Lm
Determine the steel required at
midspan of an interior beam to resist
a service dead load moment 320
kN.m and a service live load moment
3.0 m 3.0 m 3.0 m
250 kN.m in the following two cases:
hf Slab
(A) L = 8 m
Spandrel
(B) L = 2 m beam
bw
30
Solution (A) L = 8 m 200
14
784 kN.m
Determine be according to ACI requirements 55
As
L 8000
4 4 2000mm 30
be min 16hf b w 16 140 300=2540mm
b 3000 mm
be is taken as 2000 mm, as shown in the figure
Calculate As assuming that a < hf with beam width = be & =0.90
Mu = 1.2(320)+1.6(250)=784 kN.m
0.85 f c ' 2M u
1- 1-
fy 0.85 f c ' be d 2
31
Solution (A) L = 8 m 200
14
784 kN.m
0.85 28 2 784 10 6 55
1 1
420 0.9 0.85 28 2000 550 2 As
30
0.00354
As be d 0.00354 2000 550 3892 mm 2
Check a hf assumption
As f y 3892 420
a 34.3mm h f 140mm
0.85f c 'be 0.85 28 2000
The assumption is right Rectangular section design
Use 825mm (As,sup= 3927 mm2) arranged in two layers.
300 2 40 2 8 4 25
sc 34.5 mm d b 25 mm
4 1
32 25 mm OK
Solution (A) L = 8 m
Check the =0.90 assumption (t 0.005) and As,sup As,min
0.25 f c ' 1.4
0.25 28 1.4
As ,min max bw d ; bw d max 300 550 ; 300 550
fy fy
420
420
As,min 550 mm 2 As,sup 3927 mm 2 OK
14
0.85f c 'be 0.85 28 2000
55
a 34.7
c 40.8 mm 825
1 0.85 30
dc 550 40.8
t 0.003 0.003
c 40.8
33 0.0374 0.005 0.9 OK
Solution (A) L = 8 m
Check moment capacity
a
M d As f y d
2
34.7
0.9 3927 420 550
2
M d 790.7 106 N.mm 790.7 kN.m M u 784 kN.m
200
14
55 825
30
34
Solution (B) L = 2 m 50
14
784 kN.m
Determine be according to ACI requirements 55
L 2000 As
4 4 500mm 30
be min 16hf b w 16 140 300=2540mm
b 3000 mm
be is taken as 500 mm, as shown in the figure
Calculate As assuming that a < hf with beam width = be & =0.90
Mu = 1.2(320)+1.6(250)=784 kN.m
0.85 f c ' 2M u
1 1
fy 0.85 f c ' be d 2
35
Solution (B) L = 2 m 50
784 kN.m
14
0.85 28 2 784 10 6 55
1 1
420 0.9 0.85 28 500 550 2 As
30
0.0159
As be d 0.0159 500 550 4389 mm 2
Check a h assumption
f
As f y 4389 420
a 155mm > h f 140mm
0.85 f c ' be 0.85 28 500
36
Solution (B) L = 2 m
50
14
Calculate required reinforcement
55
0.85 f c '( b bw ) hf
Asf
fy 30
hf
M uf As f y d
2
140
0.9 1586 420 550 288 10 6
N .m
2
M uw M u M uf 784 106 288 106 496 106 N .m
37
Solution (B) L = 2 m
0.85 f c ' 2M u
1 1
fy 0.85 f c ' bw d 2
14
Asw bw d 0.017( 300 )( 550 ) 2808mm 2
55
828
As Asf Asw 1586 2808 4395mm 2
30
Lecture 8
Design of doubly reinforced beams
Doubly Reinforced Rectangular Sections
Beams having steel reinforcement on both the tension and
compression sides are called doubly reinforced sections. Doubly
reinforced sections are useful in the case of limited cross sectional
dimensions being unable to provide the required bending strength.
Increasing the area of reinforcement makes the section brittle.
2
Reasons for Providing Compression Reinforcement
1- Increased strength.
2- Increased ductility.
3
Analysis of Doubly Reinforced Rectangular Sections
Divide the section:
Mn Mn2 Mn1
To analyze the section, the tension steel is divided in two portions: (1) As2, which is in
equilibrium with the compression steel, and providing a section with capacity Mn2 and
(2) As1, the remaining of the tension steel, providing a section with capacity Mn1.
4
Analysis of Doubly Reinforced Rectangular Sections
Find As1 and As2:
T s 2 C s As 2f y Asf s
Asf s
As 2 We need fs to find As2
fy
5
As As 1 As 2 A s 1 A s A s 2
Analysis of Doubly Reinforced Rectangular Sections
Find fs:
c d c
s 0.003
c
c d
f s sE s 0.003E s f y
c
E s 2 105 MPa
6
Analysis of Doubly Reinforced Rectangular Sections
Find c:
T C c C s
a
M d M n As 1f y d - A s f s d - d '
2
8
Analysis of Doubly Reinforced Rectangular Sections
Procedure:
c d find c, a
1) As f y 0.85f c1cb As 0.003E s
c
c d
2) f s 0.003E s f y
c
3) As 2 Asf s
fy
4) As 1 As As 2
d c
5) Check if f = 0.9 s c 0.003 0.005?
a
6) M d M n As 1f y d - Asf s d - d '
2
9
Example 1
For the beam with double reinforcement shown in the figure,
calculate the design moment Md. 5.0
fc =35MPa and fy = 420 MPa. 225
60
632
Solution:-
30
0.05( f c ' 28 )
1 0.85 0.65 for f c ' 35MPa 28 MPa
7
0.05( 35 28 )
1 0.85 0.8 0.65
7
c d
As f y 0.85f c 1cb A s 0.003E s
c
c 50
10 4825(420) 0.85(35)(0.8)c (300) 982 0.003(2 10 5
)
c
Example 1
c 50
4825(420) 0.85(35)(0.8)c (300) 982 0.003(2 10 5
)
c
229.5c 2 1437300c 29460000 0 5.0
c 220mm 225
632
c d
fs 0.003E s f y
c 30
220 50
f s 0.003(2 10 5
) 463 f y 420MPa
220
f s f y 420
11
Example 1 5.0
225
Asf s 982(420)
As 2 982mm 2 60
fy (420) 632
0.003
cmax d
0.003 0.005
3
cmax d
8
3
=1c 1cmax d1
8
3 0.85 1 f c '
max
8 fy
3 0.85 1f c '
As ,max bd
8 fy 13
Design of Doubly Reinforced Rectangular Sections
3) Design As1 for maximum reinforcement (slide 13) and find Mn1, a, c
4) M n M u
f
5) Mn2 = Mn Mn1
c d
6) f s sE s 0.003E s f y
c
M n2 Asf s
7) As As 2 As As 1 As 2
f s(d d ) fy 14
Example 2
Design the beam shown in the figure to resist Mu=1225 kN.m. If
compression steel is required, place it 70 mm from the compression
face.
fc =21 MPa and fy = 420 MPa.
Solution:
Try first to design the section as a singly reinforced section:
0.85f c ' 2 Mu
1 1
fy 0.85f c ' b d 2
0.85(21) 2 1225 106
1 1 0.0284
420 (0.9) 0.85(21) 350 (700) 2
As= b d = 0.0284(350)(700) = 6947 mm2
15 Use 10 32 mm in two rows (As,sup =7069 mm2)
Example 2
Check the ductility of the singly reinforced section:
As f y 7069 420 a 475
a 475 mm c 559mm
0.85f c ' b 0.85(21)350 1 0.85
dc 700 559
t 0.003 0.003 0.00076 0.004
c 559
Section is brittle! can not be used.
Use compression reinforcement.
Mu
1225
Mn 1361kN .m
f 0.9
3 0.85 1f c ' 3 0.85 ( 0.85 )( 21)
As 1 As ,max bd ( 350 )( 700 )
8 fy 8 ( 420 )
16
As 1 3307mm 2
Example 2
As f y 3307( 420 )
a 222.3mm
0.85f cb 0.85( 21)( 350 )
a 222.3
c 261.55mm
1 0.85
a 222.3
M n 1 A s f y d - ( 3307 )( 420 )( 700 )
2 2
M n 1 818 106 N .mm 818kN .m
17
Example 2
c d
f s 0.003E s f y
c
261.55 70
fs 0.003(2 10 5
) 439MPa f y 420MPa
261.55
f s f y 420
M n2 543 106
As 2052mm 2
f s(d d ) 420(700 70)
Asf s (2052)(420)
As 2 2052mm 2
fy (420)
As As 1 As 2 3307 2052 5359mm 2
Use 830 in two rows for tension steel (As,sup = 5655 mm 2 )
18 Use 4 26 for compression steel (As,sup = 2124 mm 2 )
Reinforced Concrete Design I
Lecture 9
Design of beams for shear
Shear Design vs Moment Design
Beams are usually designed
for bending moment first.
Accordingly, cross sectional
dimensions are determined
along with the required
amounts of longitudinal
reinforcement.
2
Shear Design vs Moment Design
3
Shear and flexural stresses
Flexural stresses:
Shear stresses:
5
Shear and cracks in beams
6
Shear and cracks in beams
7
7
Types of Shear Cracks
Two types of inclined cracking occur in beams:
1- Web Shear Cracks
Web shear cracking begins from an interior point in a member at the level of
the centroid of the uncracked section and moves on a diagonal path to the
tension face when the diagonal tensile stresses produced by shear exceed the
tensile strength of concrete.
2- Flexure-Shear Cracks
The most common type, develops from the tip of a flexural crack at the tension
side of the beam and propagates towards mid depth until it reaches the
compression side of the beam.
8
Shear and cracks in beams
It is concluded that the shearing force acting on a vertical
section in a reinforced concrete beam does not cause direct
rupture of that section. Shear by itself or in combination with
flexure may cause failure indirectly by producing tensile
stresses on inclined planes. If these stresses exceed the
relatively low tensile strength of concrete, diagonal cracks
develop. If these cracks are not checked, splitting of the beam
or what is known as diagonal tension failure will take place.
9
Failure by shear in beams
10
Types of Shear Reinforcement
The code allows the use of three types of Shear Reinforcement
Vertical stirrups
Inclined stirrups
Bent up bars
Bent up bars
11
Designing to Resist Shear
The strength requirement for shear that has to be satisfied is:
12
Strength of Concrete in Shear
As
where w
b wd
13
Strength of Concrete in Shear
For members subject to axial compression Nu plus shear Vu, ACI
Code gives the following equation for calculating Vc
N
Vc 0.17 1 u f c' bw d ACI Eq. 11-4
14 A
g
For members subject to axial tension Nu plus shear Vu, ACI Code
gives the following equation for calculating Vc
0.29 N u
Vc 0.17 1 f c' bw d ACI Eq. 11-8
A
14
g
Designing to Resist Shear
To find the force required to be resisted by shear reinforcement:
Vu Vn
Vn Vc Vs
Vu
V s V c
15
Three cases of shear requirement:
Case 1:
For Vu Vc shear reinforcement is required
Case 2:
For Vu 0.50Vc minimum shear reinforcement is required
Case 3:
For Vu < 0.50Vc no shear reinforcement is required
16
Design of Stirrups
Shear reinforcement required when
Vu
Vu Vc Vs
V c
ACI 11.4.7.1
The bar size of the stirrups is established and the spacing is calculated:
A vf yd Av f y d
Vs s ACI Eq. 11-15
s Vs
For inclined stirrups (with angle a)
Av f y d sin cos Av f y d sin cos
Vs s ACI Eq. 11-16
s Vs
where Av = the area of shear reinforcement within spacing s (for a 2-legged stirrup in
a beam: Av = 2 times the area of the stirrup bar). 17
ACI 11.4.6.1
Minimum Amount of Shear Reinforcement
1
Minimum Shear Reinforcement (Av,min) required when Vu Vc
2
bw s bw s
Av min 0.062 f c ' 0.35 ACI Eq. 11-13
f ys f ys
Av f ys Av f ys
s=min ;
0.062 f c ' bw 0.35 bw
except in:
(a) Footings and solid slabs
(b) Concrete joist construction
(c) Beams with h not greater than 250 mm
(d) Beams integral with slabs with h not greater than 600 mm and
not greater than the larger of 2.5 times the thickness of flange, and
0.5 times width of web. 18
Spacing limits for Shear Reinforcement
d
If V s 0.33 f c bw d s max min ;600mm
2
ACI 11.4.5
d
If V s 0.33 f c bw d s max min ;300mm
4
20
Critical Section for Shear ACI 11.1.3.1
Critical section for shear may be taken a distance d away from the
face of the support as in cases (a) and (b), but must be taken at face
of the support as in cases (c) and (d).
21
Approximate Structural Analysis
ACI 8.3.3
ACI Code permits the use of the following approximate shears for design
of continuous beams, provided:
There are two or more spans.
Spans are approximately equal, with the larger of two adjacent spans
not greater than the shorter by more than 20 percent.
Loads are uniformly distributed.
Unfactored live load does not exceed three times the unfactored dead
load.
Members are of similar section dimensions along their lengths
(prismatic).
22
Approximate Structural Analysis
ACI 8.3.3
More than two spans
23
Approximate Structural Analysis
ACI 8.3.3
Two spans
l n = length of clear
span measured
face-to-face of
supports.
24
Summary of ACI Shear Design Procedure for Beams
1- Draw the shearing force diagram and establish the critical section
for shear Vu.
2- Calculate the nominal capacity of concrete in shear Vs.
Vc 0.17 f c ' bw d
3- Calculate the force required to be resisted by shear reinforcement
Vu
V s V c
4- Check the code limit on Vs
Vu
V s V c 0.66 f c ' bw d
If this condition is not satisfied, the concrete dimensions should be
increased.
25
Summary of ACI Shear Design Procedure for Beams
5- Classify the factored shearing forces acting on the beam according
to the following
* For Vu < 0.50Vc , no shear reinforcement is required.
* For Vu 0.50Vc , minimum shear reinforcement is required
Av f ys Av f ys
s=min ;
0.062 f c ' bw 0.35 bw
*For Vu Vc , shear reinforcement is required (in addition, check min shear)
A v f yd Av f y d sin cos
For vertical
stirrups
s For inclined
s
Vs stirrups Vs
6- Maximum spacing smax must be checked
d
If V s 0.33 f c bw d s max min ;600mm
2
d
26 If V s 0.33 f c bw d s max min ;300mm
4
Example
A rectangular beam has the dimensions shown in the figure and is
loaded with a uniform service dead load of 40 kN/m (including own
weight of beam) and a uniform service live load of 25 kN/m.
Design the necessary shear reinforcement given that fc =28 MPa and
fy=420 MPa. Width of support is equal to 30 cm.
60
0.3m 0.3m
30
7.0 m
27
Example
Solution:
wu=1.2(40)+1.6(25)=88 kN/m
Assuming 8 mm stirrups and
20 mm flexural steel,
d=60-4-0.8-1.0=54.2 cm 0.3m
54.2
7.0 m
308 kN 247.1 kN
1- Draw shearing force diagram:
Critical section for shear is located
at a distance of d = 54.2 cm from the face 308 kN
of support.
28
Example
2- Calculate the shear capacity of concrete:
V c 0.17 f c ' bw d 0.17 28 300 542 146.3 103 N 146.3kN
V c 0.75 144.2kN 109.7kN
V c
54.85 kN
2
3- Calculate the force required to be resisted by shear reinforcement Vs.
V 247.1
V s u V c 146.3 183.2kN
0.75
4- Check the code limit on Vs :
0.66 f c ' bw d 0.66 28 300 542 567. 9 103 N 567. 9kN
The beam can be designed to resist shear based on Vu= 247.1 kN over the
entire span. However, to reduce reinforcement cost, the beam will not be
designed for this shear over the entire span. The span will rather be divided
into zones of different shear demands as shown below
308 kN
247.1 kN
Vc=109.7 kN
Zone C 0.5Vc=54.85 kN
Zone B
Zone A
0.61 m
1.23 m
30
Example
Zone (A): [ Vu 0.5Vc ]
No shear reinforcement is required, but it is recommended to use minimum
area of shear reinforcement.
Try 8 mm vertical stirrups
Av f ys Av f ys
s=min ;
0.062 f c ' bw 0.35 bw
2(50) 420 2(50) 420
s min 427mm ; 400 mm s 400mm
0.0062 28 300 0.35 300
31
Example
32
Example
Check maximum stirrup spacing:
308 kN
247.1 kN
Vc=109.7 kN 8@25 60
Zone C 0.5Vc=54.85 kN
8@12 Zone B Zone A
8@25 8@25 30
Section in zones A&B
0.61 m
1.23 m
8@12 60
8@12 8@25 30
Section in zone C
34
Reinforced Concrete Design I
Lecture 10
Design of slabs
Regula
(3
y
Introduction Plate/Shell (2D) z
x z x
A slab is a structural element whose thickness is small compared
t<<(x,z) to
its own length and width.
h
t L , S zS
t t
Lx
Slabs in buildings are usually used to transmit the loads on floors and
roofs to the supporting beams Loads
Dimensional Hierarchy of Structural
Slab Beam
Footing
Slab
Beam Beam
Soil
2
Introduction
Slabs are flexural members. Their flexure strength requirement may
be expressed by
Mu M n
Types of Slabs
Solid slabs :- which are divided into
- One way solid slabs One-way slab
- Two way solid slabs
3
Solid Slab
L L
Two way slab 2 One-way slab 2
S S
Ribbed Slab (joist construction)
5
Ribbed slab with hollow blocks
6
One-way solid slabs
A one-way solid slab curves under loads in one direction only.
Accordingly, slabs supported on two opposite sides only and slabs
supported on all four sides, but L/S 2 are classified as one-way
slabs.
shrinkage Reinft.
Main Reinft.
Main Reinft.
S
Main Reinft.
9
Minimum thickness of one way slabs ACI Table 9.5(a)
11
Loads Assigned to Slabs
wu=1.2 D.L + 1.6 L.L
12
a- Dead Load (D.L)
1- Weight of slab covering materials, total =2.315 kN/m2
tiles (2.5cm thick) =0.02523 = 0.575 kN/m2
cement mortar (2.5cm thick) =0.02521 = 0.525 kN/m2
sand (5.0cm thick) =0.0518 = 0.9 kN/m2
plaster (1.5cm thick) =0.01521 = 0.315 kN/m2
tiles 2.5 cm
cement mortar 2.5 cm
sand 5 cm
slab
plaster 1.5 cm
13
2-Equivalent partition weight
This load is usually taken as the weight of all walls (weight of 1m span
of wall total spans of all walls) carried by the slab divided by the floor
area and treated as a dead load rather than a live load.
To calculate the weight of 1m span of wall:
Each 1m2 surface of wall contains 12.5 blocks
A block with thickness 10cm weighs 10 kg
A block with thickness 20cm weighs 20 kg
2- Ribbed slab:
Example
Find the total ultimate load per rib for the ribbed slab shown:
15
3- Own weight of slab
Solution
Total volume (hatched) = 0.5 0.25 0.25 = 0.03125 m3
S1 S2
18
Design of one way SOLID slabs
19
One-way solid slabs
One-way solid slabs are designed as a number of independent 1 m
wide strips which span in the short direction and are supported on
crossing beams. These strips are designed as rectangular beams.
1m
S1 S2
L
0.85f c 2M u
1 1 2
fy
0.85 f c bd
S1 S2
20
One-way solid slabs
shrinkage Reinft.
Main Reinft.
21
Check on tension/compression control (maximum allowed steel)
Method 1: Check et
3 0.85 b1 f c '
max
8 fy
22
Shrinkage Reinforcement Ratio
According to ACI Code and for fy =420 MPa ACI 7.12.2.1
shrinkage 0.0018 As ,shrinkage 0.0018 b h
where, b = width of strip, and h = slab thickness
24
Approximate Structural Analysis
Bending Moment
ACI 8.3.3
More than two spans
25
Approximate Structural Analysis
ACI 8.3.3
Bending Moment
Two spans
l n = length of clear
span measured
face-to-face of
supports.
For calculating
negative moments,
l n is taken as the
average of the
adjacent clear span
lengths.
26
Approximate Structural Analysis
Shear ACI 8.3.3
More than two spans
27
Approximate Structural Analysis
Shear ACI 8.3.3
Two spans
28
Summary of One-way Solid Slab Design Procedure
1- Select representative 1m wide design strip/strips to span in the
short direction.
2- Choose a slab thickness to satisfy deflection control requirements.
When several numbers of slab panels exist, select the largest
calculated thickness.
3- Calculate the factored load wu
4- Draw the shear force and bending moment diagrams for each of
the strips.
5- Check adequacy of slab thickness in terms of resisting shear by
satisfying the following equation: V u 0.17 f c ' b d
where b = 1000 mm
If the previous equation is not satisfied, go ahead and enlarge the
thickness to do so.
29
Summary of One-way Solid Slab Design Procedure
6- Design flexural and shrinkage reinforcement:
Flexural reinforcement ratio is calculated from the following
equation
0.85f c 2M u
1 1 2
fy
0.85 f c bd
where b = 1000 mm
8.0 m
31
Solution:
1- Select a representative 1 m wide slab strip:
The selected representative strip is shown in the figure
8.0 m
For one-end continuous spans,
17cm
hmin = l/24 =4.0/24=0.167m
Slab thickness is taken as 17 cm
4.0 m 4.0 m 4.0 m
Wu
32
Solution:
3- Calculate the factored load wu per unit length of the selected strip:
Own weight of slab = 0.17 25 = 4.25 kN/m2
wu= 1.20 (3+4.25) +1.60 (3)= 13.5 kN/m2
For a strip 1 m wide, wu=13.5 kN/m
4- Evaluate the maximum factored shear forces and bending moments
in the strip:
The clear span length, ln = 4.0 0.30 = 3.70 m
wu=13.5 kN/m
33
Solution:
18.5 18.5
16.8 16.8
7.7 7.7
16.8
16.8
25 28.7
25
25 25
28.7
36
Solution:
For max. negative moment, Mu = 18.5 kN.m
37
Solution:
For max. positive moment, Mu = 16.8 kN.m
38
Solution:
Calculate the area of shrinkage reinforcement:
Area of shrinkage reinforcement = 0.0018 (100) (17) = 306 mm2
For shrinkage reinforcement use 10 mm @ 25 cm (from previous slides calculations)
Shrinkage reinft.
10@25 10@25 10@20 10@20 10@25
17cm
39
Solution:
40
Design of one way RIBBED slabs
41
One-way ribbed slabs
Ribbed slabs consist of regularly spaced ribs monolithically built
with a toping slab. The voids between the ribs may be either light
material such as hollow blocks [figure 1] or it may be left unfilled
[figure 2].
Topping slab
w u l c2
t
1240 f c
h 3.5 bw
bw 100
44
Key components of one-way ribbed slabs
Shear strength: ACI 8.13.8
Shear strength provided by rib concrete Vc may be taken 10% greater
than those for beams.
Flexural strength:
Ribs are designed as rectangular beams in the regions of negative
moment at the supports and as T-shaped beams in the regions of
positive moments between the supports.
45
Key components of one-way ribbed slabs
Hollow blocks:
Hollow blocks are made of lightweight concrete or other lightweight
materials. The most common concrete hollow block sizes are 40 25
cm in plan and heights of 14, 17, 20, and 24 cm.
46
Summary of one-way ribbed slab design procedure
1. The direction of ribs is chosen.
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t
3. Provide shrinkage reinforcement for the topping slab in both
directions.
4. The factored load on each of the ribs is computed.
5. The shear force and bending moment diagrams are drawn.
6. The strength of the web in shear is checked.
7. Design the ribs as T-section shaped beams in the positive moment
regions and rectangular beams in the regions of negative moment.
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the
reinforcement are to be prepared.
47
Example
Design a one-way ribbed slab to cover a 3.8 m x 10 m panel, shown in the
figure below. The covering materials weigh 2.25 kN/m2, equivalent
partition load is equal to 0.75 kN/m2, and the live load is 2 kN/m2.
Use fc=25 MPa, fy=420MPa
3.8 m
10 m
48
Solution
1. The direction of ribs is chosen:
Ribs are arranged in the short direction as shown in the figure
3.8 m
5.0 m 5.0 m
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t:
From ACI Table 9.5(a), hmin = 380/16 = 23.75cm use h = 24 cm.
Let width of web, bw =10 cm
Use hollow blocks of size 40 cm 25 cm 17 cm (weight=0.17 kN)
Topping slab thickness = 24 17 = 7cm > lc/12 =40/12= 3.3cm > 5cm OK
For a unit strip of topping slab:
wu=[1.2(0.07 25 + 0.75 + 2.25) + 1.6(2)] 1m = 8.9 kN/m = 8.9 N/mm
w u l c2 8.9( 400 ) 2
t 16mm OK
1240 f c ( 0.9 )1240 25
49
Solution
3. Provide shrinkage reinforcement for the topping slab in both directions:
Area of shrinkage reinforcement, As=0.0018(1000)70=126 mm2
Use 5 6 mm/m in both directions.
1.0 m
= 0.24- 0.136 = 0.104 m3
0.25 m
Weight of concrete in 1m2
= 0.104 25 = 2.6 kN/m2
Weight of hollow blocks in 1m2
= 8 0.17= 1.36 kN/m2
7 cm
0.4 m 0.1 m 0.4 m
Total dead load /m2
= 2.25 + 0.75 + 2.6 + 1.36
0.24 m
= 7.0 kN/m2
50
Solution
wu=1.2(7)+1.6(2)=11.6 kN/m2
wu/m of rib =11.6x0.5= 5.8 kN/m of rib
5. Critical shear forces and bending moments are determined (simply supported beam):
Maximum factored shear force = wul/2 = 5.8 (3.8/2) = 11 kN
Maximum factored bending moment = wul2/8 = 5.8 (3.8)2/8 = 10.5 kN.m
6. Check rib strength for beam shear:
Effective depth d = 2420.60.6 =20.8 cm, assuming 12mm reinforcing
bars and 6 mm stirrups.
1.1V c 1.1 0.75 0.17 25 100 208 14400 N = 14.4 kN Vu,max 11kN
51
Solution
7. Design flexural reinforcement for the ribs:
There is only positive moments over the simply supported beam, and the
section of maximum positive moment is to be designed as a T-section
Assume that a<70mm and =0.90Rectangular section with b = be =500mm
0.85 25 50
2 10.5 106
1 1
105 kN.m
7
420 0.9 0.85 25 500 2082
24
As
0.0013
10
As be d 0.0013 500 208 135 mm 2
As f y 157 420
a 6.2 mm 70mm
0.85f c 'be 0.85 25 500
The assumption is right
52
Solution
Check As,min
0.25 f c ' 1.4
As,min max bw d ; bw d
fy
fy
As,min 70 mm 2 A s,sup 157 mm 2 OK
Check =0.9
a 6.2
c 7.3 mm
1 0.85
dc 208 7.3
t 0.003 0.003
c 7.3
t 0.083 0.005 0.9 OK
53
Solution
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the reinforcement are to be
prepared
110 m
110 m
110 m
110 m
3.8 m
A A
5.0 m 5.0 m
6mm stirrups 6mm mesh
@25 cm @20 cm
7cm
24cm
17cm
210mm 10 40 cm 10 210mm
Section A-A
Lecture 11
Design of short concentric columns
Columns
Columns are vertical compression members of a structural frame intended to support the
load-carrying beams. They transmit loads from the upper floors to the lower levels and then
to the soil through the foundations.
Loads
Beam Beam
P Column
h Slab
b Beam
Column Beam Beam
h l
b Slab
Footing
Beam Beam
Soil
2
Columns
Usually columns carry bending moment as well, about one or both axes of the cross
section, and the bending action may produce tensile forces over a part of the cross
section.
The main reinforcement in a columns is longitudinal, parallel to the direction of the load
and consists of bars arranged in a square, rectangular, or circular shape.
3
Length of the column in relation to its lateral dimensions
Columns can be classified as
1- Short Columns, for which the strength is governed by the strength of the materials
and the dimensions of the cross section
2- Slender Columns, for which the strength may be significantly reduced by lateral
deflections.
4
Analysis and Design of Short Columns
Column Types:
1. Tied
2. Spiral
3. Composite
5
Behavior of Tied and Spirally-Reinforced Columns
Axial load tests have proven that tied and spirally reinforced columns
having the same cross-sectional areas of concrete and steel reinforcement
behave in the same manner up to the ultimate load.
At that load, tied columns fail suddenly due to excessive cracking in
the concrete section followed by buckling of the longitudinal reinforcement
between ties within the failure region. For spirally reinforced columns, once the
ultimate load is reached, the concrete shell covering the spiral starts to spall off
but the core will continue to carry additional loads because the
spiral provides a confining force to the concrete core, thus enabling
the column to sustain large deformations before final collapse.
6
Behavior of Tied and Spirally-Reinforced Columns
7
Nominal Capacity under Concentric Axial Loads
Pn rP0
Pn r Ag 0.85f c Ast (f y 0.85f c)
9
Design Capacity under Concentric Axial Loads
Pn Pu
Pn r Ag 0.85f c Ast f y 0.85f c Pu
or
Pn r A g 0.85f c g f y 0.85f c Pu
where g = Ast / Ag
10
= 0.75 for spiral columns r = 0.85 ( spiral )
Design of Short Concentrically Loaded Columns
Pn Pu
Pn r Ag 0.85f c g f y 0.85f c Pu
Pn Pu
Pn r Ag 0.85f c g f y 0.85f c Pu
Pn Pu
Pn r Ag 0.85f c g f y 0.85f c Pu
Pu 1
g 0.85f c
r A g f y 0.85f c
13
Design of spirals
Asp D c
from: s
[( / 4 ) D c ] s
2
Longitudinal Steel
ACI 10.9.1
16
Design Considerations
Longitudinal Steel
ACI 10.9.2
17
Design Considerations
Longitudinal Steel
- Clear Distance between Reinforcing Bars (Longitudinal Steel)
For tied or spirally reinforced columns, clear
distance between bars, shown in the figure, is not to
be less than the larger of 1.50 times bar diameter or
40 mm. This is done to ensure free flow of concrete
among reinforcing bars.
ACI 7.6.3
S c max 1.5 d b , 40mm
18
Design Considerations
Lateral Ties
Lateral Ties
Lateral Ties
ACI 7.10.5.2
21
Design Considerations
Lateral Ties
ACI 7.10.5.1
22
Design Considerations
Spirals
size 10 mm diameter
ACI 7.10.4.3
Lateral Reinforcement
Ties are effective in restraining the longitudinal bars from buckling out through the
surface of the column, holding the reinforcement cage together during the construction
process, confining the concrete core and when columns are subjected to horizontal
forces, they serve as shear reinforcement.
24
Design Procedure for Short Concentrically Loaded Columns
1. Evaluate the factored axial load Pu acting on the column. This can be done by:
a- Tributary Area Method
b- Pu is the sum of the reactions of the beams supported by the column.
2. Assume a starting reinforcement ratio g that satisfies ACI Code limits. Usually a
2 % ratio is chosen for economic considerations.
5. Readjust the reinforcement ratio by substituting the actual cross sectional area in the
respective equation. This ratio has to fall within the specified code limits.
25
Design Procedure for Short Concentrically Loaded Columns
6. Calculate the needed area of longitudinal reinforcement ratio based on the adjusted
reinforced ratio and the chosen concrete dimensions.
7. From reinforcement tables, choose the number and diameters of needed reinforcing
bars. For rectangular sections, a minimum of four bars is needed, while a minimum
of six bars is used for circular columns.
8. Design the lateral reinforcement according to the type of column, either ties or
spirals.
9. Check whether the spacing between longitudinal reinforcing bars satisfies ACI
Code requirements.
10. Draw the designed section showing concrete dimensions and with required
longitudinal and lateral reinforcement.
26
Example 1
The cross section of a short axially loaded tied column is shown in the
figure. It is reinforced with 616mm bars. Calculate the design load
capacity of the cross section. Ties 8@25cm
f c 30MPa f y 420MPa
Solution
Assume first that g 2%
Pu
Ag
0.65 0.8 0.85f c g f y 0.85f c
1000 103
Ag
0.65 0.8 0.85 30 0.02 420 0.85 30
29 A g 57594mm 2
Example 2
A g 57594mm 2
b 250mm
h 230mm
use column 25cm 25cm
Stirrup design
Use 8 mm (for longitudinal bars with 14 mm < 30 mm)
8 mm @ 200 mm 250 mm
250 mm
32
Example 3
Solution
A s 0.01 (3502 ) 962mm 2
4
use 714 (A s,sup =1078 mm 2 )
35
Reinforced Concrete Design I
Lecture 12 Part I
Bond, development length, and splicing
Bond
2
Concept of Bond Stress
Bond stresses are existent whenever the tensile stress or force in a reinforcing bar
changes from point to point along the length of the bar in order to maintain equilibrium.
Without bond stresses, the reinforcement will pull out of the concrete.
Concrete
Reinforcing bar
PL/4
M
M+dM
avg
dx
Moment diagram
3
Concept of Bond Stress
F 0.0
T2 T1 Fbond
If this equation is not true (bond force Fbond is not strong enough), the bar will pull out
avg
f - f d
= s2 s1 b
l T2=fs2Ab
fs2=fs1+fs
4l
4
Mechanism of Bond Transfer
A smooth bar embedded in concrete develops bond by adhesion between concrete &
reinforcement, and a small amount of friction.
This is different in a deformed bar. Once adhesion is lost at high bar stress and some
slight movement between the reinforcement and the concrete occurs, bond is then
provided by friction and bearing on the deformations of the bar. At much higher bar
stress, bearing on the deformations of the bar will be the only component contributing to
bond strength.
5
Splitting cracks
6
Splitting cracks
Splitting of concrete may occur along the bars, either in vertical planes as in
figure (a) or in horizontal plane as in figure (b).
7
Splitting cracks
The minimum distance from the bar to the surface of the concrete or to the
next bar. The smaller the distance, the smaller is the splitting load.
The tensile strength of the concrete. The higher the tensile strength, the
higher is the splitting resistance.
The average bond stress. The higher the average bond stress, the higher is the
splitting resistance.
If the concrete cover and bar spacing are large compared to the bar diameter,
a pullout failure can occur, where the bar and the ring of concrete between
successive deformations pullout along a cylindrical failure surface joining
the tips of the deformations.
8
Development Length
9
Development Length
10
Development Length
The development length ld is that length of embedment necessary to develop the full
tensile strength of the bar (on both sides of sections where fy stress is required),
controlled by either pullout or splitting.
avg =
f s2 f s1 d b
4l
f s2 f s1 f y
f y db
ld , where avg,u is the value avg at bond failure
4 avg,u
11
Development Length of Deformed Bars in Tension
fy
ld d b 300 mm,
1.1 f c C K tr ACI Eq. 12-1
db
C K tr
where 2.5 ACI 12.2.3
db
where,
ld = development length
db = nominal diameter of bar
fy = specified yield strength of reinforcement
C = spacing or cover dimension (see next slide)
Ktr = transverse reinforcement index (see slide 12)
12 abgl = see next slides
Development Length of Deformed Bars in Tension [contd.]
ACI 12.2.4
is a reinforcement size factor that reflects better performance of the smaller diameter
reinforcement
(a) 20mm and smaller bars... 0.8
(b) 22mm and larger bars..... 1.0
14
Development Length of Deformed Bars in Tension [contd.]
16
Example 1
Determine the development length in tension required for the uncoated bottom bars as
shown in the figure. If (a) Ktr is calculated (b) Ktr is assumed = 0.0
Use fc = 25 MPa normal weight concrete and fy = 420 MPa
(c) Check if space is available for bar development in the beam shown
60 cm
10@20
420
40 cm
Section A-A
17
Example 1
Determine the development length in tension required for the uncoated bottom bars as
shown in the figure. If (a) Ktr is calculated (b) Ktr is assumed = 0.0
Use fc = 25 MPa normal weight concrete and fy = 420 MPa
(c) Check if space is available for bar development in the beam shown
Solution:
60 cm
(a) Ktr is calculated 10@20
420
=1.0 for bars over concrete < 30 cm thick
=1.0 for uncoated bars 40 cm
60 cm
i.e., use 2.5 10@20
db 420
fy
ld d b 300 mm
1.1 f c C K tr
40 cm
db Cover is 4 cm on all sides
420 (1.0)(1.0)(0.8)(1.0)
ld 20 489 mm 300 mm OK
1.1 25 2 .5
b) Assuming K tr 0.0
C K tr 467 0
2.33 2.5 OK
db 20
420 (1.0)(1.0)(0.8)(1.0)
ld 20 524 mm 300 mm OK
19 1.1 25 2.33
Example 1 [contd.]
60 cm
10@20
420
40 cm
Section A-A
20
Development Length of Deformed Bars in Compression ACI 12.3
Shorter development lengths are required for compression than for tension since
flexural tension cracks are not present for bars in compression. In addition, there is
some bearing of the ends of the bars on concrete.
The development length ld for deformed bars in compression is computed as the product
of the basic development length ldc and applicable modification factors, but ld is not to
be less than 200 mm.
ld = ldc x applicable modification factors 200 mm.
The basic development length ldb for deformed bars in compression is given as
0.24 f y d b
ldc max ;0.043 f y d b
fc '
21
Development Length of Deformed Bars in Compression [contd.] ACI 12.3
Applicable Modification Factors
1. Excessive reinforcement factor =As required / As provided
2. Spirals or Ties: the modification factor for reinforcement, enclosed with spiral
reinforcement 6mm in diameter and 10 cm pitch or within 12mm ties spaced at
10 cm on center is given as 0.75
22
Critical
section
ldh
Development length ldh for deformed bars in tension terminating in a standard hook is
computed as the product of the basic development length lhb and applicable
modification factors, but ldh is not to be less than 8db, nor less than 150 mm.
ldh = lhb x applicable modification factors 15 cm or 8db.
The basic development length lhb for hooked bars is given as
0.24 e f y
ACI 12.5.1
lhb db
l fc '
For lightweight aggregate concrete, l = 0.75. ACI 12.5.2
For epoxy-coated reinforcement, e= 1.2.
Otherwise, l = 1.0, e= 1.0
23
Development of Standard Hooks in Tension [contd.]
ACI 12.5.3
Applicable Modification Factors
1. Concrete cover: for db 36mm, side cover (normal to plane of hook) 65 mm, and
for 90 degree hook, cover on bar extension beyond hook 50 mm, the modification
factor is taken as 0.7.
65 mm
65 mm
24
Development of Standard Hooks in Tension [contd.]
ACI 12.5.3
Applicable Modification Factors
2. Excessive reinforcement factor =As required / As provided
3. Spirals or Ties: for db 36mm, hooks enclosed vertically or horizontally within ties
or stirrups spaced along the full development length ldh not greater than 3db , where db is
the diameter of the hooked bar, and the first tie or stirrup shall enclose the bent portion of
the hook, within 2db of the outside of the bend, the modification factor is taken as 0.8.
25
Development of Standard Hooks in Tension [contd.]
ACI 7.1
90-degree hook
Development length ldh is measured
from the critical section of the bar
to the out-side end or edge of the
hooks. Either a 90 or a 180-degree
hook, shown in the figure, may be used
ldh
44 through 56
26
ACI 12.1.2 ldh
Part (b)
Development of Standard Hooks in Tension [contd.]
ACI 12.5.4
Confinement of hooks
For bars being developed by a standard hook at discontinuous ends of members with both
side cover and top (or bottom) cover over hook less than 65 mm, the hooked bar shall be
enclosed within ties or stirrups perpendicular to the bar being developed, spaced not
greater than 3db along ldh. The first tie or stirrup shall enclose the bent portion of the
hook, within 2db of the outside of the bend, where db is the diameter of the hooked bar.
27
Example 2
Determine the development length or anchorage required for the epoxy-coated top bars
of the beam shown in the figure. The beam frames into an exterior 80cm x 30cm
column (the bars extend parallel to the 80 cm side). Show the details if:
(a) If a 180-degree hook is used
(b) If a 90-degree hook is used
Use fc = 28 MPa and fy = 420 MPa 432
50 cm
12@15
Solution:
=1.3 for bars over concrete > 30 cm thick 40 cm
=1.5 for coated bars (take the larger of 1.2 and 1.5 conservatively)
=1.3x1.5 = 1.95 > 1.7 use 1.7
=1.0 for 32mm, =1.0 for normal weight concrete
C the smallest of 40+12+16=68 mm
{[400-2(40)-2(12)-32]/(3)}/(2)=44 mm
i.e., C is taken as 44 mm
28
Example 2 [contd.]
40Atr 2( 113 )
K tr 15.1 mm
sn ( 150 )( 4 )
C K tr 44 15 432
1.85 2.5
50 cm
OK
db 32 12@15
fy
ld d b 300 mm
1.1 f c C K tr
40 cm
db
420 ( 1.7 )( 1.0 )( 1.0 )
ld 32 2127 mm 300 mm OK
1.1 28 1 .85
4db =128 mm
Critical section
5db =160 mm
180o hook
Critical section
30 90o hook
Splicing
31
Splices of Reinforcement
ACI 12.14
Splicing of reinforcement bars is necessary, either because the available bars are not
long enough, or to ease construction, in order to guarantee continuity of the
reinforcement according to design requirements.
Types of Splices:
(a) Welding (b) Mechanical connectors
(c) Lap splices (simplest and most economical method)
In a lapped splice, the force in one bar is transferred to the concrete, which transfers it to
the adjacent bar.
Splice length is the distance over which the two bars overlap.
32
Splice length
Splices of Reinforcement
Important note:
Lap splices have a number of disadvantages, including congestion of reinforcement at
the lap splice and development of transverse cracks due to stress concentrations. It is
recommended to locate splices at sections where stresses are low.
T T
ls Direct contact
2. Non-Contact Splice (spaced) the distance between two bars cannot be greater than
1/5 of the splice length nor 15 cm
ACI 12.14.2.3
T
s
T
ls Bars are spaced
33
Splices of Deformed Bars in Tension
ACI 12.15
ACI code divides tension lap splices into two classes, A and B. The class of splice used
is dependent on the level of stress in the reinforcing and on the percentage of steel that
is spliced at particular location.
ACI 12.15.1
Class A:
A splice must satisfy the following two conditions to be in this class:
(a) the area of reinforcement provided is at least twice that required by analysis over the
entire length of the splice; and
(b) one-half or less of the total reinforcement is spliced within the required lap length.
Class B:
If conditions above are not satisfied classify as Class B.
34
Example 3
Solution:
Class B splice is required where ls = 1.3 ld
=1.0, =1.0 =1.0 < 1.7 OK
ls
=1.0, =1.0
C the smallest of 75+8=83 mm
250/2=125 mm 16 @ 250
16 @ 25
ls=58 cm
16 @ 25
36
Splices of Deformed Bars in Compression
ACI 12.16
Bond behavior of compression bars is not complicated by the problem of transverse
tension cracking and thus compression splices do not require provisions as strict as
those specified for tension
When bars of different size are lap-spliced in compression, splice length shall be the
larger of either development length of the larger bar, or splice length of the smaller bar.
ACI 12.16.2
ACI 12.15.3
37
Example 4
Design a compression lap splice for a tied column whose cross section is shown in the
figure when:
(a) 16 mm bars are used on both sides of the splice.
(b) 16 mm bars are lap spliced with 18 mm bars.
Use fc = 30 MPa and fy = 420 MPa
Solution:
(a) For bars of same 16 mm diameter
Splice length in compression and for fy =420 MPa
is equal to 0.071 fy db = 0.071 (420)(16)
= 477 mm >300 mm
taken as 480 mm
38
Example 4 [contd.]
Splice length of smaller diameter bar was calculated in part (a) as 477 mm. Thus, the
splice length is taken as 480 mm.
39
Reinforced Concrete Design I
Lecture 12 PART II
Bar cutoff
Bar cutoff
2
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent
Example
3
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent
Example
4
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent
Example
5
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent
Example
6
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent
7
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent
8
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent
Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: -1/11, +1/16, -1/11)
9
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent
Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: -1/16, +1/14, -1/10)
10
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent
Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: -1/24, +1/14, -1/10)
11
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent
Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: 0, +1/11, -1/10)
12
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent
ACI 12.10.3
Reinforcement shall extend
beyond the point at which it is no
longer required to resist flexure
for a distance equal to d or 12db,
whichever is greater, except at
supports of simple spans and at
free end of cantilevers.
ACI 12.10.4
Continuing reinforcement shall
have an embedment length not
less than ld beyond the point
where bent or terminated tension
reinforcement is no longer
required to resist flexure.
13
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent
a. Factored shear force at the cutoff point does not exceed two-thirds of the design shear
strength, Vn .
b. Stirrup area exceeding that required for shear and torsion is provided along each
cutoff bar over a distance from the termination point equal to three-fourths of the
effective depth of the member. Excess stirrup area Av is not to be less than 0.41bwS /fy .
Spacing S is not to exceed d/8b where b is the ratio of area of reinforcement cutoff to
total area of tension reinforcement at the section.
c. For 36 mm bars and smaller, continuing reinforcement provides double the area
required for flexure at the cutoff point and factored shear does not exceed three-fourths
of the design shear strength, Vn .
14
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent
Positive moment:
At least one-third the positive moment reinforcement in simple members and
one-fourth the positive moment reinforcement in continuous members shall
extend along the same face of member into the support. In beams, such
reinforcement shall extend into the support at least 150 mm. ACI 12.11.1
Positive moment:
ACI 12.11.3
16
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent
Positive moment:
17
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent
Positive moment:
18
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent
Positive moment:
19
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent
Negative moment:
Negative moment reinforcement in a continuous, restrained cantilever member, or in
any member of rigid frame, is to be anchored in or through the supporting member
by development length, hooks, or mechanical anchorage.
ACI 12.12.1
At least one-third the total tension reinforcement provided for negative moment at a
support shall have an embedment length beyond the point of inflection not less than
d, 12db, or ln/16, whichever is greater
ACI 12.12.3
20
Reinforced Concrete Design I
ACI-318
2
References for detailing
ACI-315
3
References for detailing
4
Bar cutoff: Theoretical points of cutoff or bent
Positive moment:
At least one-third the positive
moment reinforcement in simple
members and one-fourth the
positive moment reinforcement in
continuous members shall extend
along the same face of member into
the support. In beams, such
reinforcement shall extend into the
support at least 150 mm.
Negative moment:
At least one-third the total tension
reinforcement provided for negative
moment at a support shall have an
embedment length beyond the point
of inflection not less than d, 12db, or
ln/16, whichever is greater
5
Typical details for one way solid slabs
6
Requirements for using standard detailing for beams and one
way slabs:
ACI 8.3.3
There are two or more spans.
Spans are approximately equal, with the larger of two adjacent spans
not greater than the shorter by more than 20 percent.
Loads are uniformly distributed.
Unfactored live load does not exceed three times the unfactored dead
load.
Members are of similar section dimensions along their lengths
(prismatic).
7
Typical details for one way solid slabs
Straight bars
8
Typical details for one way solid slabs
Straight bars
9
Typical details for one way solid slabs
Straight bars
10
Typical details for one way solid slabs
Bent-up bars
11
Typical details for beams
Straight bars
12
Typical details for beams
Straight bars
13
Typical details for beams
Straight bars
14
Typical details for columns
15
Typical details for columns
16
17
18
19
Reinforced Concrete Design I
Lecture 13
Design of isolated footings
Footing
Introduction
Footings are structural elements used to support columns and walls and transmit their
loads to the underlying soil without exceeding its safe bearing capacity below the
structure.
Loads
B B Column
L L Beam
P P
M
Footing
Soil
2
Footing
Introduction
The design of footings calls for the combined efforts of geotechnical and structural
engineers.
The geotechnical engineer, on one hand, conducts the site investigation and on the light
of his findings, recommends the most suitable type of foundation and the allowable
bearing capacity of the soil at the suggested foundation level.
The structural engineer, on the other hand, determines the concrete dimensions and
reinforcement details of the approved foundation.
3
Types of Footing
Isolated Footings
Isolated or single footings are used to support single columns. This is one of the most
economical types of footings and is used when columns are spaced at relatively long
distances. P kN
B C2
C1
4
Types of Footing
Isolated Footings
Secondary reinft
Main reinft.
7
Types of Footing
Combined Footings
Combined footings are used when two columns are so close that single footings cannot
be used. Or, when one column is located at or near a property line. In such a case, the
load on the footing will be eccentric and hence this will result in an uneven distribution
of load to the supporting soil.
P1 P2
P2 kN
L
PP1 kN
1 kN
B C2 C2
C1 C1
L1 L2 L2
8
Types of Footing
Combined Footings
The shape of a combined footing in plan shall be such that the centroid of the
foundation plan coincides with the centroid of the loads in the columns. Combined
footings are either rectangular or trapezoidal. Rectangular footings are favored due to
their simplicity in terms of design and construction. However, rectangular footings are
not always practicable because of the limitations that may be imposed on their
longitudinal projections beyond the two columns or the large difference that may exist
between the magnitudes of the two column loads. Under these conditions, the provision
of a trapezoidal footing is more economical.
9
Types of Footing
Continuous Footings
Continuous footings support a row of three or more columns.
P1 P2 P3 P4 P4 kN
P3 kN
P2 kN
L
P1 kN
10
Types of Footing
Strap (Cantilever) footings
Strap footings consists of two separate footings, one under each column, connected
together by a beam called strap beam. The purpose of the strap beam is to prevent
overturning of the eccentrically loaded footing. It is also used when the distance
between this column and the nearest internal column is long that a combined footing
will be too narrow.
P2 kN
P1 P2
property line
Strap Beam
P1 kN
L1 L2
B1 C2 C2 B2
C1 C1
11
Types of Footing
Mat (Raft) Footings
Mat footings consist of one footing usually placed under the entire building area. They
are used when soil bearing capacity is low, column loads are heavy and differential
settlement for single footings are very large or must be reduced.
12
Types of Footing
Pile caps
Pile caps are thick slabs used to tie a group of piles together to support and transmit
column loads to the piles.
P
13
Footing Loading
Distribution of Soil Pressure
The distribution of soil pressure under a footing is a function of the type of soil, the
relative rigidity of the soil and the footing, and the depth of the foundation at the level
of contact between footing and soil.
P P P
Centroidal axis
L L L
For design purposes, it is common to assume the soil pressure is uniformly distributed.
The pressure distribution will be uniform if the centroid of the footing coincides with
the resultant of the applied loads.
14
Footing Loading
Pressure Distribution Below Footings
The maximum intensity of loading at the base of a foundation which causes failure of
soil is called ultimate bearing capacity of soil, denoted by qu.
The allowable bearing capacity of soil is obtained by dividing the ultimate bearing
capacity of soil by a factor of safety on the order of 2.50 to 3.0.
The allowable soil pressure for soil may be either gross or net pressure permitted on the
soil directly under the base of the footing.
The gross pressure represents the total stress in the soil created by all the loads above
the base of the footing. For design, the net soil pressure is used instead of the gross
pressure value.
P
Df
hc
15
Footing Loading
Concentrically Loaded Footings
If the resultant of the loads acting at the base of the footing coincides with the centroid
of the footing area, the footing is concentrically loaded and a uniform distribution of
soil pressure is assumed in design.
Centroidal axis
P/A
16
Footing Loading
Eccentrically Loaded Footings
Footings are often designed for both axial load and moment. Moment may be caused by
lateral forces due to wind or earthquake, and by lateral soil pressures.
A footing is eccentrically loaded if the supported column is not concentric with the
footing area or if the column transmits at its juncture with the footing not only a vertical
load but also a bending moment.
P
P
e
M
Centroidal axis Centroidal axis
y y
L L
P/A P/A
Pey/I My/I
17
Design of Isolated Footings
18
Design of Isolated Footings
19
Design of Isolated Footings
Note that 7.5 cm of clear concrete cover is required if concrete is cast against
soil.
ACI 7.7.1
20
Design of Isolated Footings
Df
hc
qall(net)
where
hc is the assumed footing depth,
df is the distance from ground surface to the contact surface between footing base and soil,
c is the weight density of concrete, and
s is the weight density of soil on top of footing.
21
Design of Isolated Footings
3- Establish the required base area of the footing
Base area of footing is determined from unfactored forces transmitted by footing to soil
and the allowable soil pressure evaluated through principles of soil mechanics.
PD PL
Areq
qall (net ) ACI 15.2.2
where PD and PL are column service dead and live loads, respectively.
Select appropriate L, and B values, if possible, use a square footing to achieve greatest
economy.
22
Design of Isolated Footings
The ACI Code assumes that failure takes place on vertical planes located at distance d/2
from the faces of the column.
ACI 11.11.1.2
23
Design of Isolated Footings
Vu qu (net )L B C1 d C2 d
C1 + d
C1
ACI 11.11.1.2
C2 + d
C2
B
L
Since there are two layers of reinforcement, an average value of d may be used:
d = h 7.5cm db , where db is the bar diameter. 24
Design of Isolated Footings
5- Check footing thickness for punching shear [contd.]
Punching shear force resisted by concrete Vc is given as the smallest of
2
V C 0.17 1 f c 'bo d
C1 + d
c
V C 0.33 f c 'bo d C1
C2 + d
C2
B
s d
V C 0.083 2 f c 'bo d
b
L
c = long side/short side of column,
s = 40 for interior, 30 for side, and 20 for corner columns,
bo =length of critical perimeter around the column = 2[(C1+d)+(C2+d)]
Interior
ACI 11.11.2.1
Corner Exterior 25
Design of Isolated Footings
L C 1
Vu qu (net ) B x qu (net ) B d
2 C1
d
C2
B
The factored beam shear capacity of the
concrete is given as
L
V c 0.17 f c ' B d
ACI 11.2.1.1
26
Design of Isolated Footings
C2
2
B
d
The factored beam shear capacity of the
y
concrete is given as L
27
Design of Isolated Footings
7-Compute the area of flexural reinforcement in each direction.
The footing is designed as rectangular-section beam in both directions. The critical
section for bending is located at the face of the column.
ACI 15.4.2 Critical section for moment
B L C1
2
M u qu (net )
2 2 C1
C2
B
0.85f c 2M u
1 1 2
fy
0.85 f c B d
L
As ,req B d
As ,min 0.0018Bh As , req
ACI 15.4.1
ACI 10.5.4
ACI 7.12.2.1 28
Design of Isolated Footings
7-Compute the area of flexural reinforcement in each direction [contd.]
M u qu (net ) C1
2 2
C2
B
(B-C2)/2
0.85f c 2M u
1 1 2
fy 0.85 f L d L
c
As ,req L d
ACI 15.4.1
As ,min 0.0018Lh As ,req
ACI 10.5.4
ACI 7.12.2.1
29
Design of Isolated Footings
B
L
ACI 15.4.4
30
Design of Isolated Footings
Bearing on concrete for column and footing must not exceed the concrete
bearing strength.
ACI 15.8.1.1
Pn Pu
Otherwise, the joint would fail by crushing of the concrete at the bottom of the
column where the column bars are no longer effective or by crushing the
concrete in the footing under the column.
Pn min Pn ,c ; Pn ,f
31
Design of Isolated Footings
For a supporting footing where the supporting surface is wider on all sides than the
loaded area, the allowed bearing capacity Pn,f is
A2
Pn ,f min 0.85f cA1 ; 2 0.85f cA1
A1
= strength reduction factor for bearing = 0.65
A1= column cross-sectional area
A2= area of the lower base of the largest frustum of a pyramid, cone, or tapered
wedge contained wholly within the footing and having for its upper base the loaded
area, and having side slopes of 1 vertical to 2 horizontal (see next slide)
32
Design of Isolated Footings
8- Check for bearing strength of column and footing concrete [contd.]
A2= area of the lower base of the largest frustum of a pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge
contained wholly within the footing and having for its upper base the loaded area, and
having side slopes of 1 vertical to 2 horizontal
33
Design of Isolated Footings
8- Check for bearing strength of column and footing concrete [contd.]
A2= area of the lower base of the largest frustum of a pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge
contained wholly within the footing and having for its upper base the loaded area, and
having side slopes of 1 vertical to 2 horizontal
34
Design of Isolated Footings
If Pn Pu :
Reinforcement in the form of dowel bars must be provided to transfer the
excess load.
Pu Pn ACI 15.8.1.2
As ,req
f y
The dowel bars are usually extended into the
footing, bent at the ends, and tied to the main
footing reinforcement.
35
Design of Isolated Footings
If Pn Pu ::
Use minimum dowel reinforcement.
36
Design of Isolated Footings
9- Check for anchorage of the reinforcement
> ls (compn.)
qall (gross) = 200 kN/m2, soil =17 kN/m3, conc =25 kN/m3
Df=1.0
40
40
38
Example
Solution
1- Select a trial footing depth:
Assume that the footing is 55 cm thick.
2- Evaluate the net allowable soil pressure:
qall (net) = qall (gross) - s (Df - hc) - c hc
qall net 200 ( 1 0.55 ) 17 0.55 25 178.6 kN/m2
245
40
q all (net) 178.6
7.84
Let L 3.20 m , B 2.45 m
3.20 320
Use 320x245x55 cm footing
4- Evaluate the net factored soil pressure
Pu 1.2PD 1.6PL 1.2 800 1.6 600 1920 kN
Pu 1920
q u net 244.9 kN /m 2
LB 3.2 2.45 39
40+45.9
Example
40+45.9
245
5- Check footing thickness for punching shear:
Average effective depth d avg 55-7.5-1.6 45.9cm
320
bo 2[ 40 45.9 40 45.9 ] 343.6 cm
Vu 244.9 3.2 2.45 0.40 0.459 0.40 0.459 1740 kN
VC is the smallest of
0.33 f c ' b o d 0.75 0.33 25 3436 459 1952 kN
2 2
0.17 f c ' 1 b o d 0.75 0.17 25 1 3436 459 3016 kN
c 0.4/0.4
s d 40 459
0.083 f c ' 2 b
o d 0.75 0.083 25 2 3436 459 3605 kN
b o 3436
VC 1952 kN Vu 1740 kN OK
40
Example
6- Check footing thickness for beam shear in each direction:
In short direction
245
Vu is located at distance d from face of column
3.2 0.4
Vu 244.9 2.45 0.459 565 kN
2
320
Vc= 717 kN > Vu= 565 kN OK
In long direction
245
45.9
Vu is located at distance d from face of column
2.45 0.4
Vu 244.9 3.2 0.459 444 kN
320
2
Vc= 936 kN > Vu= 444 kN OK
41
Example
7- Calculate the area of flexural reinforcement in each direction:
a- Reinforcement in the long direction:
The critical section for bending is shown in the figure Critical section for moment
1.4
B L C1 2.45 3.2 0.4
2 2
M u q u net 244.9
2 2 2 2
588 kN .m
245
0.85 25 2 588 106
1- 1- 2
420 0.9
0.85 25 2450 459 320
42
Example
7- Calculate the area of flexural reinforcement in each direction:
b- Reinforcement in the short direction:
The critical section for bending is shown in the figure
M u q u net 244.9
2 2 2 2
412 kN .m
Critical section for moment
245
0.85 25 2 412 106
1.025
1- 1- 2
420 0.9 0.85 25 3200 459 320
24.49 x 2.8
1.025
A s,min 0.0018 550 3200 3170 mm 2
A s,req 317 0 mm 2
43
Example
7- Calculate the area of flexural reinforcement in each direction:
b- Reinforcement in the short direction:
The distribution of the reinforcement is as follows:
L 3.2
1.3
42.5 Width band =245 42.5
B 2.45
2
Central band reinft. As
1
214 B
1814 B
214 B
245
2
3170 2757 mm 2
1.3 1
320
Use 18 14 mm in the central band.
3170 2756
For each of the side bands, A s 207 mm 2
2
Use 214 mm in each of the two side bands.
44
Example
8- Check for bearing strength of column and footing concrete
1400
1100
245
h= 550
1025
1
320
45
Example
8- Check for bearing strength of column and footing concrete
46
Example
8- Check for bearing strength of column and footing concrete
47
Example
9- Check for anchorage of the reinforcement
Bottom longitudinal reinforcement (14mm)
=1.0 for bottom bars, =1.0 for uncoated bars
1.4
=1.0 <1.7 OK
=0.8 for 14mm, =1.0 for normal weight concrete
C the smallest of 7.5+0.7=8.3 cm
245
[245-2(7.5)-1.4]/(22)/(2)=5.2 cm
i.e., C is taken as 5.2 cm 320
C K tr 5.2 0 C K tr
3.7 2.5 i.e.,use 2.5
db 1.4 db
420 (1.0)(1.0)(0.8)(1.0)
ld 1.4 34 cm
1.1 25 2.5
48
Example
9- Check for anchorage of the reinforcement
Bottom reinforcement in short direction (14mm)
=1.0 for bottom bars, =1.0 for uncoated bars
=1.0 <1.7 OK
=0.8 for 14mm, =1.0 for normal weight concrete
245
C the smallest of 7.5+0.7=8.3 cm
1.025
[320-2(7.5)-1.4]/(19)/(2)=8 cm
i.e., C is taken as 5.2 cm 320
C K tr 8 0 C K tr
5.7 2.5 i.e.,use 2.5
db 1.4 db
420 (1.0)(1.0)(0.8)(1.0)
ld 1.4 34 cm
1.1 25 2.5
49
Example
9- Check for anchorage of the reinforcement
Dowel reinforcement (16mm):
50
Example
10- Prepare neat design drawings showing footing dimensions and provided
reinforcement
48cm
55 cm 245 (1814)
3.20 m
214 B
214 B
1814 B
2.45 m
2314 B
51
Reinforced Concrete Design I
Lecture 14
Staircase Design
Stair Types
2
Stair Types
3
Stair Types
4
Stair Types
5
Technical terms
Going: horizontal upper portion of a step.
Rise: vertical distance between two consecutive treads.
Flight: a series of steps provided between two landings.
Landing: a horizontal slab provided between two flights.
Waist: the least thickness of a stair slab.
6
Technical terms
Winder: radiating or angular tapering steps.
Soffit: the bottom surface of a stair slab.
Nosing: the intersection of the going and the riser.
Headroom: the vertical distance from a line connecting the nosings of
all treads and the soffit above.
7
General Design Requirements
8
Stair type based on the structural loading type
9 Cantilever stair
Design of transversely supported stairs
Loading:
a. Dead load:
The dead load includes own weight of the step, own weight of the waist
slab, and surface finishes on the steps and on the soffit.
b. Live Load:
Live load is taken as building design live load plus 1.5 kN/m2, with a
maximum value of 5 kN/m2.
10
Design of transversely supported stairs
Direction of bending
Main reinforcement
Shrinkage reinforcement
11 Direction of bending
Design of transversely supported stairs
Design for Shear and Flexure:
Each step is designed for shear and
flexure as if it is a beam. Main
reinforcement runs in the transverse
direction at the bottom side of the t
steps while shrinkage reinforcement
runs at the bottom side of the slab in
the longitudinal direction. Since the
step is not rectangular, the effective
depth d is found by an equivalent
rectangular section that can be used
with an average height equal to: R
havg
12
t
Design of transversely supported stairs
Example 1
Design a straight flight stair in a residential building
supported on reinforced concrete walls 1.5 m apart (center
to center), given:
L.L = 3 kN/m2; covering material = 0.5 kN/m; The risers
are 16 cm and goings are 30 cm; fc=25 MPa, fy= 420 MPa
13
Loads and Analysis
l 1.5
t 0.075m
20 20
t
0.075 0.16
have 0.165m
0.30
0.34 2
D.L(O.W) =0.340.075 25 + (1/2) 0.16 0.3 25=1.24 kN/m
D.L (covering material) = 0.5 kN/m
0.3
D.L (total) = 1.74 kN/m 0.16
L.L =30.3 =0.9 kN/m
0.302 0.162 0.34
1.5 m
14
Shear diagram
Moment diagram
15
Design for moment
M u 1kN .m
d 165 20 6 139mm
bw 300mm
0.85 f c ' 2M u
1 1
fy 0.85 f c ' b d 2
0.85 25 2 1106
1 1 2
0.0005
420
0.9 0.85 25 300 139
A s 0.0005 300 139 20.9mm 2
A s ,min 0.0018 300 165 89.1mm 2 A s
A s A s ,min 89.1mm 2
Use 112 for each step
16
Design for shear
V C 0.75 0.17 25 139 300 /1000 26kN V u 2.65kN OK
17
Design of longitudinally supported stairs
Direction of bending
Shrinkage reinforcement
Main reinforcement
18
Design of longitudinally supported stairs
19
Design of longitudinally supported stairs
Deflection Requirement:
Since a flight of stairs is stiffer than a slab of thickness equal to the waist t,
minimum required slab depth is reduced by 15 %.
Effective Span:
The effective span is taken as the horizontal distance between centerlines of
supporting elements.
n = number of goings
X = Width of
supporting landing slab
at one end of the stairs
slab
Y = Width of
supporting landing slab
at the other end of the
20 stairs slab.
Design of longitudinally supported stairs
Deflection Requirement:
Since a flight of stairs is stiffer than a slab of thickness equal to the waist t,
minimum required slab depth is reduced by 15 %.
Effective Span:
The effective span is taken as the horizontal distance between centerlines of
supporting elements.
n = number of goings
X = Width of
supporting landing slab
at one end of the stairs
slab
Y = Width of
supporting landing slab
at the other end of the
21 stairs slab.
Design of longitudinally supported stairs
Loading:
a. Dead Load:
The dead load, which can be calculated on horizontal plan, includes:
Own weight of the steps.
Own weight of the slab.
Surface finishes on the flight and on the landings.
Note: For flight load calculations, the part of load acting on slope is to be increased
by dividing it by cos. This is because analysis for moment and shear is conducted on
the horizontal span of the flight, but the load is that carried on the inclined span.
P
P= wo.w.Linc
.Linc
22
w=P/L= wo.w.Linc/L= wo.w./cos
.L
Design of longitudinally supported stairs
Loading:
b. Live Load:
Live load is taken as the building design live load plus 1.5 kN/m2, with a
maximum value of 5 kN/m2. Live load is always given on the horizontal
projection.
23
Design of longitudinally supported stairs
Joint detail:
The stairs slab is designed for maximum shear and flexure. Main
reinforcement runs in the longitudinal direction, while shrinkage
reinforcement runs in the transverse direction. Special attention has to be
paid to reinforcement detail at opening joints.
24
Design of longitudinally supported stairs
Example 2
Design the U- stair in a residential building shown in the
figure, given:
L.L = 3 kN/m2; covering material = 2 kN/m2; The rises are 16
cm and goings are 30 cm, fc=25 MPa, fy= 420 MPa
25
Loads and Analysis
l 525
t 0.85 22cm
20 20
Wu (flight) = 1.2(10)+1.6(3)=16.8kN/m
Wu (landing) = 1.2(8)+1.6(3)=14.4kN/m
26
Moment and shear diagram
16.8kN/m
14.4kN/m 14.4kN/m
27
Design for moment
M u 52.2kN .m
d 22 2 0.6 19.4cm 194mm
bw 1000mm
(22)=3.96 cm2/m
A landing may be shared on two different stair slabs. The load of the shared
landing can be assumed to be divided equally and each stair slab carries on
30 half.
Design of stair beams
Ls ws
P
P=wsLs/2
w=P/(L/2)
31
L/2
Reinforced Concrete Design II
Lecture 0
Syllabus
Reinforced Concrete Design II
Email nao204@lehigh.edu
2
Reinforced Concrete Design II
3
Reinforced Concrete Design II
References:
Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and
commentary (ACI 318M-08). American Concrete Institute,
2008.
4
Reinforced Concrete Design II
Course outline
Week Topic
Analysis and design of columns:
9 -Analysis of column cross sections using strain compatibility.
10,11 -Design of short columns subjected to axial load and bending.
7
Reinforced Concrete Design II
Grading
8
Reinforced Concrete Design II
Exam Policy
Mid-term exam:
Open book.
Final exam:
Open book.
9
Reinforced Concrete Design II
Homework Policy
You may get the HW points if you copy the solution from
other students. However, you will have lost your chance in
practicing the concepts through doing the HW. This will lead
you to loosing points in the exams, which you could have
gained if you did your HWs on your own.
11
Reinforced Concrete Design II
Distance (L,b,d,h): mm
Area (Ac,Ag,As): mm2
Volume (V): mm3
Force (P,V,N): N
Moment (M): N.mm
Stress (fy, fc): N/mm2 = MPa = 106 N/m2
Pressure (qs): N/mm2
Distributed load per unit length (wu): N/mm
Distributed load per unit area (qu): N/mm2
Weight per unit volume (g): N/mm3 14
Reinforced Concrete Design II
Distance (L,b,d,h): cm , m
Area (Ac,Ag,As): cm2, m2
Volume (V): cm3, m3
Force (P,V,N): kN
Moment (M): kN.m
Pressure (qs): kN/m2
Distributed load per unit length (wu): kN/m
Distributed load per unit area (qu): kN/m2
Weight per unit volume (g): kN/m3
15
Reinforced Concrete Design II
Unit conversions
1 m = 102 cm = 103 mm
1 m2 = 104 cm2 = 106 mm2
1 m3 = 106 cm3 = 109 mm3
1 kN = 103 N
1 kN.m = 106 N.mm
1 kN/m2 = 10-3 N/mm2
1 kN/m3 = 10-6 N/mm3
16
Reinforced Concrete Design II
ACI Equations
The equations taken from the ACI code will be indicated throughout the
slides by their section or equation number in the code provided in
shading.
Examples:
Ec 4700 f c ACI 8.5.1
Some of the original equations may have included the symbol l = 1.0
for normal weight concrete and omitted in slides.
17
Reinforced Concrete Design II
DO YOUR HOMEWORK!!!!!
18
Reinforced Concrete Design II
19
Reinforced Concrete Design II
Lecture 1
Analysis of continuous beams in single
and multistory structures.
Continuity in beams
Continuity tends to reduce the maximum moment on a beam and makes
it stiffer.
Some loads are fixed in their location and/or distribution, others can be
everywhere, somewhere or no where.
1- Analysis by computer
3
Continuity in beams Influence lines
4
Continuity in beams Influence lines
5
Continuity in beams Influence lines
6
Continuity in beams Influence lines
7
Continuity in beams Influence lines
8
Continuity in beams Influence lines
9
Continuity in beams Load patterns
Load Patterns using Qualitative Influence Lines
11
Continuity in beams Load patterns
12
Continuity in beams Load envelopes
13
Continuity in beams Load envelopes
14
Continuity in beams Load envelopes
Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: -1/11, +1/16, -1/11)
15
Continuity in beams Load envelopes
Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: -1/16, +1/14, -1/10)
16
Continuity in beams Load envelopes
Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: -1/24, +1/14, -1/10)
17
Continuity in beams Load envelopes
Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: 0, +1/11, -1/10)
18
Continuous beams in single story
structures:
19
Continuity in beams ACI approximate method
Requirements: ACI 8.3.3
ACI Code permits the use of the following approximate moments and
shears for design of continuous beams and one-way slabs, provided:
There are two or more spans.
Spans are approximately equal, with the larger of two adjacent spans
not greater than the shorter by more than 20 percent.
Loads are uniformly distributed.
Unfactored live load does not exceed three times the unfactored dead
load.
Members are of similar section dimensions along their lengths
(prismatic).
20
Approximate Structural Analysis
ACI 8.3.3
l n = length of clear
span measured face-
to-face of supports.
Support is column
Spandrel girder
22
Continuous beams in multistory
structures
23
Equivalent rigid frame method (for gravity loads)
24
Equivalent rigid frame method (for gravity loads)
26
ACI approximate method
ACI 8.3.3
27
Equivalent rigid frame method (for lateral loads)
28
Example 1
The figure below shows a plan of a typical floor in a multistory reinforced concrete
building with 3m typical story height. The column dimensions are all 40cmX40cm. The
slab depth is 25 cm, and the beam depth is 50 cm. The live load is 2 kN/m2. The covering
materials weigh 2.25 kN/m2, equivalent partition load is equal to 0.75 kN/m2, and the live
load is 2 kN/m2. Use fc=25 MPa, fy=420 MPa. Determine using a computer program the
design moments in the beams in rows A and B and an exterior column. Beam B carries a
10 cm brick wall. A B
3@6 = 24
3@3 = 9
29 4@9 = 36
Continuous beam A
Ultimate own weight of slab = 1.20.2525 = 7.5 kN/m2
Ultimate own weight of beam = 1.20.50.425 = 6 kN/m
Ultimate floor covering material & partition load = 1.2(2.25+0.75) = 3.6 kN/m2
Ultimate floor live load = 1.62 = 3.2 kN/m2
31
Continuous beam A Live load case 1
32
Continuous beam A Live load case 2
33
Continuous beam A
Design moment:
1 2 3 4 5
Load Case 1 2 3 4 5
DL 104.47 130.42- 32.93 130.42- 104.47
LL1 34.81 17.25- 17.25- 17.25- 34.81
LL2 8.625 17.25- 25.95 17.25- 8.625
LL3 25.28 40.13- 18.51 11.61- 5.805
LL4 2.815 5.63- 11.44 22.88- 32.47
LL5 32.47 22.88- 11.44 5.63- 2.815
LL6 5.805 11.61- 18.51 40.13- 25.28
Maximum
34 Combo 139.28 170.55- 58.88 170.55- 139.28
Continuous beam A
Design moment:
150
100
50
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
-50
-100
-150
Maximum
35
Combo 139.28 170.55- 58.88 170.55- 139.28
Continuous beam B
Ultimate own weight of slab = 1.20.2525 = 7.5 kN/m2
Ultimate own weight of beam = 1.20.50.425 = 6 kN/m
Ultimate floor covering material load = 1.22.25 = 2.7 kN/m2
Ultimate partition load = 1.25.6 = 6.72 kN/m
Ultimate floor live load = 1.62 = 3.2 kN/m2
37
Continuous beam B Dead load case
38
Continuous beam B Live load case 1
39
Continuous beam B Live load case 2
40
Continuous beam B Design moment:
Load Case 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
DL 83- 72.42 135- 57.65 135- 72.42 83-
LL1 22.4- 19.72 24.5- 4.96- 24.5- 19.72 22.4-
LL2 2.64 2.6- 7.6- 18.7 7.6- 2.6- 2.64
LL3 19.5- 17 33- 16.2 21.5- 3 2.3
LL4 0.33 0.5- 3- 2 25.5- 19.4 22-
LL5 22- 19.4 25.5- 2 3- 0.5- 0.33
LL6 2.3 3 21.5- 16.2 33- 17 19.5-
Max
41 Combo 105.4- 92.14 168- 76.35 168- 92.14 105.4-
Continuous beam B Design moment:
100
50
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
-50
-100
-150
Max
42
Combo 105.4- 92.14 168- 76.35 168- 92.14 105.4-
Exterior column moment
+ = 52.76 kN.m
DL max LL
43
Reinforced Concrete Design II
Lecture 2
Introduction to two way structural
systems
Introduction:
One way slabs:
When the ratio of the longer to the shorter side (L/S) of the solid slab is at least
equal to 2.0, it is called one-way slab. Under the action of loads, it is deflected
in the short direction only, in a cylindrical form. Therefore, main reinforcement
is placed in the shorter direction, while the longer direction is provided with
shrinkage reinforcement to limit cracking.
2
Introduction:
One way slabs:
Strip a
Strip c
3 Strip b
Introduction:
One way slabs:
Discretized
model
Two way slab
5
Introduction:
Moments in rectangular slabs supported at the corners:
6
Introduction:
Types of two way slabs:
8
Introduction:
Types of two way slabs:
2- Flat Slabs
A two-way slab with column capitals or
drop panels, or both. This system is
appropriate for heavier loads encountered
in warehouses, parking or industrial
buildings.
9
Introduction:
Types of two way slabs:
2- Flat Slabs
10
Introduction:
Types of two way slabs:
3- Edge supported solid slabs (slabs on beams)
11
Introduction:
Types of two way slabs:
3- Edge supported solid slabs (slabs on beams)
12
Introduction:
Types of two way slabs:
4- Waffle Slab
The waffle slab is capable of
providing the largest spans of
the conventional concrete
floor systems. Waffle slab
construction consists of
orthogonal sets of ribs with
solid parts at the columns.
The ribs are formed with
fiberglass or metal dome
forms (pans). The ribs are
usually 0.60 to 0.90 meter on
center. Shear is transferred to
the columns by using beams
or shear heads.
13
Introduction:
Types of two way slabs:
4- Waffle Slab
14
Introduction:
Types of two way slabs:
5- Edge supported ribbed slabs
It is similar to the waffle slab but the voids between ribs are filled with hollow blocks.
Hidden or drop beams can be used with this system depending on their spans.
15
Introduction:
Deciding the type of floor system:
16
Introduction:
Design methods:
17
R i f
Reinforced
dCConcrete
t DDesign
i II
Lecture 3
Calculation of the depth of two way
slabs
D fi iti
Definitions
Minimum
u thickness
c ess oof two
wo w
way
y sslabs
bs to
o co
control
o de
deflection
ec o
Case Deflection control Limiting thickness
method ((mm))
No INTERIOR Table 9.5(c) 125*
Beams m = 0.0
m 0.2 T bl 9.5(c)
Table 9 5( ) 125*
Minimum
u thickness
c ess oof two
wo w
way
y sslabs
bs to
o co
control
o de
deflection
ec o
ACI 9.5.3
Minimum
u thickness
c ess oof two
wo w
way
y sslabs
bs to
o co
control
o de
deflection
ec o
Definition of and ln
ln =Clear span of the panel considered in the long direction measured face to face of support.
Minimum
u thickness
c ess oof two
wo w
way
y sslabs
bs to
o co
control
o de
deflection
ec o
Definition of fm
In order l l fm, the
d to calculate h parameter needs
d to be
b calculated
l l d forf eachh
side of the panel.
1
1 + 2 + 3 + 4 2 4
fm =
4 3
In order to calculate for a side of the panel, the moment of inertia of the
beam Ib and the moment of inertia of the slab Is need to be calculated.
Minimum
u thickness
c ess oof two
wo w
way
y sslabs
bs to
o co
control
o de
deflection
ec o
Definition of fm
Eb I b
= 1
Es I s
2 4
Eb = M
Modulus
d l off elasticity
l ti it off beam
b
3
E s = Modulus of elasticity of slab
1 + 2 + 3 + 4
fm =
4
Minimum
u thickness
c ess oof two
wo w
way
y sslabs
bs to
o co
control
o de
deflection
ec o
Definition of Ib and Is
Minimum
u thickness
c ess oof two
wo w
way
y sslabs
bs to
o co
control
o de
deflection
ec o
X= min(hb, 4 hf)
Minimum
u thickness
c ess oof two
wo w
way
y sslabs
bs to
o co
control
o de
deflection
ec o
Minimum
u thickness
c ess oof two
wo w
way
y sslabs
bs to
o co
control
o de
deflection
ec o
ACI 9.5.3
Ed b
Edge beam requirement:
i t
Example 1
Solution:
l n = 760 45.7 = 714.3cm
ln 714.3
h min = = = 23.8
23 8cm > 12.5
12 5cm
30 30
Use h = 24 cm
Example 2
Determine the minimum thickness for the slab shown to satisfy ACI
deflection requirements for panels A and B. All columns are
30x30 cm in cross section.
section Use fy= 420 MPa.
MPa
6.8 m
6.5 m B A
6.8 m
Y =
Ay
=
( )( ) / 2 + 94(18)(32
30(32)(32) ( )( + 18 / 2))
= 31.95
31 95cm
A 30(32) + 94(18)
94 cm
Y
50 cm
18 cm
30 cm
1
I = (30)(32) 3 + (30)(32)(32 / 2 31.95) 2
12
1
+ (94)(18) 3 + (94)(18)(32 + 18 / 2 31.95) 2
12
= 510409.4cm 4
Solution:
6- Determine the moment of inertia of the slab:
Direction 1
In direction 1:
(600 + 620)
l2 = = 610cm
2 6.8 m
1
I = (610)(18) 3 = 296460cm 4
12
65m
6.5
In direction 2:
(650 + 680) Direction 2
l2 = = 665cm
2 6.8 m
1
I = (665)(18) 3 = 323190cm 4
12
6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m
Solution:
7- Determine fm:
Due to symmetry
y y 1 = 3 ; 2 = 4
510409.4
1 = = 1.72 6.8 m
296460
510409.4
2 = = 1.57 2
323190
+ 2 65m
6.5 1 3
fm = 1 = 1.65 4
2
8- Determine : 6.8 m
Solution:
9- Determine hmim:
0.2 < m 2 ACI Eq 9-12
fy 420
l n 0.8 + (650 30) 0.8 +
h= 1400
= 1400
= 15.54
15 54cm > 12.5
12 5cm
36 + 5 ( m 0.2 ) 36 + 5 1.0877 (1.65 0.2 )
f
l n 0.8 + y ((650 30)) 0.8 + 420
h=
1400 1400
= = 14.9cm > 9cm hmin = 15 cm
36 + 9 36 + 9(1.0877)
Solution:
PANEL B:
1- Determine initial depth of slab:
y h = 15 cm as found from Panel A
Try
Y =
Ay =
30(35)(35) / 2 + 65(15)(35 + 15 / 2)
= 29.54cm
A ( ) + 65(15)
30(35) ( )
Solution:
I = 521342cm 4
50 cm
15 cm
30 cm
Solution:
6- Determine the moment of inertia of the slab:
Direction 1
In direction 1:
Interior side:
(600 + 620) 6.8 m
l2 = = 610cm
2
1
I = (610)(15) 3 = 171563cm 4
12
65m
6.5
Exterior side:
620 30
l2 = + = 325cm
2 2 Direction 2
1
I = (325)(15) 3 = 91406cm 4 6.8 m
12
In direction 2:
6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m
(650 + 680)
l2 = = 665cm
2
1
I = (665)(15) 3 = 187031cm 4
12
Solution:
7- Determine fm:
Due to symmetry
y y 2 = 4.
521342
1 = = 3.04
171563
521342
2 = = 2.79 6.8 m
187031
441441
3 = = 4.83 2
91406
+ 2 2 + 3 6.5 m 3 1
fm = 1 = 3.36 4
4
8- Determine : 6.8 m
Solution:
9- Determine hmim:
f
l n 0.8 + y (650 30) 0.8
0 8+
420
h= 1400
= 1400
= 15cm > 9cm hmin = 15 cm
36 + 9 36 + 9(1.051)
Lecture 3
Calculation of the depth of two way
slabs
Methods of limiting deflections in two way slabs:
2
Minimum thickness of two way slabs to control deflection
Case Deflection control Limiting thickness
method (mm)
No INTERIOR Table 9.5(c) 125*
Beams m 0.0
2 m ACI Eq 9-13 90
3
Minimum thickness of two way slabs to control deflection
4
Minimum thickness of two way slabs to control deflection
Definition of b and ln
ln =Clear span of the panel considered in the long direction measured face to face of support.
5
Minimum thickness of two way slabs to control deflection
Definition of fm
In order to calculate fm, the parameter needs to be calculated for each
side of the panel.
1
1 2 3 4 2 4
fm
4 3
In order to calculate for a side of the panel, the moment of inertia of the
beam Ib and the moment of inertia of the slab Is need to be calculated.
6
Minimum thickness of two way slabs to control deflection
Definition of fm
Eb I b
1
Es Is
2 4
E b Modulus of elasticity of beam
3
E s Modulus of elasticity of slab
1 2 3 4
fm
4
7
Minimum thickness of two way slabs to control deflection
Definition of Ib and Is
8
Minimum thickness of two way slabs to control deflection
be = bw+X
be = bw+2X
X= min(hb, 4 hf)
9
Minimum thickness of two way slabs to control deflection
10
Minimum thickness of two way slabs to control deflection
11
Example 1
Solution:
ln 760 45.7 714.3cm
ln 714.3
hmin 23.8cm 12.5cm
30 30
12 Use h = 24 cm
Example 2
Determine the minimum thickness for the slab shown to satisfy ACI
deflection requirements for panels A and B. All columns are
30x30 cm in cross section. Use fy= 420 MPa.
6.8 m
6.5 m B A
6.8 m
13
6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m
Solution:
PANEL A:
1- Determine initial depth of slab:
Any initial value can be assumed. Assume slab is not supported
with interior beams and use Table 9.5(c):
ln 680 30 650cm
ln 650
hin 19.7cm
33 33
Try h = 18 cm
Y
Ay
30(32)(32) / 2 94(18)(32 18 / 2)
31.95cm
A 30(32) 94(18)
94 cm
Y
50 cm
18 cm
30 cm
1
I (30)(32)3 (30)(32)(32 / 2 31.95) 2
12
1
(94)(18)3 (94)(18)(32 18 / 2 31.95) 2
12
510409.4cm 4
15
Solution:
6- Determine the moment of inertia of the slab:
Direction 1
In direction 1:
(600 620)
l2 610cm
2 6.8 m
1
I (610)(18)3 296460cm 4
12
6.5 m
In direction 2:
(650 680) Direction 2
l2 665cm
2 6.8 m
1
I (665)(18)3 323190cm 4
12
6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m
16
Solution:
7- Determine fm:
Due to symmetry 1 = 3 ; 2 = 4
510409.4
1 1.72 6.8 m
29640
510409.4
2 1.57 2
323190
2 6.5 m 1 3
fm 1 1.65 4
2
8- Determine b: 6.8 m
17
Solution:
9- Determine hmim:
0.2 m 2 ACI Eq 9-12
f 420
l n 0.8 y (650 30) 0.8
h 1400
1400
15.54cm 12.5cm
36 5b m 0.2 36 5 1.0877 1.65 0.2
f
l n 0.8 y (650 30) 0.8 420
h
1400 1400
14.9cm 9cm hmin = 15 cm
36 9b 36 9(1.0877)
18
Solution:
PANEL B:
1- Determine initial depth of slab:
Try h = 15 cm as found from Panel A
Y
Ay
30(35)(35) / 2 65(15)(35 15 / 2)
29.54cm
A 30(35) 65(15)
19
Solution:
I 521342cm 4
50 cm
15 cm
20 30 cm
Solution:
6- Determine the moment of inertia of the slab:
Direction 1
In direction 1:
Interior side:
(600 620) 6.8 m
l2 610cm
2
1
I (610)(15)3 171563cm 4
12
6.5 m
Exterior side:
620 30
l2 325cm
2 2 Direction 2
1
I (325)(15)3 91406cm 4 6.8 m
12
In direction 2:
6.2 m 6.0 m 6.2 m
(650 680)
l2 665cm
2
1
I (665)(15)3 187031cm 4
21 12
Solution:
7- Determine fm:
Due to symmetry 2 = 4.
521342
1 3.04
171563
521342
2 2.79 6.8 m
187031
441441
3 4.83 2
91406
2 2 3 6.5 m 3 1
fm 1 3.36 4
4
8- Determine b: 6.8 m
f
l n 0.8 y (650 30) 0.8 420
h
1400 1400
15cm 9cm hmin = 15 cm
36 9b 36 9(1.051)
23
Reinforced Concrete Design II
Lecture 4
Direct Design Method
(DDM)
R i Li
i
D fi iti
Definitions
Di t ib ti off Moments
Distribution M t
The slab is treated as a series of frames in two directions:
Di t ib ti off Moments
Distribution M t
Di t ib ti off Moments
Distribution M t
The slab is treated as a series of frames in two directions:
Middle strip:
p Design
g stripp bounded byy two column strips.
p
The width of the beam-slab is bounded laterally by centerlines of
W l n2
8
Moments in a simply
p y supported
pp beam Moments in a simply supported beam
with negative end moments
Moment in ((longitudinal)
g ) direction of bending
g considered:
Determination of the total factored static moment:
P
P. P.
I.N.: Interior
Negative Moment
E.N: Exterior
Negative
E cb I b E cbC
1 = t =
E cs I s 2E cs I s
l 2h 3
Is =
12
0.63
0 63x x 3y
C = 1 torsional constant
y 3
0.63x x 3 y
C = 1 t i l constant
torsional t t
y 3
EN
E.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N.
P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the column strips)
EN
E.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N.
P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the column strips)
EN
E.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N.
P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the middle strips)
Smax 2 h s
5 hs
Smax smaller of
45cm
Reinforcement Detailing
Example
Design
D i the
th interior
i t i strip
t i shown
h for
f the
th structural
t t l plan l usingi DDM.
DDM TheTh
column dimensions are all 30cmX30cm. The slab depth is 15 cm, and the
beam depth is 50 cm. Ultimate distributed load over the slab = 15 kN/m2.
6.8 m
6.5 m
6.8 m
6.0 m
Solution
Middle Panels
100 cm
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:
I b = 521342cm 4 50 cm
15 cm
(650 + 680)
l2 = = 665cm 30 cm
2
1
Is = (15)(665) 3 = 187031cm 4 6.8 m
12
521342
2 = = 2.79
187031
6.5 m
l 2 665
= = 1.1083
l1 600
l 6.8 m
1 2 = 2.79(1.083) = 3.09
l1
Mo =
(wl 2 ) l n 2
8
Mo =
(17 6.65) 5.7 2 = 405kN .m
8
Solution
Middle Panels
5- Distribute the interior negative moment to the column and middle strips:
0.75 0.45
0.75-0.45
0
0.75+ (1 1083 11.0)
(1.1083 0) = 0.7175
0 1
1.0-2.0
M scs = 0.7175
0 7175M s
M scs = (0.7175)262.3 = 188.9kN .m
Solution
Middle Panels
0.75-0.45
0 75 0 45
0.75+ (1.1083 1.0) = 0.7175
1.0-2.0
M ccs = 0.7175M c
M ccs = (0.7175)141.8
(0 7175)141 8 = 101
101.7
7 kN .m
Solution
Middle Panels
7- Distribute the column strip moment to the slab and the beam:
Middle Panels
Results
141.8 262.3
101.7 188.9
86.5 160
15.3 28.4
40.1 74.4
Middle Panels
R l +ve moment
Results
40.1/2
15 3/2
15.3/2
40.1/2
Solution
Middle Panels
8- Check shear capacity of the slab
l1=6.2 m 1.55m
ln=6.2
6 2 0.3
0 3 = 5.9
9m 3.4 m
1.55m
l2=(6.8+6.5)/2 = 6.65 m
6.5 m
6.2 m
Solution
Exterior Panels
100 cm
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:
From interior p
panel calculations
50 cm
I b = 521342cm 4 15 cm
30 cm
I s = 187031cm 4
2 = 2.79
6.8 m
l 2 665
= = 1.075
l1 620
l2
1 = 2.79(1.075) = 3.0 6.5 m
l1
6.8 m
0.63x x 3 y
C = 1 65 cm
y 3
0.63(30) 303 (50)
C = (1 )( )+ 50 cm
50 3
0 63(15) 153 (35)
0.63(15) 15 cm
(1 )( ) = 308644cm 4 30 cm
35 3
C = max(205394,308644) = 308644cm 4
E cbC 308644
t = = = 0.825
2E cs I s 2(187031)
Solution
Exterior Panels
3- Determine the total static moment:
Mo =
(wl 2 ) l n 2
8
Mo =
(17 6.65) 5.92 = 434kN .m
8
Solution
Exterior Panels
5- Distribute the interior negative moment to the column and middle strips:
0.75 0.45
0.75-0.45
0
0.75+ (1 0 11.0)
(1.075 0) = 0.728
0 28
1.0-2.0
M scs = 0.728
0 728M s
M scs = (0.728)303.8 = 221.3kN .m
Solution
Exterior Panels
0.75-0.45
0 75 0 45
0.75+ (1.075 1.0) = 0.728
1.0-2.0
M ccs = 0.728M c
M ccs = (0.728)247 = 180.2kN .m
Solution
Exterior Panels
7- Distribute the exterior negative moment to the column and middle strips:
l1/l2
t
.3
.
. 3
.3
M scs = 0.91M s
M scs = (0.91)69.5
(0 91)69 5 = 63.2
63 2kN .m
M sms = 69.5 63.2 = 6.3kN .m
Solution
Exterior Panels
8- Distribute the column strip moment to the slab and the beam:
Results
KN m
KN.m
Lecture 4
Direct Design Method
(DDM)
R i Li
i
Definitions
Distribution of Moments
Th slab
The l b is
i treatedd as a series
i off frames
f in
i two directions:
di i
Distribution of Moments
Distribution of Moments
Th slab
The l b is
i treatedd as a series
i off frames
f in
i two directions:
di i
W l n2
8
Determination of the total factored static moment:
L
Longitudinal
it di l Distribution
Di t ib ti off Moments
M t in
i Slabs
Sl b
Longitudinal
g Distribution of Moments in Slabs
Longitudinal
g Distribution of Moments in Slabs
E.N. I.N. I.N. I.N. I.N.
P. P.
II.N.:
N : Interior
Negative Moment
E.N:
E N EExterior
t ri r
Negative
E cb I b E cbC
1 = t =
E cs I s 2E cs I s
l 2h 3
Is =
12
0.63x x 3 y
C = 1 torsional constant
y 3
0 63xx x 3 y
0.63
C = 1 torsional constant
y 3
P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments ((to the column strips)
p)
P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments ((to the column strips)
p)
P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments ((to the middle strips)
p)
Design
g of Beams for Shear
Design
g of Beams for Shear
Smax 2 h s
5 hs
Smax smaller
ll off
45cm
Reinforcement Detailing
Example
Design the interior strip shown for the structural plan using DDM. The
column dimensions are all 30cmX30cm. The slab depth is 15 cm, and the
cm Ultimate distributed load over the slab = 15 kN/m2.
beam depth is 50 cm.
6.8 m
6.5 m
6.8 m
6.0 m
Solution
Middle Panels
100 cm
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:
I b = 521342cm 4 50 cm
15 cm
(650 + 680)
l2 = = 665cm 30 cm
2
1
Is = (15)(665) 3 = 187031cm 4 6.8 m
12
521342
2 = = 2.79
187031
6.5 m
l 2 665
= = 1.1083
l1 600
l2 6.8 m
1 = 2.79(1.083) = 3.09
l1
Mo =
(wl 2 ) l n 2
8
Mo =
(17 6.65) 5.7 2 = 405kN .m
8
Solution
Middle Panels
5- Distribute the interior negative moment to the column and middle strips:
0.75-0.45
0.75+ (1.1083 1.0) = 0.7175
1 0-2 0
1.0-2.0
M scs = 0.7175M s
M scs = (0.7175)262.3 = 188.9kN .m
Solution
Middle Panels
6- Distribute the p
positive moment to the column and middle strips:
p
0.75-0.45
0.75+ ((1.1083 1.0)) = 0.7175
1020
1.0-2.0
M ccs = 0.7175
0 7175M c
M ccs = (0.7175)141.8 = 101.7 kN .m
Solution
Middle Panels
7- Distribute the column strip moment to the slab and the beam:
Middle Panels
Res lts
Results
141.8 262.3
101.7 188.9
86.5 160
15.3 28.4
40.1 74.4
Middle Panels
Results +ve moment
40.1/2
15.3/2
40.1/2
Solution
Middle Panels
8- Check shear capacity of the slab
l1=6.2 m 1.55m
ln=6.2 0.3 = 5.9 m 3.4 m
1.55m
l2=(6.8+6.5)/2 = 6.65 m
6.5 m
6.2 m
Solution
Exterior Panels
100 cm
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:
F
From iinterior
i panell calculations
l l i
50 cm
I b = 521342cm 4 15 cm
30 cm
I s = 187031cm 4
2 = 2.79
2 79
6.8 m
l 2 665
= = 1.075
l1 620
l2
1 = 2.79(1.075) = 3.0 6.5 m
l1
6.8 m
0 63xx x 3 y
0.63
C = 1 65 cm
y 3
0.63(30) 303 (50)
C = (1 )( )+ 50 cm
50 3
0.63(15) 153 (35) 15 cm
(1 )( ) = 308644cm 4 30 cm
35 3
C = max(205394,308644) = 308644cm 4
E C 308644
t = cb = = 0.825
2E cs I s 2(187031)
Solution
Exterior Panels
3- Determine the total static moment:
Mo =
(wl 2 ) l n 2
8
Mo =
(17 6.65) 5.92 = 434kN .m
8
Solution
Exterior Panels
5- Distribute the interior negative moment to the column and middle strips:
0.75-0.45
0.75+ (1.075 1.0) = 0.728
1 0-2 0
1.0-2.0
M scs = 0.728M s
M scs = (0.728)303.8 = 221.3kN .m
Solution
Exterior Panels
6- Distribute the p
positive moment to the column and middle strips:
p
0.75-0.45
0.75+
0.75 (1.075 1.0) = 0.728
1.0-2.0
M ccs = 0.728
0 728M c
M ccs = (0.728)247 = 180.2kN .m
Solution
Exterior Panels
7- Distribute the exterior negative moment to the column and middle strips:
l1/l2
t
1 1.0723 2
0 100 100 100
0.825 91
2.5 75 72.823 45
M scs = 0.91M s
M scs = ((0.91)69.5
.9 ) 9. = 63.2
. kN
N .m
M sms = 69.5 63.2 = 6.3kN .m
Solution
Exterior Panels
8- Distribute the column strip moment to the slab and the beam:
Results
KN.m
Lecture 4
Direct Design Method
(DDM)
R i Li
i
Definitions
Distribution of Moments
Th slab
The l b is
i treatedd as a series
i off frames
f in
i two directions:
di i
Distribution of Moments
Distribution of Moments
Th slab
The l b is
i treatedd as a series
i off frames
f in
i two directions:
di i
W l n2
8
Determination of the total factored static moment:
L
Longitudinal
it di l Distribution
Di t ib ti off Moments
M t in
i Slabs
Sl b
Longitudinal
g Distribution of Moments in Slabs
Longitudinal
g Distribution of Moments in Slabs
E.N. I.N. I.N. I.N. I.N.
P. P.
II.N.:
N : Interior
Negative Moment
E.N:
E N EExterior
t ri r
Negative
0 63xx x 3 y
0.63
C = 1 torsional constant
y 3
P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments ((to the column strips)
p)
P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments ((to the middle strips)
p)
Design
g of Beams for Shear
S
L
Design
g of Beams for Shear
S
L
Smax 2 h s
5 hs
Smax smaller
ll off
45cm
Reinforcement Detailing
Example
Design the interior strip shown for the structural plan using DDM. The
column dimensions are all 30cmX30cm. The slab depth is 15 cm, and the
cm Ultimate distributed load over the slab = 15 kN/m2.
beam depth is 50 cm.
6.8 m
6.5 m
6.8 m
6.0 m
Solution
Middle Panels
100 cm
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:
I b = 521342cm 4 50 cm
15 cm
(650 + 680)
l2 = = 665cm 30 cm
2
1
Is = (15)(665) 3 = 187031cm 4 6.8 m
12
521342
2 = = 2.79
187031
6.5 m
l 2 665
= = 1.1083
l1 600
l2 6.8 m
1 = 2.79(1.083) = 3.09
l1
Mo =
(wl 2 ) l n 2
8
Mo =
(17 6.65) 5.7 2 = 405kN .m
8
Solution
Middle Panels
5- Distribute the interior negative moment to the column and middle strips:
0.75-0.45
0.75+ (1.1083 1.0) = 0.7175
1 0-2 0
1.0-2.0
M scs = 0.7175M s
M scs = (0.7175)262.3 = 188.9kN .m
Solution
Middle Panels
6- Distribute the p
positive moment to the column and middle strips:
p
0.75-0.45
0.75+ ((1.1083 1.0)) = 0.7175
1020
1.0-2.0
M ccs = 0.7175
0 7175M c
M ccs = (0.7175)141.8 = 101.7 kN .m
Solution
Middle Panels
7- Distribute the column strip moment to the slab and the beam:
Middle Panels
Res lts
Results
141.8 262.3
101.7 188.9
86.5 160
15.3 28.4
40.1 74.4
Middle Panels
Results +ve moment
40.1/2
15.3/2
40.1/2
Solution
Middle Panels
8- Check shear capacity of the slab
l1=6.2 m 1.55m
ln=6.2 0.3 = 5.9 m 3.4 m
1.55m
l2=(6.8+6.5)/2 = 6.65 m
6.5 m
6.2 m
Solution
Exterior Panels
100 cm
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:
F
From iinterior
i panell calculations
l l i
50 cm
I b = 521342cm 4 15 cm
30 cm
I s = 187031cm 4
2 = 2.79
2 79
6.8 m
l 2 665
= = 1.075
l1 620
l2
1 = 2.79(1.075) = 3.0 6.5 m
l1
6.8 m
0 63xx x 3 y
0.63
C = 1 65 cm
y 3
0.63(30) 303 (50)
C = (1 )( )+ 50 cm
50 3
0.63(15) 153 (35) 15 cm
(1 )( ) = 308644cm 4 30 cm
35 3
C = max(205394,308644) = 308644cm 4
E C 308644
t = cb = = 0.825
2E cs I s 2(187031)
Solution
Exterior Panels
3- Determine the total static moment:
Mo =
(wl 2 ) l n 2
8
Mo =
(17 6.65) 5.92 = 434kN .m
8
Solution
Exterior Panels
5- Distribute the interior negative moment to the column and middle strips:
0.75-0.45
0.75+ (1.075 1.0) = 0.728
1 0-2 0
1.0-2.0
M scs = 0.728M s
M scs = (0.728)303.8 = 221.3kN .m
Solution
Exterior Panels
6- Distribute the p
positive moment to the column and middle strips:
p
0.75-0.45
0.75+
0.75 (1.075 1.0) = 0.728
1.0-2.0
M ccs = 0.728
0 728M c
M ccs = (0.728)247 = 180.2kN .m
Solution
Exterior Panels
7- Distribute the exterior negative moment to the column and middle strips:
l1/l2
t
1 1.0723 2
0 100 100 100
0.825 91
2.5 75 72.823 45
M scs = 0.91M s
M scs = ((0.91)69.5
.9 ) 9. = 63.2
. kN
N .m
M sms = 69.5 63.2 = 6.3kN .m
Solution
Exterior Panels
8- Distribute the column strip moment to the slab and the beam:
Results
KN.m
Lecture 4
Direct Design Method
(DDM)
R i Li
i
D fi iti
Definitions
Di t ib ti off Moments
Distribution M t
The slab is treated as a series of frames in two directions:
Di t ib ti off Moments
Distribution M t
Di t ib ti off Moments
Distribution M t
The slab is treated as a series of frames in two directions:
Middle strip:
p Design
g stripp bounded byy two column strips.
p
The width of the beam-slab is bounded laterally by centerlines of
W l n2
8
Moment in ((longitudinal)
g ) direction of bending
g considered:
Determination of the total factored static moment:
P
P. P.
I.N.: Interior
Negative Moment
E.N: Exterior
Negative
F all
For ll spans:
E cb I b
1 =
E cs I s
l 2h 3
Is =
12
0.63x x 3 y
C = 1 t i l constant
torsional t t
y 3
EN
E.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N.
P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the column strips)
EN
E.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N.
P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the middle strips)
S
L
S
L
Smax 2 h s
5 hs
Smax smaller of
45cm
Reinforcement Detailing
Example
Design
D i the
th interior
i t i strip
t i shown
h for
f the
th structural
t t l plan l usingi DDM.
DDM TheTh
column dimensions are all 30cmX30cm. The slab depth is 15 cm, and the
beam depth is 50 cm. Ultimate distributed load over the slab = 15 kN/m2.
6.8 m
6.5 m
6.8 m
l1=6.0 m
ln=6
6.0
0 0.3
0 3 = 5.7
57m
l2=(6.8+6.5)/2 = 6.65 m
6.0 m
Solution
Middle Panels
100 cm
2- Determine l2/l1 and 1:
I b = 521342cm 4 50 cm
15 cm
(650 + 680)
l2 = = 665cm 30 cm
2
1
Is = (15)(665) 3 = 187031cm 4 6.8 m
12
521342
1 = = 2.79
187031
6.5 m
l 2 665 1
= = 1.1083
l1 600
l 6.8 m
1 2 = 2.79(1.1083) = 3.09
l1
Mo =
(wl 2 ) l n 2
8
Mo =
(15 6.65) 5.7 2 = 405kN .m
8
Solution
Middle Panels
5- Distribute the interior negative moment to the column and middle strips:
l2
= 1.1083
l1
l2
1 = 3.09
l1
0.45 0.75
0.45-0.75
0
0.75+ (1 1083 11.0)
(1.1083 0) = 0.7175
0 1
2.0-1.0
M scs = 0.7175
0 7175M s
M scs = (0.7175)263.3 = 188.9kN .m
Solution
Middle Panels
0.45-0.75
0 45 0 75
0.75+ (1.1083 1.0) = 0.7175
2.0-1.0
M ccs = 0.7175M c
M ccs = (0.7175)141.8
(0 7175)141 8 = 101
101.7
7 kN .m
Solution
Middle Panels
7- Distribute the column strip moment to the slab and the beam:
l2
1 (l2/l1) = 3.09 > 1.0 = 1.1083
l1
85 % of the moment in the column strip is assigned to 1
l2
= 3.09
the beam and the balance of 15 % is assigned to the slab in l1
the column strip.
Middle Panels
Results
141.8 263.3
101.7 188.9
86.5 160
15.3 28.4
40.1 74.4
Middle Panels
R l +ve moment
Results
40.1/2
15 3/2
15.3/2
40.1/2
Solution
Middle Panels
8- Check shear capacity of the slab
l1=6.2 m
ln=6
6.2
2 0.3
0 3 = 5.9
59m
l2=(6.8+6.5)/2 = 6.65 m
6.2 m
Solution
Exterior Panels
100 cm
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:
From interior p
panels calculations
50 cm
I b = 521342cm 4 15 cm
30 cm
I s = 187031cm 4
1 = 2.79
6.8 m
l 2 665
= = 1.073
l1 620
6.5 m
l
1 2 = 2.79(1.073) = 3.0
l1
6.8 m
0.63x x 3 y
C = 1 65 cm
y 3
0.63(30) 303 (50)
C = (1 )( )+ 50 cm
50 3
0 63(15) 153 (35)
0.63(15) 15 cm
(1 )( ) = 308644cm 4 30 cm
35 3
C = max(205394,308644) = 308644cm 4
E cbC 308644
t = = = 0.825
2E cs I s 2(187031)
Solution
Exterior Panels
3- Determine the total static moment:
Mo =
(wl 2 ) l n 2
8
Mo =
(17 6.65) 5.92 = 434kN .m
8
Solution
Exterior Panels
5- Distribute the interior negative moment to the column and middle strips:
l2
= 1.073
l1
l2
1 = 3.0
l1
0.45-0.75
0 75+
0.75+ (1 073 11.0)
(1.073 0) = 0.728
0 728
2.0-1.0
M scs = 0.728
0 728M s
M scs = (0.728)303.8 = 221.3kN .m
Solution
Exterior Panels
l2
= 1.073
l1
l2
1 = 3.0
l1
00.45-0.75
45 0 75
0.75+ (1.073 1.0) = 0.728
2.0-1.0
M ccs = 0.728M c
M ccs = (0.728)247 = 180.2kN .m
Solution
Exterior Panels
7- Distribute the exterior negative moment to the column and middle strips:
l2
= 1.073
l1
l2
1 = 3.0
l1
l1/l2
t = 0.825
t
1 1.0723 2
0 100 100 100
0.825 91
25
2.5 75 72 823
72.823 45
M scs = 0.91M s
M scs = (0.91)69.5
(0 91)69 5 = 63.2
63 2kN .m
M sms = 69.5 63.2 = 6.3kN .m
Solution
Exterior Panels
8- Distribute the column strip moment to the slab and the beam:
l2
1 (l2/l1) = 3 > 1.0 l1
= 1.073
= 9.5kN .m = 27 kN .m = 33.2kN .m
Exterior Panels
Results
KN m
KN.m
Lecture 4
Direct Design Method
(DDM)
R i Li
i
D fi iti
Definitions
Di t ib ti off Moments
Distribution M t
The slab is treated as a series of frames in two directions:
Di t ib ti off Moments
Distribution M t
Di t ib ti off Moments
Distribution M t
The slab is treated as a series of frames in two directions:
Middle strip:
p Design
g stripp bounded byy two column strips.
p
The width of the beam-slab is bounded laterally by centerlines of
W l n2
8
Moment in ((longitudinal)
g ) direction of bending
g considered:
Determination of the total factored static moment:
P
P. P.
I.N.: Interior
Negative Moment
E.N: Exterior
Negative
F all
For ll spans:
E cb I b
1 =
E cs I s
l 2h 3
Is =
12
0.63x x 3 y
C = 1 t i l constant
torsional t t
y 3
EN
E.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N.
P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the column strips)
EN
E.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N. IN
I.N.
P. P.
Transverse Distribution of Moments (to the middle strips)
S
L
S
L
Smax 2 h s
5 hs
Smax smaller of
45cm
Reinforcement Detailing
Example
Design
D i the
th interior
i t i strip
t i shown
h for
f the
th structural
t t l plan l usingi DDM.
DDM TheTh
column dimensions are all 30cmX30cm. The slab depth is 15 cm, and the
beam depth is 50 cm. Ultimate distributed load over the slab = 15 kN/m2.
6.8 m
6.5 m
6.8 m
l1=6.0 m
ln=6
6.0
0 0.3
0 3 = 5.7
57m
l2=(6.8+6.5)/2 = 6.65 m
6.0 m
Solution
Middle Panels
100 cm
2- Determine l2/l1 and 1:
I b = 521342cm 4 50 cm
15 cm
(650 + 680)
l2 = = 665cm 30 cm
2
1
Is = (665)(15) 3 = 187031cm 4 6.8 m
12
521342 1
1 = = 2.79
187031
6.5 m
l 2 665
= = 1.1083
l1 600
l 6.8 m
1 2 = 2.79(1.1083) = 3.09
l1
Mo =
(wl 2 ) l n 2
8
Mo =
(15 6.65) 5.7 2 = 405kN .m
8
Solution
Middle Panels
5- Distribute the interior negative moment to the column and middle strips:
l2
= 1.1083
l1
l2
1 = 3.09
l1
0.45 0.75
0.45-0.75
0
0.75+ (1 1083 11.0)
(1.1083 0) = 0.7175
0 1
2.0-1.0
M scs = 0.7175
0 7175M s
M scs = (0.7175)263.3 = 188.9kN .m
Solution
Middle Panels
0.45-0.75
0 45 0 75
0.75+ (1.1083 1.0) = 0.7175
2.0-1.0
M ccs = 0.7175M c
M ccs = (0.7175)141.8
(0 7175)141 8 = 101
101.7
7 kN .m
Solution
Middle Panels
7- Distribute the column strip moment to the slab and the beam:
l2
1 (l2/l1) = 3.09 > 1.0 = 1.1083
l1
85 % of the moment in the column strip is assigned to 1
l2
= 3.09
the beam and the balance of 15 % is assigned to the slab in l1
the column strip.
Middle Panels
Results
141.8 263.3
101.7 188.9
86.5 160
15.3 28.4
40.1 74.4
Middle Panels
R l +ve moment
Results
40.1/2
15 3/2
15.3/2
40.1/2
Solution
Middle Panels
8- Check shear capacity of the slab
l1=6.2 m
ln=6
6.2
2 0.3
0 3 = 5.9
59m
l2=(6.8+6.5)/2 = 6.65 m
6.2 m
Solution
Exterior Panels
100 cm
2- Determine l2/l1, 1, and t:
From interior p
panels calculations
50 cm
I b = 521342cm 4 15 cm
30 cm
I s = 187031cm 4
1 = 2.79
6.8 m
l 2 665 1
= = 1.073
l1 620
6.5 m
l
1 2 = 2.79(1.073) = 3.0
l1
6.8 m
0.63x x 3 y
C = 1 65 cm
y 3
0.63(30) 303 (50)
C = (1 )( )+ 50 cm
50 3
0 63(15) 153 (35)
0.63(15) 15 cm
(1 )( ) = 308644cm 4 30 cm
35 3
C = max(205394,308644) = 308644cm 4
E cbC 308644
t = = = 0.825
2E cs I s 2(187031)
Solution
Exterior Panels
3- Determine the total static moment:
Mo =
(wl 2 ) l n 2
8
Mo =
(15 6.65) 5.92 = 434kN .m
8
Solution
Exterior Panels
5- Distribute the interior negative moment to the column and middle strips:
l2
= 1.073
l1
l2
1 = 3.0
l1
0.45-0.75
0 75+
0.75+ (1 073 11.0)
(1.073 0) = 0.728
0 728
2.0-1.0
M scs = 0.728
0 728M s
M scs = (0.728)303.8 = 221.3kN .m
Solution
Exterior Panels
l2
= 1.073
l1
l2
1 = 3.0
l1
00.45-0.75
45 0 75
0.75+ (1.073 1.0) = 0.728
2.0-1.0
M ccs = 0.728M c
M ccs = (0.728)247 = 180.2kN .m
Solution
Exterior Panels
7- Distribute the exterior negative moment to the column and middle strips:
l2
= 1.073
l1
l2
1 = 3.0
l1
l1/l2
t = 0.825
t
1 1.0723 2
0 100 100 100
0.825 91
25
2.5 75 72 823
72.823 45
M scs = 0.91M s
M scs = (0.91)69.5
(0 91)69 5 = 63.2
63 2kN .m
M sms = 69.5 63.2 = 6.3kN .m
Solution
Exterior Panels
8- Distribute the column strip moment to the slab and the beam:
l2
1 (l2/l1) = 3 > 1.0 l1
= 1.073
= 9.5kN .m = 27 kN .m = 33.2kN .m
Exterior Panels
Results
KN m
KN.m
Lecture 5
Equivalent Frame Method
(EFM)
R i Li
i
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Analysis
y of each equivalent
q frame in its entiretyy shall be ppermitted.
Alternatively, for gravity loading, a separate analysis of each floor or
roof with far ends of columns considered fixed shall be permitted.
ACI 13.7.2.5
4- Distribute
4 Di ib the
h obtained
b i d moments in
i the
h transverse
direction using the same DDM procedure
1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member ((Ksb)):
kEI sb
Ks =
l1
C
Concept off E
Equivalent
i l Column:
C l
The joint rotations for the two cases below can be easily calculated
from structural analysis.
13.2.4.
2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):
Cross section of torsioanl arms
X= min(hb, 4 hf)
9 E cs C
Kt = The summation is for the
c2 3
l 2 (1 ) arms on both sides
l2
0.63x x 3y
C = 1
y 3
K eq
K c1 = K c 2 =
2
When the unfactored live load is variable but does not exceed three-
quarters of the unfactored dead load, or the nature of live load is such that
all
ll panels
l will
ill be
b loaded
l d d simultaneously,
i lt l it shall
h ll be
b permitted
itt d to
t assume
that maximum factored moments occur at all sections with full factored
live
ve load
oad on
o entire
e e slab
s ab system.
sys e .
ACI 13.7.6.2
Example
p
Find and analyze the equivalent 2D frame for a typical storey of the E-W
interior frame of the flat pplate structure shown below. The slab is 25 cm thick.
All columns are 35x35 cm in cross section. Storey height = 3.0 m. Ultimate
distributed load over the slab = 15 kN/m2.
76m
7.6 76m
7.6 76m
7.6 7.6 m
N
6.0 m
6.0 m
6.0 m
6.0 m
Solution
0- Extract a single storey from 3D frame for separate analysis
3.0 m
30m
3.0
Solution
1- Determine the stiffness of the slab beam members
l 2 h s3 600(25) 3
I sb = = = 781250cm 4
12 12
c1 35
= = 0.046
l 1 760
c2 35
= = 0.058
l 2 600
k = 4.047
kEI sb 4.047(781250) E
Ks = = = 4160 E
l1 760
Solution
2.a- Determine the stiffness of the columns
c 2c 13 35(35) 3
Ic = = = 125052cm 4
12 12
l c = 300cm
l u = 300 25 = 275cm
l c 300
= = 1.1
lu 275
t a = t a = 25 / 2 = 12.5
t a 12.5
= = 1.0
t b 12.5
k = 5.09
kEI c
Kc =
lc
5.09(125052) E
Kc = = 2122 E
300
Solution
2.b- Determine the stiffness of the torsional arms
0.63x x 3 y
C = 1
y 3 35cm
0.63(25) (25) 3 35
C = (1 )( ) = 100260cm 4 25cm
35 3
9 E cs C
Kt =
c2 3
l 2 (1 )
l2
9(100260) E
Kt = 2 = 3602 E
600(1 35 ) 3
600
Solution
2.c- Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns
Kt Kc
K ec =
Kt + Kc
3602 E (2 2122 E )
K ec = = 1948 E
3602 E + 2 2122 E
Solution
3- Analyze the frame using ETABS to obtain the longitudinal distribution of
moments.
moments
wu = (15)(6) = 90 kN/m
Lecture 5
Equivalent Frame Method
(EFM)
R i Li
i
2
Introduction:
3
Introduction:
4
Introduction:
5
Introduction:
6
Introduction:
7
Introduction:
8
Introduction:
kEI sb
Ks
l1
11
1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member (Ksb):
Determination of k:
12
1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member (Ksb):
Determination of Isb:
13
2- Stiffness of the Equivalent Columns (Kec):
14
2- Stiffness of the Equivalent Columns (Kec):
15
2- Stiffness of the Equivalent Columns (Kec):
16
2.a Stiffness of the Columns (Kc):
kEI
Kc
lc
17
2.a Stiffness of the Columns (Kc):
kEI
Kc
lc
18
2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms (Kt):
Cross section of torsioanl arms ACI 13.7.5.1
Torsional members shall be assumed
to have a constant cross section
throughout their length consisting of
the largest of (a),
(b), and (c):
9E csC
Kt The summation is for the
c2 3
l 2 (1 ) arms on both sides
l2
20
2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms (Kt):
Cross section constant C
0.63x x 3 y
C 1
y 3
21
2.c- Stiffness of the Equivalent Columns (Kec):
4EI
K c1
lc
K eq
K ct
2
23
Arrangement of live load:
When the unfactored live load is variable but does not exceed three-
quarters of the unfactored dead load, or the nature of live load is such that
all panels will be loaded simultaneously, it shall be permitted to assume
that maximum factored moments occur at all sections with full factored
live load on entire slab system.
ACI 13.7.6.2
24
Example
Find the equivalent 2D frame for 1st storey of the E-W interior frame of the flate
plate structure shown below. The slab is 25 cm thick. All columns are 35 cm
square. Storey height = 3.0 m (from floor top to slab top). Ultimate distributed
load over the slab = 15 kN/m2.
7.6 m 7.6 m 7.6 m 7.6 m
6.0 m
6.0 m
6.0 m
6.0 m
25
Solution
0- Extract a single storey from 3D frame for separate analysis
3.0 m
3.0 m
26
Solution
1- Determine the stiffness of the slab beam members
l 2 hs3 600(25)3
I sb 781250cm 4
12 12
c1 35
0.046
l1 760
c2 35
0.058
l 2 600
k 4.047
kEI sb 4.047(781250) E
Ks 4160E
l1 760
27
Solution
2.a- Determine the stiffness of the columns
c1c 23 35(35)3
I sb 125052cm 4
12 12
l c 300cm
l u 300 25 275cm
l c 300
1.1
l u 275
t a t a 25 / 2 12.5
t a 12.5
1.0
t b 12.5
k 5.09
kEI c
Kc
lc
5.09(125052)E
Kc 2122E
300
28
Solution
2.b- Determine the stiffness of the torsional arms
0.63x x 3 y
C 1 35cm
y 3
0.63(25) (25)3 35
C (1 )( ) 100260cm 4 25cm
35 3
9E csC
Kt
c
l 2 (1 2 )3
l2
9(100260) E
K t 2( ) 3602E
35 3
600(1 )
600
29
Solution
2.c- Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns
Kt Kc
K ec
Kt Kc
3602E (2 2122E )
K ec 1948E
3602E 2122E
31
Solution
3- Analyse the frame using ETABS to obtain the longitudinal distribution of
moments.
wu = (15)(6) = 90 kN/m
32
R i f
Reinforced
dCConcrete
t DDesign
i II
Lecture
L t 6
Design of hollow block and ribbed slabs
PART I
One way ribbed slabs
Ribbed and hollow block slabs
Ribbed slabs consist of regularly spaced ribs monolithically built
with a toping slab. The voids between the ribs may be either light
material such as hollow blocks [figure 1] or it may be left unfilled
[figure 2].
Topping slab
Ribbed and hollow block slabs
The main advantage of using hollow blocks is the reduction in
weight by removing the part of the concrete below the neutral axis.
Additional advantages are:
1- Ease of construction.
2 Hollow
2- H ll bl k make
blocks k it possible
ibl to
t have
h smooth
th ceiling
ili which
hi h is
i
often required for architectural considerations.
33- Provides good sound and temperature insulation properties.
w u l c2
t
1240 f c
h 3.5 bw
bw 100
Flexural strength:
Ribs are designed as rectangular beams in the regions of negative
moment at the supports and as T-shaped beams in the regions of
positive moments between the supports.
Effective
ff i flange
fl width
id h be is
i taken
k as half
h lf the
h distance
di b
between ribs,
ib
center-to-center. b
e
Keyy components
p of ribbed slabs
c. Hollow blocks:
Hollow blocks are made of lightweight
g g concrete or other
lightweight materials. The most common concrete hollow block
sizes are 40 25 cm in plan and heights of 14, 17, 20, and 24 cm.
To avoid shear failures, the blocks are terminated near the support
and replaced
p byy solid pparts. Solid pparts are made under ppartitions
and concentrated walls.
P
Perpendicular
di l to t rib
ib direction
di ti (mm):
( ) Lc 2 = 400 n 2 + bw (n 2 1)
a- Dead Load (D
(D.L)
L) :
1- Weight of slab covering materials
2- Equivalent
q ppartition weight
g
3- Own weight of slab
b Live
b- Li LLoad
d (L
(L.L)
L)
tiles 22.55 cm
cement mortar 2.5 cm
sand 5 cm
slab
plaster 1.5 cm
Example
Find the total ultimate load per rib for the ribbed slab shown:
L dp
Load per rib
ib
Total dead load= 3.85 + 2.315 + 0.75 = 6.915 kN/m2
Ultimate load = 1.2(6.915) + 1.6(2) = 11.5 kN/m2
S1 S2
Mi i
Minimum Reinforcement
R i f t Ratio
R ti for
f Main
M i Reinforcement
R i f t
min A s ,shrinkage
A s ,min shrinkage = 0.0018 b h ACI 10.5.4
Summary of one
one-way
way ribbed slab design procedure
1. The direction of ribs is chosen.
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t
3. Provide shrinkage reinforcement for the topping slab in both
directions.
4. The factored load on each of the ribs is computed.
5. The shear force and bending moment diagrams are drawn.
6. The strength of the web in shear is checked.
7. Design the ribs as T-section shaped beams in the positive moment
regions and rectangular beams in the regions of negative moment.
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the
reinforcement are to be prepared.
p p
Example 1
Determine the arrangement
of blocks and width of
hidden beams for the plan
p
shown. The blocks used
have the size of 40 20 cm
in plan. The live load is 4
kN/m2.
Solution
Note that the width of hollow blocks in Gaza is 250 mm NOT 200 mm
Solution
Solution
Solution
Example 2
Design a oneone-way
way ribbed slab to cover a 3.8
3 8 m x 10 m panel,
panel shown in the
figure below. The covering materials weigh 2.25 kN/m2, equivalent
ppartition load is equal
q to 0.75 kN/m2, and the live load is 2 kN/m2.
Use fc=25 MPa, fy=420MPa
3.8 m
10 m
Solution
1. The direction of ribs is chosen:
Ribs are arranged in the short direction as shown in the figure
3.8 m
3
50m
5.0 50m
5.0
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t:
From ACI Table 9.5(a), hmin = 380/16 = 23.75cm use h = 24 cm.
L t width
Let b bw =10
idth off web, 10 cm
Use hollow blocks of size 40 cm 25 cm 17 cm (weight=0.17 kN)
pp g slab thickness = 24 17 = 7cm > lc/12 =40/12= 3.3cm > 5cm OK
Topping
For a unit strip of topping slab:
wu=[1.2(0.07 25 + 0.75 + 2.25) + 1.6(2)] 1m = 8.9 kN/m = 8.9 N/mm
w u l c2 8.9( 400 ) 2
t = = 16mm OK
1240 f c ( 0.9 )1240 25
Solution
3. Provide shrinkage
g reinforcement for the topping
pp g slab in both directions:
Area of shrinkage reinforcement, As=0.0018(1000)70=126 mm2
Use 5 6 mm/m in both directions.
1.0 m
= 0.24-
0 24 0.136 0 104 m3
0 136 = 0.104
0.25 m
Weight of concrete in 1m2
= 0.104 25 = 2.6 kN/m2
g of hollow blocks in 1m2
Weight
= 8 0.17= 1.36 kN/m2
0.4 m 0.1 m 0.4 m
7 cm
Total dead load /m2
= 2.25 + 0.75 + 2.6 + 1.36
0.244 m
= 7.0 kN/m2
Solution
wu=1.2(7)+1.6(2)=11.6
1.2(7) 1.6(2) 11.6 kN/m2
wu/m of rib =11.6x0.5= 5.8 kN/m of rib
5. Critical shear forces and bending moments are determined (simply supported beam):
Maximum factored shear force = wul/2 = 5.8 (3.8/2) = 11 kN
Maximum factored bending moment = wul2/8 = 5.8 (3.8)2/8 = 10.5 kN.m
6. Check rib strength for beam shear:
Effective depth d = 2420.60.6 =20.8 cm, assuming 12mm reinforcing
bars and 6 mm stirrups.
p
1.1V c = 1.1 0.75 0.17 25 100 208 = 14400 N = 14.4 kN > Vu,max = 11 kN
Solution
7. Design
g flexural reinforcement for the ribs:
There is only positive moments over the simply supported beam, and the
section of maximum positive moment is to be designed as a T-section
Assume that a<70mm and =0.90Rectangular
=0 90Rectangular section with b = be =500mm
50
0.85 25 2 10.5 106
= 1 1 7
kN.m
420 0.9 0.85
0 85 25 500 2082 24
105 k
As
= 0.0013
10
As = be d = 0.0013 500 208 = 135 mm 2
As f y 157 420
a= = = 6.2 mm < 70mm
0.85f c 'b e 0.85 25 500
The assumption is right
Solution
Check As,min
s min
0.25 f c ' 1.4
A s,min = max bw d ; bw d
f y fy
A s,min = 70 mm 2 < A s,sup = 157 mm 2 OK
Check =0.9
=0 9 (ductility of the section)
a 6.2
c= = = 7 .3 mm
1 00.85
85
dc 208 7 .3
t = 0.003 = 0.003
c 7.3
t = 0.083 >> 0 .005 Tension controlled = 0 .9 OK
Solution
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the reinforcement are to be
prepared
110 m
110 m
110 m
110 m
3.8 m A A
5.0 m 5.0 m
6mm stirrups 6mm mesh
@25 cm @20 cm
7cm
24cm
17cm
210mm 10 40 cm 10 210mm
S i A-A
Section AA
PART II
Two way ribbed slabs
Method of analysis
R i Li
i
Method of coefficients
1.0m
w = ws + wl
wS
S
w s = w
w l = w wl
L
Rectangularity ratio:
Case
Method of coefficients
0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85
0 35
0.35 0 29
0.29 0 25
0.25 0 21
0.21 0 18
0.18 0 16
0.16 0 14
0.14 0 12
0.12 0 11
0.11 0 09
0.09 0 08
0.08
0.292 0.355 0.411 0.470 0.526 0.577 0.623 0.663 0.699 0.730 0.757
0.292 0.240 0.198 0.165 0.137 0.114 0.095 0.079 0.067 0.056 0.047
l n (800 + f y /1.4)
h max =
36000
S L
qu(S/2)
Long beam
qu(S/2)
L
m
L
Short beam
S
An equivalent
q uniformlyy distributed load can be established for a beam in a two
way system.
For a triangular load distribution, the equivalent shear force coefficient Cs is
equal to 0.5 and the equivalent bending moment coefficient Cb is equal to 0.67.
Lon
ng beam
qu(S/2)
L
L
Short beam
S
For a trapezoidal load distribution, Cs and Cb are given in the following table.
Shear and moment equivalent load coefficients for trapezoidal load distribution
r =L/S 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0
Cs 0.500 0.545 0.583 0.615 0.643 0.667 0.688 0.706 0.722 0.737 0.750
Cb 0.667 0.725 0.769 0.803 0.830 0.852 0.870 0.885 0.897 0.908 0.917
wu 0.5 wu 0.67 wu
S S S
wu Cs wu Cb wu
L L L
Example
p 3
Design the two-way ribbed slab shown in the figure below. The covering
materials weigh 1.5 kN/m2, equivalent partition load is equal to 0.75,
kN/ 2, concrete
kN/m t hollow
h ll bl k are 40cm25cm17cm
blocks 40 25 17 i dimension,
in di i
each 17 kg in weight and the live load is 4 kN/m2. All beams are 30 cm
wide. Use fc=30 MPa, fy=420 MPa.
8.0 m
8.0 m
8.0 m 8.0 m
S l ti
Solution:
l n = 800 30 = 770cm
S l ti
Solution:
2- Determine
ee e thee total
o factored
c o ed load
o d on
o thee slab:
s b
V l
Volume off hhollow
ll blocks 2[0 2 0.17
bl k = 2[0.2 0 17 0.5] 0 034 m3
0 5] = 0.034
S l ti
Solution:
L 8
r= = =1.0
S 8
8m
w1=w2=0.35(14.1) =4 92 kN/m2
=0 35(14 1) =4.92
8m
0.62 m
wu/m of rib =14.1x0.62=
=14 1x0 62= 3.06
3 06 kN/m of rib
00.5
Direction 1
0.4
S l ti
Solution:
4- Determine
ee e thee shear
s e force
o ce and
d bending
be d g moments:
o e s
Direction 1
55- C
Check
ec web width
w d for
o be
beam sshear:
e
Direction 1
Reinforcement is closest to the outside surface of concrete.
Effective depth d = 23 2 0.60 0.8 = 19.6 cm, assuming 16 mm
reinforcing bars and 6 mm stirrups.
1 1V c = 1.1
1.1 1 1 0.75
0 75 0.17
0 17 30 120 196 = 18067 N
= 18.1 kN > Vu,max = 13.5 kN
Direction 2
Effective depth d = 23 2 0.60 1.6 - 0.8 = 18.0 cm, assuming 16 mm
reinforcing bars and 6 mm stirrups.
S l ti
Solution:
66- Design
es g rib
b reinforcement:
e o ce e
Direction 1
S l ti
Solution:
66- Design
es g rib
b reinforcement:
e o ce e
Direction 2
S l ti
Solution:
77- Design
es g drawing:
d w g
S l ti
Solution:
77- Design
es g drawing:
d w g
R i f
Reinforced
dCConcrete
t DDesign
i II
Lecture
L t 6
Design of hollow block and ribbed slabs
PART I
One way ribbed slabs
Ribbed and hollow block slabs
Ribbed slabs consist of regularly spaced ribs monolithically built
with a toping slab. The voids between the ribs may be either light
material such as hollow blocks [figure 1] or it may be left unfilled
[figure 2].
Topping slab
Ribbed and hollow block slabs
The main advantage of using hollow blocks is the reduction in
weight by removing the part of the concrete below the neutral axis.
Additional advantages are:
1- Ease of construction.
2 Hollow
2- H ll bl k make
blocks k it possible
ibl to
t have
h smooth
th ceiling
ili which
hi h is
i
often required for architectural considerations.
33- Provides good sound and temperature insulation properties.
w u l c2
t
1240 f c
h 3.5 bw
bw 100
Flexural strength:
Ribs are designed as rectangular beams in the regions of negative
moment at the supports and as T-shaped beams in the regions of
positive moments between the supports.
Effective
ff i flange
fl width
id h be is
i taken
k as half
h lf the
h distance
di b
between ribs,
ib
center-to-center. b
e
Keyy components
p of ribbed slabs
c. Hollow blocks:
Hollow blocks are made of lightweight
g g concrete or other
lightweight materials. The most common concrete hollow block
sizes are 40 25 cm in plan and heights of 14, 17, 20, and 24 cm.
To avoid shear failures, the blocks are terminated near the support
and replaced
p byy solid pparts. Solid pparts are made under ppartitions
and concentrated walls.
P
Perpendicular
di l to t rib
ib direction
di ti (mm):
( ) Lc 2 = 400 n 2 + bw (n 2 1)
a- Dead Load (D
(D.L)
L) :
1- Weight of slab covering materials
2- Equivalent
q ppartition weight
g
3- Own weight of slab
b Live
b- Li LLoad
d (L
(L.L)
L)
tiles 22.55 cm
cement mortar 2.5 cm
sand 5 cm
slab
plaster 1.5 cm
Example
Find the total ultimate load per rib for the ribbed slab shown:
L dp
Load per rib
ib
Total dead load= 3.85 + 2.315 + 0.75 = 6.915 kN/m2
Ultimate load = 1.2(6.915) + 1.6(2) = 11.5 kN/m2
S1 S2
Mi i
Minimum Reinforcement
R i f t Ratio
R ti for
f Main
M i Reinforcement
R i f t
min A s ,shrinkage
A s ,min shrinkage = 0.0018 b h ACI 10.5.4
Summary of one
one-way
way ribbed slab design procedure
1. The direction of ribs is chosen.
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t
3. Provide shrinkage reinforcement for the topping slab in both
directions.
4. The factored load on each of the ribs is computed.
5. The shear force and bending moment diagrams are drawn.
6. The strength of the web in shear is checked.
7. Design the ribs as T-section shaped beams in the positive moment
regions and rectangular beams in the regions of negative moment.
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the
reinforcement are to be prepared.
p p
Example 1
Determine the arrangement
of blocks and width of
hidden beams for the plan
p
shown. The blocks used
have the size of 40 20 cm
in plan. The live load is 4
kN/m2.
Solution
Note that the width of hollow blocks in Gaza is 250 mm NOT 200 mm
Solution
Solution
Solution
Example 2
Design a oneone-way
way ribbed slab to cover a 3.8
3 8 m x 10 m panel,
panel shown in the
figure below. The covering materials weigh 2.25 kN/m2, equivalent
ppartition load is equal
q to 0.75 kN/m2, and the live load is 2 kN/m2.
Use fc=25 MPa, fy=420MPa
3.8 m
10 m
Solution
1. The direction of ribs is chosen:
Ribs are arranged in the short direction as shown in the figure
3.8 m
3
50m
5.0 50m
5.0
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t:
From ACI Table 9.5(a), hmin = 380/16 = 23.75cm use h = 24 cm.
L t width
Let b bw =10
idth off web, 10 cm
Use hollow blocks of size 40 cm 25 cm 17 cm (weight=0.17 kN)
pp g slab thickness = 24 17 = 7cm > lc/12 =40/12= 3.3cm > 5cm OK
Topping
For a unit strip of topping slab:
wu=[1.2(0.07 25 + 0.75 + 2.25) + 1.6(2)] 1m = 8.9 kN/m = 8.9 N/mm
w u l c2 8.9( 400 ) 2
t = = 16mm OK
1240 f c ( 0.9 )1240 25
Solution
3. Provide shrinkage
g reinforcement for the topping
pp g slab in both directions:
Area of shrinkage reinforcement, As=0.0018(1000)70=126 mm2
Use 5 6 mm/m in both directions.
1.0 m
= 0.24-
0 24 0.136 0 104 m3
0 136 = 0.104
0.25 m
Weight of concrete in 1m2
= 0.104 25 = 2.6 kN/m2
g of hollow blocks in 1m2
Weight
= 8 0.17= 1.36 kN/m2
0.4 m 0.1 m 0.4 m
7 cm
Total dead load /m2
= 2.25 + 0.75 + 2.6 + 1.36
0.244 m
= 7.0 kN/m2
Solution
wu=1.2(7)+1.6(2)=11.6
1.2(7) 1.6(2) 11.6 kN/m2
wu/m of rib =11.6x0.5= 5.8 kN/m of rib
5. Critical shear forces and bending moments are determined (simply supported beam):
Maximum factored shear force = wul/2 = 5.8 (3.8/2) = 11 kN
Maximum factored bending moment = wul2/8 = 5.8 (3.8)2/8 = 10.5 kN.m
6. Check rib strength for beam shear:
Effective depth d = 2420.60.6 =20.8 cm, assuming 12mm reinforcing
bars and 6 mm stirrups.
p
1.1V c = 1.1 0.75 0.17 25 100 208 = 14400 N = 14.4 kN > Vu,max = 11 kN
Solution
7. Design
g flexural reinforcement for the ribs:
There is only positive moments over the simply supported beam, and the
section of maximum positive moment is to be designed as a T-section
Assume that a<70mm and =0.90Rectangular
=0 90Rectangular section with b = be =500mm
50
0.85 25 2 10.5 106
= 1 1 7
kN.m
420 0.9 0.85
0 85 25 500 2082 24
105 k
As
= 0.0013
10
As = be d = 0.0013 500 208 = 135 mm 2
As f y 157 420
a= = = 6.2 mm < 70mm
0.85f c 'b e 0.85 25 500
The assumption is right
Solution
Check As,min
s min
0.25 f c ' 1.4
A s,min = max bw d ; bw d
f y fy
A s,min = 70 mm 2 < A s,sup = 157 mm 2 OK
Check =0.9
=0 9 (ductility of the section)
a 6.2
c= = = 7 .3 mm
1 00.85
85
dc 208 7 .3
t = 0.003 = 0.003
c 7.3
t = 0.083 >> 0 .005 Tension controlled = 0 .9 OK
Solution
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the reinforcement are to be
prepared
110 m
110 m
110 m
110 m
3.8 m A A
5.0 m 5.0 m
6mm stirrups 6mm mesh
@25 cm @20 cm
7cm
24cm
17cm
210mm 10 40 cm 10 210mm
S i A-A
Section AA
PART II
Two way ribbed slabs
Method of analysis
R i Li
i
Method of coefficients
1.0m
w = ws + wl
wS
S
w s = w
w l = w wl
L
Rectangularity ratio:
Case
Method of coefficients
0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85
0 35
0.35 0 29
0.29 0 25
0.25 0 21
0.21 0 18
0.18 0 16
0.16 0 14
0.14 0 12
0.12 0 11
0.11 0 09
0.09 0 08
0.08
0.292 0.355 0.411 0.470 0.526 0.577 0.623 0.663 0.699 0.730 0.757
0.292 0.240 0.198 0.165 0.137 0.114 0.095 0.079 0.067 0.056 0.047
l n (800 + f y /1.4)
h max =
36000
S L
qu(S/2)
Long beam
qu(S/2)
L
m
L
Short beam
S
An equivalent
q uniformlyy distributed load can be established for a beam in a two
way system.
For a triangular load distribution, the equivalent shear force coefficient Cs is
equal to 0.5 and the equivalent bending moment coefficient Cb is equal to 0.67.
Lon
ng beam
qu(S/2)
L
L
Short beam
S
For a trapezoidal load distribution, Cs and Cb are given in the following table.
Shear and moment equivalent load coefficients for trapezoidal load distribution
r =L/S 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0
Cs 0.500 0.545 0.583 0.615 0.643 0.667 0.688 0.706 0.722 0.737 0.750
Cb 0.667 0.725 0.769 0.803 0.830 0.852 0.870 0.885 0.897 0.908 0.917
wu 0.5 wu 0.67 wu
S S S
wu Cs wu Cb wu
L L L
Example
p 3
Design the two-way ribbed slab shown in the figure below. The covering
materials weigh 1.5 kN/m2, equivalent partition load is equal to 0.75,
kN/ 2, concrete
kN/m t hollow
h ll bl k are 40cm25cm17cm
blocks 40 25 17 i dimension,
in di i
each 17 kg in weight and the live load is 4 kN/m2. All beams are 30 cm
wide. Use fc=30 MPa, fy=420 MPa.
8.0 m
8.0 m
8.0 m 8.0 m
S l ti
Solution:
l n = 800 30 = 770cm
S l ti
Solution:
2- Determine
ee e thee total
o factored
c o ed load
o d on
o thee slab:
s b
V l
Volume off hhollow
ll blocks 2[0 2 0.17
bl k = 2[0.2 0 17 0.5] 0 034 m3
0 5] = 0.034
S l ti
Solution:
L 8
r= = =1.0
S 8
8m
w1=w2=0.35(14.1) =4 92 kN/m2
=0 35(14 1) =4.92
8m
0.62 m
wu/m of rib =4.92x0.62=
=4 92x0 62= 3.06
3 06 kN/m of rib
0.5
Direction 1
0.4
S l ti
Solution:
4- Determine
ee e thee shear
s e force
o ce and
d bending
be d g moments:
o e s
Direction 1
55- C
Check
ec web width
w d for
o be
beam sshear:
e
Direction 1
Reinforcement is closest to the outside surface of concrete.
Effective depth d = 23 2 0.60 0.8 = 19.6 cm, assuming 16 mm
reinforcing bars and 6 mm stirrups.
1 1V c = 1.1
1.1 1 1 0.75
0 75 0.17
0 17 30 120 196 = 18067 N
= 18.1 kN > Vu,max = 13.5 kN
Direction 2
Effective depth d = 23 2 0.60 1.6 - 0.8 = 18.0 cm, assuming 16 mm
reinforcing bars and 6 mm stirrups.
S l ti
Solution:
66- Design
es g rib
b reinforcement:
e o ce e
Direction 1
S l ti
Solution:
66- Design
es g rib
b reinforcement:
e o ce e
Direction 2
S l ti
Solution:
77- Design
es g drawing:
d w g
S l ti
Solution:
77- Design
es g drawing:
d w g
R i f
Reinforced
dCConcrete
t DDesign
i II
Lecture
L t 6
Design of hollow block and ribbed slabs
PART I
One way ribbed slabs
Ribbed and hollow block slabs
Ribbed slabs consist of regularly spaced ribs monolithically built
with a toping slab. The voids between the ribs may be either light
material such as hollow blocks [figure 1] or it may be left unfilled
[figure 2].
Topping slab
Ribbed and hollow block slabs
The main advantage of using hollow blocks is the reduction in
weight by removing the part of the concrete below the neutral axis.
Additional advantages are:
1- Ease of construction.
2 Hollow
2- H ll bl k make
blocks k it possible
ibl to
t have
h smooth
th ceiling
ili which
hi h is
i
often required for architectural considerations.
33- Provides good sound and temperature insulation properties.
w u l c2
t
1240 f c
h 3.5 bw
bw 100
Flexural strength:
Ribs are designed as rectangular beams in the regions of negative
moment at the supports and as T-shaped beams in the regions of
positive moments between the supports.
Effective
ff i flange
fl width
id h be is
i taken
k as half
h lf the
h distance
di b
between ribs,
ib
center-to-center. b
e
Keyy components
p of ribbed slabs
c. Hollow blocks:
Hollow blocks are made of lightweight
g g concrete or other
lightweight materials. The most common concrete hollow block
sizes are 40 25 cm in plan and heights of 14, 17, 20, and 24 cm.
To avoid shear failures, the blocks are terminated near the support
and replaced
p byy solid pparts. Solid pparts are made under ppartitions
and concentrated walls.
P
Perpendicular
di l to t rib
ib direction
di ti (mm):
( ) Lc 2 = 400 n 2 + bw (n 2 1)
a- Dead Load (D
(D.L)
L) :
1- Weight of slab covering materials
2- Equivalent
q ppartition weight
g
3- Own weight of slab
b Live
b- Li LLoad
d (L
(L.L)
L)
tiles 22.55 cm
cement mortar 2.5 cm
sand 5 cm
slab
plaster 1.5 cm
Example
Find the total ultimate load per rib for the ribbed slab shown:
L dp
Load per rib
ib
Total dead load= 3.85 + 2.315 + 0.75 = 6.915 kN/m2
Ultimate load = 1.2(6.915) + 1.6(2) = 11.5 kN/m2
S1 S2
Mi i
Minimum Reinforcement
R i f t Ratio
R ti for
f Main
M i Reinforcement
R i f t
min A s ,shrinkage
A s ,min shrinkage = 0.0018 b h ACI 10.5.4
Summary of one
one-way
way ribbed slab design procedure
1. The direction of ribs is chosen.
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t
3. Provide shrinkage reinforcement for the topping slab in both
directions.
4. The factored load on each of the ribs is computed.
5. The shear force and bending moment diagrams are drawn.
6. The strength of the web in shear is checked.
7. Design the ribs as T-section shaped beams in the positive moment
regions and rectangular beams in the regions of negative moment.
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the
reinforcement are to be prepared.
p p
Example 1
Determine the arrangement
of blocks and width of
hidden beams for the plan
p
shown. The blocks used
have the size of 40 20 cm
in plan. The live load is 4
kN/m2.
Solution
Note that the width of hollow blocks in Gaza is 250 mm NOT 200 mm
Solution
Solution
Solution
Example 2
Design a oneone-way
way ribbed slab to cover a 3.8
3 8 m x 10 m panel,
panel shown in the
figure below. The covering materials weigh 2.25 kN/m2, equivalent
ppartition load is equal
q to 0.75 kN/m2, and the live load is 2 kN/m2.
Use fc=25 MPa, fy=420MPa
3.8 m
10 m
Solution
1. The direction of ribs is chosen:
Ribs are arranged in the short direction as shown in the figure
3.8 m
3
50m
5.0 50m
5.0
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t:
From ACI Table 9.5(a), hmin = 380/16 = 23.75cm use h = 24 cm.
L t width
Let b bw =10
idth off web, 10 cm
Use hollow blocks of size 40 cm 25 cm 17 cm (weight=0.17 kN)
pp g slab thickness = 24 17 = 7cm > lc/12 =40/12= 3.3cm > 5cm OK
Topping
For a unit strip of topping slab:
wu=[1.2(0.07 25 + 0.75 + 2.25) + 1.6(2)] 1m = 8.9 kN/m = 8.9 N/mm
w u l c2 8.9( 400 ) 2
t = = 16mm OK
1240 f c ( 0.9 )1240 25
Solution
3. Provide shrinkage
g reinforcement for the topping
pp g slab in both directions:
Area of shrinkage reinforcement, As=0.0018(1000)70=126 mm2
Use 5 6 mm/m in both directions.
1.0 m
= 0.24-
0 24 0.136 0 104 m3
0 136 = 0.104
0.25 m
Weight of concrete in 1m2
= 0.104 25 = 2.6 kN/m2
g of hollow blocks in 1m2
Weight
= 8 0.17= 1.36 kN/m2
0.4 m 0.1 m 0.4 m
7 cm
Total dead load /m2
= 2.25 + 0.75 + 2.6 + 1.36
0.244 m
= 7.0 kN/m2
Solution
wu=1.2(7)+1.6(2)=11.6
1.2(7) 1.6(2) 11.6 kN/m2
wu/m of rib =11.6x0.5= 5.8 kN/m of rib
5. Critical shear forces and bending moments are determined (simply supported beam):
Maximum factored shear force = wul/2 = 5.8 (3.8/2) = 11 kN
Maximum factored bending moment = wul2/8 = 5.8 (3.8)2/8 = 10.5 kN.m
6. Check rib strength for beam shear:
Effective depth d = 2420.60.6 =20.8 cm, assuming 12mm reinforcing
bars and 6 mm stirrups.
p
1.1V c = 1.1 0.75 0.17 25 100 208 = 14400 N = 14.4 kN > Vu,max = 11 kN
Solution
7. Design
g flexural reinforcement for the ribs:
There is only positive moments over the simply supported beam, and the
section of maximum positive moment is to be designed as a T-section
Assume that a<70mm and =0.90Rectangular
=0 90Rectangular section with b = be =500mm
50
0.85 25 2 10.5 106
= 1 1 7
kN.m
420 0.9 0.85
0 85 25 500 2082 24
105 k
As
= 0.0013
10
As = be d = 0.0013 500 208 = 135 mm 2
As f y 157 420
a= = = 6.2 mm < 70mm
0.85f c 'b e 0.85 25 500
The assumption is right
Solution
Check As,min
s min
0.25 f c ' 1.4
A s,min = max bw d ; bw d
f y fy
A s,min = 70 mm 2 < A s,sup = 157 mm 2 OK
Check =0.9
=0 9 (ductility of the section)
a 6.2
c= = = 7 .3 mm
1 00.85
85
dc 208 7 .3
t = 0.003 = 0.003
c 7.3
t = 0.083 >> 0 .005 Tension controlled = 0 .9 OK
Solution
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the reinforcement are to be
prepared
110 m
110 m
110 m
110 m
3.8 m A A
5.0 m 5.0 m
6mm stirrups 6mm mesh
@25 cm @20 cm
7cm
24cm
17cm
210mm 10 40 cm 10 210mm
S i A-A
Section AA
PART II
Two way ribbed slabs
Method of analysis
R i Li
i
Method of coefficients
1.0m
w = ws + wl
wS
S
w s = w
w l = w wl
L
Rectangularity ratio:
Case
Method of coefficients
0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85
0 35
0.35 0 29
0.29 0 25
0.25 0 21
0.21 0 18
0.18 0 16
0.16 0 14
0.14 0 12
0.12 0 11
0.11 0 09
0.09 0 08
0.08
0.292 0.355 0.411 0.470 0.526 0.577 0.623 0.663 0.699 0.730 0.757
0.292 0.240 0.198 0.165 0.137 0.114 0.095 0.079 0.067 0.056 0.047
l n (800 + f y /1.4)
h max =
36000
S L
qu(S/2)
Long beam
qu(S/2)
L
m
L
Short beam
S
An equivalent
q uniformlyy distributed load can be established for a beam in a two
way system.
For a triangular load distribution, the equivalent shear force coefficient Cs is
equal to 0.5 and the equivalent bending moment coefficient Cb is equal to 0.67.
Lon
ng beam
qu(S/2)
L
L
Short beam
S
For a trapezoidal load distribution, Cs and Cb are given in the following table.
Shear and moment equivalent load coefficients for trapezoidal load distribution
r =L/S 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0
Cs 0.500 0.545 0.583 0.615 0.643 0.667 0.688 0.706 0.722 0.737 0.750
Cb 0.667 0.725 0.769 0.803 0.830 0.852 0.870 0.885 0.897 0.908 0.917
wu 0.5 wu 0.67 wu
S S S
wu Cs wu Cb wu
L L L
Example
p 3
Design the two-way ribbed slab shown in the figure below. The covering
materials weigh 1.5 kN/m2, equivalent partition load is equal to 0.75,
kN/ 2, concrete
kN/m t hollow
h ll bl k are 40cm25cm17cm
blocks 40 25 17 i dimension,
in di i
each 17 kg in weight and the live load is 4 kN/m2. All beams are 30 cm
wide. Use fc=30 MPa, fy=420 MPa.
8.0 m
8.0 m
8.0 m 8.0 m
S l ti
Solution:
l n = 800 30 = 770cm
S l ti
Solution:
2- Determine
ee e thee total
o factored
c o ed load
o d on
o thee slab:
s b
V l
Volume off hhollow
ll blocks 2[0 4 0.25
bl k = 2[0.4 0 25 0.17] 0 034 m3
0 17] = 0.034
S l ti
Solution:
L 8
r= = =1.0
S 8
8m
w1=w2=0.35(14.1) =4 92 kN/m2
=0 35(14 1) =4.92
8m
0.62 m
wu/m of rib =4.92x0.62=
=4 92x0 62= 3.06
3 06 kN/m of rib
0.5
Direction 1
0.4
S l ti
Solution:
4- Determine
ee e thee shear
s e force
o ce and
d bending
be d g moments:
o e s
Direction 1
55- C
Check
ec web width
w d for
o be
beam sshear:
e
Direction 1
Reinforcement is closest to the outside surface of concrete.
Effective depth d = 23 2 0.60 0.8 = 19.6 cm, assuming 16 mm
reinforcing bars and 6 mm stirrups.
1 1V c = 1.1
1.1 1 1 0.75
0 75 0.17
0 17 30 120 196 = 18067 N
= 18.1 kN > Vu,max = 13.5 kN
Direction 2
Effective depth d = 23 2 0.60 1.6 - 0.8 = 18.0 cm, assuming 16 mm
reinforcing bars and 6 mm stirrups.
S l ti
Solution:
66- Design
es g rib
b reinforcement:
e o ce e
Direction 1
S l ti
Solution:
66- Design
es g rib
b reinforcement:
e o ce e
Direction 2
S l ti
Solution:
77- Design
es g drawing:
d w g
S l ti
Solution:
77- Design
es g drawing:
d w g
R i f
Reinforced
dCConcrete
t DDesign
i II
Lecture
L t 6
Design of hollow block and ribbed slabs
PART I
One way ribbed slabs
Ribbed and hollow block slabs
Ribbed slabs consist of regularly spaced ribs monolithically built
with a toping slab. The voids between the ribs may be either light
material such as hollow blocks [figure 1] or it may be left unfilled
[figure 2].
Topping slab
Ribbed and hollow block slabs
The main advantage of using hollow blocks is the reduction in
weight by removing the part of the concrete below the neutral axis.
Additional advantages are:
1- Ease of construction.
2 Hollow
2- H ll bl k make
blocks k it possible
ibl to
t have
h smooth
th ceiling
ili which
hi h is
i
often required for architectural considerations.
33- Provides good sound and temperature insulation properties.
w u l c2
t
1240 f c
h 3.5 bw
bw 100
Flexural strength:
Ribs are designed as rectangular beams in the regions of negative
moment at the supports and as T-shaped beams in the regions of
positive moments between the supports.
Effective
ff i flange
fl width
id h be is
i taken
k as half
h lf the
h distance
di b
between ribs,
ib
center-to-center. b
e
Keyy components
p of ribbed slabs
c. Hollow blocks:
Hollow blocks are made of lightweight
g g concrete or other
lightweight materials. The most common concrete hollow block
sizes are 40 25 cm in plan and heights of 14, 17, 20, and 24 cm.
To avoid shear failures, the blocks are terminated near the support
and replaced
p byy solid pparts. Solid pparts are made under ppartitions
and concentrated walls.
P
Perpendicular
di l to t rib
ib direction
di ti (mm):
( ) Lc 2 = 400 n 2 + bw (n 2 1)
a- Dead Load (D
(D.L)
L) :
1- Weight of slab covering materials
2- Equivalent
q ppartition weight
g
3- Own weight of slab
b Live
b- Li LLoad
d (L
(L.L)
L)
tiles 22.55 cm
cement mortar 2.5 cm
sand 5 cm
slab
plaster 1.5 cm
Example
Find the total ultimate load per rib for the ribbed slab shown:
L dp
Load per rib
ib
Total dead load= 3.85 + 2.315 + 0.75 = 6.915 kN/m2
Ultimate load = 1.2(6.915) + 1.6(2) = 11.5 kN/m2
S1 S2
Mi i
Minimum Reinforcement
R i f t Ratio
R ti for
f Main
M i Reinforcement
R i f t
min A s ,shrinkage
A s ,min shrinkage = 0.0018 b h ACI 10.5.4
Summary of one
one-way
way ribbed slab design procedure
1. The direction of ribs is chosen.
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t
3. Provide shrinkage reinforcement for the topping slab in both
directions.
4. The factored load on each of the ribs is computed.
5. The shear force and bending moment diagrams are drawn.
6. The strength of the web in shear is checked.
7. Design the ribs as T-section shaped beams in the positive moment
regions and rectangular beams in the regions of negative moment.
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the
reinforcement are to be prepared.
p p
Example 1
Determine the arrangement
of blocks and width of
hidden beams for the plan
p
shown. The blocks used
have the size of 40 20 cm
in plan. The live load is 4
kN/m2.
Solution
Note that the width of hollow blocks in Gaza is 250 mm NOT 200 mm
Solution
Solution
Solution
Example 2
Design a oneone-way
way ribbed slab to cover a 3.8
3 8 m x 10 m panel,
panel shown in the
figure below. The covering materials weigh 2.25 kN/m2, equivalent
ppartition load is equal
q to 0.75 kN/m2, and the live load is 2 kN/m2.
Use fc=25 MPa, fy=420MPa
3.8 m
10 m
Solution
1. The direction of ribs is chosen:
Ribs are arranged in the short direction as shown in the figure
3.8 m
3
50m
5.0 50m
5.0
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t:
From ACI Table 9.5(a), hmin = 380/16 = 23.75cm use h = 24 cm.
L t width
Let b bw =10
idth off web, 10 cm
Use hollow blocks of size 40 cm 25 cm 17 cm (weight=0.17 kN)
pp g slab thickness = 24 17 = 7cm > lc/12 =40/12= 3.3cm > 5cm OK
Topping
For a unit strip of topping slab:
wu=[1.2(0.07 25 + 0.75 + 2.25) + 1.6(2)] 1m = 8.9 kN/m = 8.9 N/mm
w u l c2 8.9( 400 ) 2
t = = 16mm OK
1240 f c ( 0.9 )1240 25
Solution
3. Provide shrinkage
g reinforcement for the topping
pp g slab in both directions:
Area of shrinkage reinforcement, As=0.0018(1000)70=126 mm2
Use 5 6 mm/m in both directions.
1.0 m
= 0.24-
0 24 0.136 0 104 m3
0 136 = 0.104
0.25 m
Weight of concrete in 1m2
= 0.104 25 = 2.6 kN/m2
g of hollow blocks in 1m2
Weight
= 8 0.17= 1.36 kN/m2
0.4 m 0.1 m 0.4 m
7 cm
Total dead load /m2
= 2.25 + 0.75 + 2.6 + 1.36
0.244 m
= 7.0 kN/m2
Solution
wu=1.2(7)+1.6(2)=11.6
1.2(7) 1.6(2) 11.6 kN/m2
wu/m of rib =11.6x0.5= 5.8 kN/m of rib
5. Critical shear forces and bending moments are determined (simply supported beam):
Maximum factored shear force = wul/2 = 5.8 (3.8/2) = 11 kN
Maximum factored bending moment = wul2/8 = 5.8 (3.8)2/8 = 10.5 kN.m
6. Check rib strength for beam shear:
Effective depth d = 2420.60.6 =20.8 cm, assuming 12mm reinforcing
bars and 6 mm stirrups.
p
1.1V c = 1.1 0.75 0.17 25 100 208 = 14400 N = 14.4 kN > Vu,max = 11 kN
Solution
7. Design
g flexural reinforcement for the ribs:
There is only positive moments over the simply supported beam, and the
section of maximum positive moment is to be designed as a T-section
Assume that a<70mm and =0.90Rectangular
=0 90Rectangular section with b = be =500mm
50
0.85 25 2 10.5 106
= 1 1 7
kN.m
420 0.9 0.85
0 85 25 500 2082 24
105 k
As
= 0.0013
10
As = be d = 0.0013 500 208 = 135 mm 2
As f y 157 420
a= = = 6.2 mm < 70mm
0.85f c 'b e 0.85 25 500
The assumption is right
Solution
Check As,min
s min
0.25 f c ' 1.4
A s,min = max bw d ; bw d
f y fy
A s,min = 70 mm 2 < A s,sup = 157 mm 2 OK
Check =0.9
=0 9 (ductility of the section)
a 6.2
c= = = 7 .3 mm
1 00.85
85
dc 208 7 .3
t = 0.003 = 0.003
c 7.3
t = 0.083 >> 0 .005 Tension controlled = 0 .9 OK
Solution
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the reinforcement are to be
prepared
110 m
110 m
110 m
110 m
3.8 m A A
5.0 m 5.0 m
6mm stirrups 6mm mesh
@25 cm @20 cm
7cm
24cm
17cm
210mm 10 40 cm 10 210mm
S i A-A
Section AA
PART II
Two way ribbed slabs
Method of analysis
R i Li
i
Method of coefficients
1.0m
w = ws + wl
wS
S
w s = w
w l = w wl
L
Rectangularity ratio:
Case
Method of coefficients
0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85
0 35
0.35 0 29
0.29 0 25
0.25 0 21
0.21 0 18
0.18 0 16
0.16 0 14
0.14 0 12
0.12 0 11
0.11 0 09
0.09 0 08
0.08
0.292 0.355 0.411 0.470 0.526 0.577 0.623 0.663 0.699 0.730 0.757
0.292 0.240 0.198 0.165 0.137 0.114 0.095 0.079 0.067 0.056 0.047
l n (800 + f y /1.4)
h max =
36000
S L
qu(S/2)
Long beam
qu(S/2)
L
m
L
Short beam
S
An equivalent
q uniformlyy distributed load can be established for a beam in a two
way system.
For a triangular load distribution, the equivalent shear force coefficient Cs is
equal to 0.5 and the equivalent bending moment coefficient Cb is equal to 0.67.
Lon
ng beam
qu(S/2)
L
L
Short beam
S
For a trapezoidal load distribution, Cs and Cb are given in the following table.
Shear and moment equivalent load coefficients for trapezoidal load distribution
r =L/S 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0
Cs 0.500 0.545 0.583 0.615 0.643 0.667 0.688 0.706 0.722 0.737 0.750
Cb 0.667 0.725 0.769 0.803 0.830 0.852 0.870 0.885 0.897 0.908 0.917
wu 0.5 wu 0.67 wu
S S S
wu Cs wu Cb wu
L L L
Example
p 3
Design the two-way ribbed slab shown in the figure below. The covering
materials weigh 1.5 kN/m2, equivalent partition load is equal to 0.75
kN/ 2, concrete
kN/m t hollow
h ll bl k are 40cm25cm17cm
blocks 40 25 17 i dimension,
in di i
each 17 kg in weight and the live load is 4 kN/m2. All beams are 30 cm
wide. Use fc=30 MPa, fy=420 MPa.
8.0 m
8.0 m
8.0 m 8.0 m
S l ti
Solution:
l n = 800 30 = 770cm
S l ti
Solution:
2- Determine
ee e thee total
o factored
c o ed load
o d on
o thee slab:
s b
V l
Volume off hhollow
ll blocks 2[0 4 0.25
bl k = 2[0.4 0 25 0.17] 0 034 m3
0 17] = 0.034
S l ti
Solution:
L 8
r= = =1.0
S 8
8m
w1=w2=0.35(14.1) =4 92 kN/m2
=0 35(14 1) =4.92
8m
0.62 m
wu/m of rib =4.92x0.62=
=4 92x0 62= 3.06
3 06 kN/m of rib
0.5
Direction 1
0.4
S l ti
Solution:
4- Determine
ee e thee shear
s e force
o ce and
d bending
be d g moments:
o e s
Direction 1
55- C
Check
ec web width
w d for
o be
beam sshear:
e
Direction 1
Reinforcement is closest to the outside surface of concrete.
Effective depth d = 23 2 0.60 0.8 = 19.6 cm, assuming 16 mm
reinforcing bars and 6 mm stirrups.
1 1V c = 1.1
1.1 1 1 0.75
0 75 0.17
0 17 30 120 196 = 18067 N
= 18.1 kN > Vu,max = 13.5 kN
Direction 2
Effective depth d = 23 2 0.60 1.6 - 0.8 = 18.0 cm, assuming 16 mm
reinforcing bars and 6 mm stirrups.
S l ti
Solution:
66- Design
es g rib
b reinforcement:
e o ce e
Direction 1
S l ti
Solution:
66- Design
es g rib
b reinforcement:
e o ce e
Direction 2
S l ti
Solution:
77- Design
es g drawing:
d w g
S l ti
Solution:
77- Design
es g drawing:
d w g
Lecture 7
Load transfer in two way slabs
Design
g Moment for Columns for DDM
ACI 13.6.9.2
Design
g Moment for Columns for DDM
For equal spans:
An exterior
A t i column
l can be
b considered
id d byb assuming
i the
th shorter
h t span
length is 0.
Design
g Moment for Columns for DDM
The moment is distributed to the stiffness of the column above and below
the slab in proportion to their flexural stiffnesses.
4 EI
4EI
K c1 =
lc
K c1
M u1 = Mu
c1
K + K c2
For symmetric
y conditions:
Mu
M u1 =
2
ACI 13.5.3.2
ACI 13.5.3.4
V u v M v x 1
v 1,2 = +
Ac Jc
Example
For the flat plate shown
sho n in the figure,
fig re check the slab for moment and shear transfer
at the exterior column indicated. From DDM calculations, the column strip (width
= 1375mm)) carries a moment of 78 kN.m,, and is reinforced with 520. The slab
thickness is 20 cm (d = 17cm). Ultimate distributed load over the slab = 15
kN/m2. All columns are 40 cm square. Use fy = 420 kN/m2. and fc=25 kN/m2.
5.5 m
5.5 m
6.0 m 6.0 m
Solution
d 17
b1 = c + = 40 + = 48.5cm
2 2
b2 = c + d = 40 + 17 = 57cm
1 1
= = = 0.62
2 b1 2 48.5
1+ 1+
3 b2 3 57
M f = f M u = 0.62(78) = 48.4kN .m
Solution
3- Add two 20 bars in the 100 cm width considered and check to see
whether
h th the
th momentt transfer
t f situation
it ti is i satisfactory.
ti f t To
T resist
i t the
th 48.4
48 4 kN.m
kN
moment, we now have the two bars just added in addition to three bars from
the column strip design (520 bars in total, As = 1570 cm2).
As f y 1570(420)
a= = = 31mm
0.85(25)(1000)
0.85 f c b
a
M n = As f y (d )
2
31
M n = 0.9(1570)(420)(170 ) = 91.7kN .m > 48.4kN .m OK
2
Column strip
1000 mm
1375 mm
Solution
B- Check the combined shear stress at the exterior column due to shear and
momentt transfer:
t f
1- Nominal moment strength of the full column strip with 720 bars:
As f y 2198(420)
a= = = 31.6mm
0.85f c b 0.85(25)(1375)
a
M n = A s f y (d )
2
31.6
31 6
M n = (2198)(420)(170 ) = 142kN .m
2
M v = (1 f ) M n = (1 0.62)(142) = 54.2kN .m
Solution
d 17
x = c + = 40 + = 48.5cm
2 2
y = c + d = 40 + 17 = 57cm
Ac = d (2x + y ) = 17(2(48.5)
17(2(48 5) + 57) = 2618cm 2
x1 =
yA
=
2(48.5)(17)(48.5 / 2)
= 15.3cm 4
Ac 2618
2dx 3 xd 3
Jc = (2x + y )dx 1 +
2
3 6
2(17)(48.5)3 48.5(17)3
Jc = (2(48.5) + 57)17(15.3) +
2
3 6
J c = 722000cm 4
Solution
l
V u = w u l 2 1 xy
2
6.0
V u = 15 5.5( ) 0.485(0.57) = 243.3kN
2
Solution
bo = 2x+y=2(48.5)+57=154cm
2 2
v C = 0.17 1 + f c ' = 0.17 1 + 25 = 2.55MPa
c (40 / 40)
v C = 0.33 f c ' = 0.33 25 = 1.65MPa < v u = 2.1 MP Not Good
s d 30(170)
v C = 0.083
0 083 2 + c
f ' = 0
0.083
083 2 + 25 = 2.7
2 7 MPa
bo 1540
Lecture 7
Load transfer in two way slabs
Design Moment for Columns for DDM
ACI 13.6.9.2
The moment is distributed to the columns above and below the slab in
proportion
i to their
h i flexural
fl l stiffnesses.
iff
4EI
K c1 =
lc
K c1
M u1 = Mu
c1
K + K c2
ACI 13.5.3.2
c2
This is a typo in the
book It is 1.5
book. 1 5 h in the
code.
Vu Mv x1
vu = +
Ac Jc
x1 =
yA
Ac
Shear Stressess due to the Unbalanced Moment Mv
b 1 = c1 + d
b1
+ db 2b1
2db1
x1 =
yA
= 2
Ac 2db1 + 2db 2
b1 (db1 + db 2 ) b1
= =
2(db1 + db 2 ) 2
Shear Stressess due to the Unbalanced Moment Mv
b1 = c1 + d/2
b1
2db1
x1 =
yA
= 2
Ac 2db1 + db 2
x1 =
yA
=
Ac
b1 = c1 + d/2
Example
For the flat plate shown in the figure, check the slab for moment and shear transfer
at the exterior column indicated. From DDM calculations, the column strip (width
= 1375mm) carries a moment of 78 kN.m, and is reinforced with 520. The slab
thickness is 20 cm (d = 17cm).
17cm) Ultimate distributed load over the slab = 15
kN/m2. All columns are 40 cm square. Use fy = 420 kN/m2. and fc=25 kN/m2.
5.5 m
5.5 m
6.0 m 6.0 m
Solution
22- The additional bars need to be designed for the moment Mf:
d 17
b1 = c + = 40 + = 48.5cm
2 2
b2 = c + d = 40 + 17 = 57cm
1 1
= = = 0.62
2 b1 2 48.5
1+ 1+
3 b2 3 57
M f = f M u = 0.62(78) = 48.4kN .m
Solution
3- Add two 20 bars in the 100 cm width considered and check to see
y To resist the 48.4 kN.m
whether the moment transfer situation is satisfactory.
moment, we now have the two bars just added in addition to three bars from
the column strip design (520 bars in total, As = 1570 cm2).
As f y 1570(420)
a= = = 31mm
0.85(25)(1000)
0.85 f c b
a
M n = As f y (d )
2
31
M n = 0.9(1570)(420)(170 ) = 91.7 kN .m > 48.4kN .m OK
2
Column strip
p
1000 mm
1375 mm
Solution
B- Check the combined shear stress at the exterior column due to shear and
moment transfer:
1- Nominal moment strength of the full column strip with 720 bars:
As f y 2198(420)
a= = = 31.6mm
0 85f c b
0.85 0 85(25)(1375)
0.85(25)(1375)
a
M n = A s f y (d )
2
31.6
M n = (2198)(420)(170 ) = 142kN .m
2
M v = (1 f ) M n = (1 0.62)(142) = 54.2kN .m
Solution
d 17
x = b1 = c + = 40 + = 48.5cm
2 2
y = b 2 = c + d = 40 + 17 = 57cm
Ac = d (2x + y ) = 17(2(48.5) + 57) = 2618cm 2
x1 =
yA
=
2(48.5)(17)(48.5
2(48 5)(17)(48 5 / 2)
= 15.3cm 4
Ac 2618
2dx 3 xd 3
Jc = (2x + y )dx 1 +
2
3 6
2(17)(48.5)3 48.5(17)3
Jc = (2(48.5) + 57)17(15.3) +
2
3 6
J c = 722000cm 4
Solution
l
V u = w u l 2 1 xy
2
6.0
V u = 15 5.5( ) 0.485(0.57) = 243.3kN
2
Vu Mv x1
vu = +
Ac Jc
3 103 54.2
243.3
243 54 2 106 (153)
vu = +
2618 10 2
722000 104
v u = 2.1MPa
Solution
bo = 2x+y
2x+y=2(48
2(48.5)+57
5)+57=154cm
154cm
2 2
v C = 0.17 1 + f c ' = 0.17 1 + 25 = 2.55MPa
c (40 / 40)
v C = 0.33 f c ' = 0.33 25 = 1.65MPa < v u = 2.1 MP Not Good
s d 30(170)
30(170)
v C = 0.083 2 + c
f ' = 0.083 2 + 25 = 2.7 MPa
bo 1540
Lecture 8
Analysis of column cross sections using
strain compatibility
Strain-compatibility
p y
P P
M M
Strain-compatibility
p y
Every
Every pair of moment M and axial load P values causes a unique strain
distribution over a reinforced concrete section.
The
h section
i fails
f il if the
h strain
i in
i the
h extreme concrete fiber
fib reaches
h 0.003.
0 003
The
The compression zone is assumed to have a uniform stress of 0.85fc over
a depth of a=1c.
0.003
d c a Cc
s Cs
C
A
As
h
As fs
s
b
Strain Stress
The strain in the steel may exceed the yield strain but the stress takes a
maximum value of fy.
Knowing the strain distribution, one can back calculate the P and M
values that caused this strain distribution.
0.003
d c a Cc
s Cs
C
A
As
h
As fs
s
b
Strain Stress
1- Determine
1 D t i the
th P andd M values
l that
th t cause a known
k strain
t i distribution
di t ib ti att failure.
f il
A strain distribution at failure can be defined by knowing the strain in the steel or
the depth
p of the neutral axis. For each value of strain or NA,, a ppair or P and M
exists.
2 Determine
2- D t i the
th value
l off M att failure
f il if a known
k value
l off P is
i applied
li d
- Special cases: If P=0
* Use the singly
g y reinforced analysis
y if the section is singly
g y reinforced.
* Use the doubly reinforced analysis if the section is doubly reinforced.
3 Determine
3- D t i the
th value
l off P att failure
f il if a known
k value
l off M is
i applied
li d
- Special case:
If M=0 useuse thee axial load
o d ccapacity
p c y equ
equation
o for
o thee co
column
u section.
sec o .
Strain-compatibility
p y
Example 1
For the column cross section shown in the figure, determine the nominal axial
force Pn and nominal bending moment Mn that produce the strain distribution at
failure shown. The material properties are: fy = 420 MPa, and fc' = 25 MPa.
0.003 0.85fc
60 Cs
s f s
Mn
a
420 Cc
c
00.5 m
Pn
420
60 s =0.001 fs T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
1- Find the depth of the neutral axis:
d = 500 60 = 440mm
c 440-c
=
0.003 0.001
0.001c = 440(0.003) 0.003(c )
c (0.001 + 0.003) = 440(0.003)
440(0.003)
c= = 330mm
0.001 + 0.003
a = 1 c = 0.85(330) = 281mm
0.003 0.85fc
60 Cs
s f s
Mn
a
420 Cc
c
00.5 m
Pn
420
60 s =0.001 fs T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
2- Find the strain and stress in the steel:
s' 00.003
003
=
c d' c
c d' 330 60 fy 420
s' = 0
0.003
003 = 0
0.003
003 = 0
0.002455
002455 > = = = 0.0021
0 0021
E s 2 10 5
y
c 330
f s ' = f y = 420MPa
0.003 0.85fc
60 Cs
s f s
Mn
a
420 Cc
c
00.5 m
Pn
420
60 s =0.001 fs T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
0.003 0.85fc
60 Cs
s f s
Mn
a
420 Cc
c
00.5 m
Pn
420
60 s =0.001 fs T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
4- Find Pn and M n :
F = 0 P n +T C c C s ' = 0
Pn = C c + C s ' T = 1788 + 501 251 = 2038 kN
h a h h
M = 0 M n = C c
2 2
+ C '
s
2
d '
+ T
d
2
0.5 281
0 5 00.281 0.5
05 0 5
0.5
= 1788 + 501 0.06 + 251 0.44 = 352 kN .m
2 2 2 2
0.003 0.85fc
60 Cs
s f s
Mn
a
420 Cc
c
00.5 m
Pn
420
60 s =0.001 fs T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Determine the P and M values that cause a known strain
distribution at failure
Example 2
For the column cross section shown in the figure, determine the nominal axial
force Pn and nominal bending moment Mn that produce the strain distribution at
failure shown, where the tension steel yields and the concrete crushes
simultaneously (balance failure). The material properties are: fy = 420 MPa, and
fc' = 25 MPa.
MPa
0.003 0.85fc
60 s Cs
f s
a
C
420 Mn
Cc
00.5 m
Pn
420
60 y =0.0021 fy T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
1- Find the depth of the neutral axis:
d = 500 60 = 440mm
c 440-c
=
0.003 0.0021
0.0021c = 440(0.003) 0.003(c )
c (0.0021 + 0.003) = 440(0.003)
440(0.003)
c= = 259mm
0.0021 + 0.003
a = 1 c = 0.85(259) = 220mm
0.003 0.85fc
60 s Cs
f s
a
C
420 Mn
Cc
00.5 m
Pn
420
60 y =0.0021 fy T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
2- Find the strain and stress in the steel:
s' 0 003
0.003
=
c d' c
c dd' 259 60 fy 420
s' = 0
0.003
003 = 0
0.003
003 = 0
0.0023
0023 > = = = 0.0021
0 0021
E s 2 10 5
y
c 259
f s ' = f y = 420 MPa
s = y = 0.0021 f s = f y = 420MPa
0.003 0.85fc
60 s Cs
f s
a
C
420 Mn
Cc
00.5 m
Pn
420
60 y =0.0021 fy T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
0.003 0.85fc
60 s Cs
f s
a
C
420 Mn
Cc
00.5 m
Pn
420
60 y =0.0021 fy T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
4- Find Pn and M n :
F = 0 P n +T C c C s ' = 0
Pn = C c + C s ' T = 1403 + 501 528 = 1376 kN
h a h h
M = 0 M n = C c
2 2
+ C '
s
2
d '
+ T
d
2
0.5 0 22
0 5 0.22 0.5
05 0 5
0.5
= 1403 + 501 0.06 + 528 0.44 = 407 kN .m
2 2 2 2
0.003 0.85fc
60 s Cs
f s
a
C
420 Mn
Cc
00.5 m
Pn
420
60 y =0.0021 fy T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Determine the value of M at failure if a known value of P is
applied for a general section
Example 3
For the column cross section shown in the figure, determine using strain
compatibility the nominal bending moment Mn if there is no axial load acting on
the section
section. The material properties are: fy = 420 MPa,
MPa and fc' = 25 MPa.
MPa
0.003 0.85fc
60 s Cs
f s
a
C
420 Mn
Cc
00.5 m
420
60 s fs T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
1- Prepare equations for strain, stress and force in terms of c:
Tension steel
d c
s = 0.003
0 003
c
f s = min(f y , s E s )
T = f s As
0.003 0.85fc
60 s Cs
f s
a
C
420 Mn
Cc
00.5 m
420
60 s fs T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
1- Prepare equations for strain, stress and force in terms of c:
Compression steel
c d'
s' = 0.003
c
f s = min(f y , s E s )
C s = f sA s
Concrete
Cc = 0.85f c ' ab = 0.85f c ' 1cb = 0.85 ( 25 ) 0.85 ( 300 ) c
0.003 0.85fc
60 s Cs
f s
a
C
420 Mn
Cc
00.5 m
420
60 s fs T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
2- Try a value of c:
T c=100mm
Try 100
d c 440 100
s = 0.003 = 0.003=0.0102
c 100
f s = min(f y , s E s ) = min(420, 0.0102 2 105 = 2040) = 420MPa
T = f s A s = 420 1257 = 528kN
c d' 100 60
s ' = 0.003 = 0.003=0.0012
c 100
f s = min(f y , s E s ) = min(420, 0.0012 2 105 ) = 240MPa
C s = f sA s = 240 1257 = 302kN
Cc = 0.85f c ' ab = 0.85f c ' 1cb = 0.85 ( 25 ) 0.85 ( 300 )100 = 542kN
Solution
3- Check equlibrium:
F =T C c C s = 528 302 542 = 316kN P = 0
Must increase T must increase s reduce c
Try c=80 mm and repeat.....
0.003 0.85fc
60 s Cs
f s
a
C
420 Mn
Cc
00.5 m
420
60 s fs T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
c=72.9mm
a = 1 c = 0.85(72.9)
0 85(72 9) = 62mm
Solution
4 Calculate
4- C l l t Mn :
a
M = 0 M n = C c
d
2
+ C s ' (d d ' )
0.062
= 395 0.44 + 133 ( 0.44 0.6 ) = 212 kN .m
2
0.003 0.85fc
60 s Cs
f s
a
C
420 Mn
Cc
00.5 m
420
60 s fy T
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Determine the value of P at failure if M = 0 for a g
general section.
Example 4
For the column cross section shown in the figure, determine using strain
compatibility the nominal axial load Pn if there is no bending moment acting on
the section
section. The material properties are: fy = 420 MPa,
MPa and fc' = 25 MPa.
MPa
0.003 0.85fc
60 Cs
420 fy
00.5 m
Pn
Cc
420
60 Cs
fy
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
Pn = 0.85f c '(A g A st ) + f y A st
0 85 ( 25 ) [300 500 2513] + 420 ( 2513)
Pn = 0.85
Pn = 4190 kN
0.003 0.85fc
60 Cs
420 fy
00.5 m
Pn
Cc
420
60 Cs
fy
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Reinforced Concrete Design II
Lecture 9
Design of short columns subjected to
axial load and bending
Part I
Introduction
i
P P
M M
(1)
End restraints resulting from monolithic
action between floor beams and columns.
Moments due to gravity loads.
(2)
(3)
Moments due to lateral loading such as wind
or earthquake loads.
(5)
Moments due to eccentricity in asymmetry in
column cross section.
Pure axial load Pure moment Large moment Large axial load
relative to axial relative to
load moment
Eccentricity: is the distance in
the column from the load to the
plastic centroid of the column.
The plastic centroid is the location of the resultant force produced by the steel and the
co c ete.
concrete.
It is the point in the column cross section through which the resultant load must pass to
pproduce uniform strain at failure.
If the applied load does not pass through the plastic centroid, it will create bending as
well as compression. The moment created will be equal to the product of the axial force
times the distance between the force and the plastic centroid.
For locating the plastic centroid, all concrete is assumed to be stressed in compression to
0.85fc and all steel to fy.
Z =
zF Cs2
Z
Pn
Example
Locate the plastic centroid of the cross section.
The material properties are: fy = 420 MPa, and fc' = 25 MPa.
Solution
1- Calculate the compression
p forces:
C c = 0.85f cbh = 0.85(25)(300)(900) = 5737kN
C s 1 = A s 1 (f y 0.85f c) = 1500(420 0.85(25)) = 598kN
C s 2 = A s 2 (f y 0.85f c) = 400(420 0.85(25)) = 160kN
Pn = C c + C s 1 + C s 2 = 5373 + 598 + 160 = 6495kN
0 003
0.003 0 85fc
0.85f
50 Cs2
fy
400 mm2
0.9 m
Cc
Pn
1500 mm2 fy Cs1 Z
50
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
Z =
zF
=
5737(900 / 2) + 598(50) + 160(900 50)
= 423mm
Pn 6495
0 003
0.003 0 85fc
0.85f
50 Cs2
fy
400 mm2
0.9 m
Cc
Pn
1500 mm2 fy Cs1 Z
50
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Bending moments in columns
No column can carry only axial load and be completely free of moment.
moment
At exterior
t i joints,
j i t beams
b frame
f into
i t one side
id off a column
l only;
l therefore,
th f the
th total
t t l beam
b
moment is applied to the column framing into the joint. As a result, exterior columns
must be designed for higher moments and lower axial loads than interior columns.
R i f
Reinforcement
t iin columns
l
At any level, the axial load in a column is approximately proportional to the number of
floors that lie above the column; therefore, columns in the upper stories, carrying the
lightest axial loads, can be smaller in cross section or more lightly reinforced than those
i the
in th lower
l stories.
t i
Often, the cross section of a column is held constant throughout the height of a building
to simplify formwork,
formwork and the percentage of reinforcement and the strength of the
concrete is increased in the lower floors.
A sway (un-braced)
( b d) frame:
f i a structurall frame
is f that
h isi not attached
h d to an
effective bracing element, but depends on the bending stiffness of the columns
and girders to provide resistance to the lateral displacement.
displacement
o = 0.8cm
3m
S l i
Solution:
Q=
Pu o
=
((200 + 300 + 180)0.8
)
= 0.07
0 07
V u lc (8 + 12 + 6)300
A short column will exhibit very small bending deformations because of its large
bending stiffness. The resulting secondary moment will be very small and can be
neglected.
If the secondary moment is less than %5 of the primary moment, the column is
classified as short.
If a column is slender, it will fail by buckling into the shape shown in the figure when the
load reaches the Euler buckling load Pc. The smallest load that produces buckling in a pin-
ended column is
Buckling of perfect columns
Columns are categorized into short or slender (long) according to their slenderness ratio:
Part II
C
Classification
ifi i off short and slender columns
In such cases, the buckling equation can still be used if the length is substituted
by the effective length of the column. The effective length is some proportion of
the actual column.
The ends of real columns are neither hinged nor fixed. Girders provide some
resistance to the rotation of the column. The end restraint lies between the
hinged and fixed conditions. The actual k value can be estimated from the
Jackson and Moreland alignment charts.
ACI 10.10.1
K Factor calculatoin
=
E c I c / Lc
E g I g / Lg
ACI 10.10.4.1
K Factor calculatoin
S i l end
Special d conditions:
diti
if end is pinned =
if end is fixed = 0
K Factor calculatoin
ACI 10.10.1
Alignment Charts
K Factor calculatoin
S i l end
Special d conditions:
diti
ACI 10.10.6.3
F columns
For l iin nonsway frames,
f the
h effective
ff i length
l h factor
f k is
i permitted
i d to
be taken as 1.0.
Note:
According to the above, you may start your analysis of a column in a
nonsway frame by assuming k = 1.0. If the column is found to be long, you
should find k from the alignment chart.
(Th column
(The l is
i short
h t if):
if)
ACI 10.10.2
M1 M1
>0 <0
M2 M2
Column Design
Neglect
g k lu M
k lu 34 12 1 40
22 Slenderness
r r M2
[ Short ]
Moment
k lu k lu M
22 < 100 magnification 100 > > 34 12 1 .
r [ long ] r M2
Exact P
k lu k lu
> 100 analysis > 100
r [ long ]
r
Example
p
The frame shown in the figure consists of members with rectangular cross sections,
made of the same concrete.
concrete Considering buckling in the plane of the figure,
figure categorize
column bc as long or short if the frame is:
a)Nonsway
) y
b)Sway
270 kN.m 0.6x0.3
e
c
d
00.3x0.35
44.0 m
0.6x0.3
b
400 kN.m
0.3x00.4
4.5 m
9.0 m 7.5 m
S l ti
Solution
a- Nonsway
For a column to be short,
k lu M
34 12 1 40
r M2
lu = 4-0.3-0.3=3.40 m
k is
i conservatively
i l taken
k as 1.0
10
270 kN.m
k lu 1(3.4)
= = 32.38
r 00.3(0.35)
3(0 35)
M1 270
34 12 = 34 12 = 42.1 > 40 Use 40
M2 400
400 kN.m
kN
kl
u = 32.38 < 40
r Double curvature
The column is classified as beingg short
12
(0.3)(0.6)3
I dc = 0.35 = 0.00189m
4
12
(0.3)(0.6)3
I ce = 0.35 = 0.00189m
4
12
0.00075
C =
E c c I / Lc
= 4 = 0.406
E g I g / Lg 0.00189 0.00189
+
9 7.5
0 00075 00.0112
0.00075 0112
+
b =
E c c I / Lc
= 4 4.5 = 0.945
E g I g / Lg 0.00189 0.00189
+
9 7.5
Solution
Solution
Part III
Interaction
i diagrams
i
Interaction diagrams
60
420
From the examples of lecture 8,
8 the
0.5 m
shown cross section was found to fail
420
in the conditions and under the applied
60
Pn andd Mn pairs
i shown
h in
i the
th table:
t bl
0.30m
s =0.001 y =0.0021 s
Pn (kN) 2038 1376 0 4190
Mn (kN.m) 352 407 212 0
Interaction diagrams
60
420
0.5 m
Case 1: The section failed (the strain 420
in the concrete reached 0.003) when 60
the strain in the steel reached 0.001.
0.30m
Case 2: The section failed (the strain in the concrete reached 0.003)
0 003) when the
strain in the steel reached the yield strain. In other words, the concrete and
steel failed simultaneously. This condition is called balance failure. The
corresponding loads are called balance axial load Pb and balance moment Mb.
Case 3: No axial load is applied to the section. The section failed when the
strain in the concrete reached 0.003. The strain in the steel was unknown.
Interaction diagrams
60
420
0.5 m
The pairs
Th i off momentt andd axial
i l load
l d
found for the section can be plot 420
together. The obtained curve is called 60
the interaction diagram of the section.
0.30m
Fail region
(0,4190)
(352, 2038)
Case 4
Case 2
Pn Case 1
(407, 1376)
Safe region
(212 0)
(212,
Mn Case 3
Interaction diagrams
60
0.5 m
moment that produce failure of the 420
given section. 60
Any combination of Pn and Mn outside 0.30m
the envelope will cause failure and
inside will not.
Fail region
(0,4190)
(352, 2038)
Case 4
Case 2
Pn Case 1
(407, 1376)
Safe region
(212 0)
(212,
Mn Case 3
Interaction diagrams
60
0.5 m
ultimate value, a straight line starting from 420
the origin with slope Pn/Mn = 1/e is 60
obtained.
b i d This hi line
li shows
h all
ll combinations
bi i
0.30m
of P and M for this eccentricity.
(0,4190) ((Mn, Pn )
(352, 2038)
Pn
Pn 1 (407, 1376)
=
Mn e
(212 0)
(212,
Mn
Interaction diagrams
60
0.5 m
eccentricity of the load is less than the 420
balance failure eccentricity, eb, produces a 60
f il
failure that
h initiates
i ii by
b crushing
hi off the
h
0.30m
concrete on the compression side of the
member.
A ((Mn, Pn )
D
Pn
Pn 1 B
=
Mn e
C
Mn
Interaction diagrams
60
0.5 m
eccentricity of the load is larger than the 420
balance failure eccentricity, eb, produces a 60
f il
failure that
h initiates
i ii by
b yielding
i ldi off steell before
b f
0.30m
the crushing of the concrete on the
compression side of the member (beam
behavior).
A ((Mn, Pn )
D
Pn
Pn 1 B
=
Mn e
C
Mn
Interaction diagrams
Between B and
B dCC: Moment
M carrying
i capacity
i increases
i with
i h increasing
i i
axial load.
A ((Mn, Pn )
D
Pn
Pn 1 B
=
Mn e
C
Mn
Interaction diagrams
A ((Mn, Pn )
D
Pn
Pn 1 B
=
Mn e
C
Mn
Interaction diagrams
shown
825
820
820 bars
825
Pn 820
Mn
Design interaction diagrams
Tied columns:
Pn = r A g ( 0.85f c) + A st ( f y 0.85f c)
r = 0.80
= 0.65
0 65Po
0.65 = 0.65
0 65
0.52Po
0.65Mo
0
r = 0.85
= 0.75
= 0.75
0.65
420 MPa
Pn = r A g ( 0.85f c) + A st ( f y 0.85f c)
This equation takes into account the limited amount of eccentricity by the factor r.
e
0.1
01
h
1 MPa = 10 kg/cm2
1 ksi = 7 MPa
Part IV
Design
i off short columns subject
j to axial
i
loads and bending moment
Design
g pprocedure
1- Assume a cross section of the column. You may use (Ag = Pu/0.5fc).
2- Calculate e = Mu/Pu. If e/h < 0.1 for tied e/h < 0.05 for spiral, the column may be
designed as concentrically loaded (like in Design I). Otherwise continue.
3 Select
3- S l t th
the material
t i l properties l l t .
ti andd calculate
4- Determine the appropriate design interaction diagram. If a chart with the exact
value of is not found, interpolate between the reinforcement ratios found from the
charts for the nearest values of .
5- Calculate Pu/Ag.
6- Calculate Mu/Agh.
7- Read g from the interaction diagram.
If g < 0.01
0 01 use g =0.01
0 01 or reduce
d th
the size
i off the
th column
l andd repeatt from
f partt 2.
2
If g > 0.08 increase the size of the column and repeat from part 2.
Design the reinforcement for a 400 mm x 500 mm tied column. The column,
which is part of a braced frame, has an unsupported length of 3.0 m. It is
subjected to a factored axial load of 2400 kN in addition to the factored bending
moments as shown. The material properties are: fy = 420 MPa, and fc' = 30 MPa.
Solution
2400
500KN m
500KN.m
lu = 3.0
30m
k is conservatively taken as 1.0
k lu 1(3 0)
1(3.0)
= = 20.0
r 0.3(0.5)
M1 500 500KN.m
34 12 = 34 12 = 22.0 < 40.0
M2 500
k lu 2400
= 20.0 < 22.0 column is classified as being short
r
Solution
M u 500(103 )
e= = = 208mm
Pu 2400
e 208
= = 0.42
0 42 > 0.1
0 1 Cannot use the concentrically loaded column design equation
h 500
Assuming 30 mm bars
500 2(40) 2(10) 30
= = 0.74
500
Pn Pu 2400(103 )
= = = 12 MPa = 120kg / cm 2
Ag bh 400(500)
M n Mu 500(106 )
= = = 5 MPa = 50 kg / cm 2
Ag h b h 2 400(5002 )
Solution
Example
Solution
Example 2
Example 2
Example 2
Example 2
Lecture 9
Design of short columns subjected to
axial load and bending
Part I
Introduction
i
P P
M M
(1)
End restraints resulting from monolithic
action between floor beams and columns.
Moments due to gravity loads.
(2)
(3)
Moments due to lateral loading such as wind
or earthquake loads.
(5)
Moments due to eccentricity in asymmetry in
column cross section.
Pure axial load Pure moment Large moment Large axial load
relative to axial relative to
load moment
Eccentricity: is the distance in
the column from the load to the
plastic centroid of the column.
The plastic centroid is the location of the resultant force produced by the steel and the
co c ete.
concrete.
It is the point in the column cross section through which the resultant load must pass to
pproduce uniform strain at failure.
If the applied load does not pass through the plastic centroid, it will create bending as
well as compression. The moment created will be equal to the product of the axial force
times the distance between the force and the plastic centroid.
For locating the plastic centroid, all concrete is assumed to be stressed in compression to
0.85fc and all steel to fy.
Z =
zF Cs2
Z
Pn
Example
Locate the plastic centroid of the cross section.
The material properties are: fy = 420 MPa, and fc' = 25 MPa.
Solution
1- Calculate the compression
p forces:
C c = 0.85f cbh = 0.85(25)(300)(900) = 5737kN
C s 1 = A s 1 (f y 0.85f c) = 1500(420 0.85(25)) = 598kN
C s 1 = A s 2 (f y 0.85f c) = 400(420 0.85(25)) = 160kN
Pn = C c + C s 1 + C s 2 = 5373 + 598 + 159.5 = 6495kN
0 003
0.003 0.85fc
50 Cs1
fy
400 mm2
0.9 m
Cc
Pn
1500 mm2 fy Cs2 Z
50
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Solution
Z =
zF
=
5737(900 / 2) + 598(50) + 160(900 50)
= 423mm
Pn 6495
0 003
0.003 0.85fc
50 Cs1
fy
400 mm2
0.9 m
Cc
Pn
1500 mm2 fy Cs2 Z
50
0.30m
Strain Stress Force
Cross section distribution distribution distribution
Bending moments in columns
No column can carry only axial load and be completely free of moment.
moment
At exterior
t i joints,
j i t beams
b frame
f into
i t one side
id off a column
l only;
l therefore,
th f the
th total
t t l beam
b
moment is applied to the column framing into the joint. As a result, exterior columns
must be designed for higher moments and lower axial loads than interior columns.
R i f
Reinforcement
t iin columns
l
At any level, the axial load in a column is approximately proportional to the number of
floors that lie above the column; therefore, columns in the upper stories, carrying the
lightest axial loads, can be smaller in cross section or more lightly reinforced than those
i the
in th lower
l stories.
t i
Often, the cross section of a column is held constant throughout the height of a building
to simplify formwork,
formwork and the percentage of reinforcement and the strength of the
concrete is increased in the lower floors.
A sway (un-braced)
( b d) frame:
f i a structurall frame
is f that
h isi not attached
h d to an
effective bracing element, but depends on the bending stiffness of the columns
and girders to provide resistance to the lateral displacement.
displacement
o = 0.8cm
3m
S l i
Solution:
Q=
Pu o
=
((200 + 300 + 180)0.8
)
= 0.07
0 07
V u lc (8 + 12 + 6)300
A short column will exhibit very small bending deformations because of its large
bending stiffness. The resulting secondary moment will be very small and can be
neglected.
If the secondary moment is less than %5 of the primary moment, the column is
classified as short.
If a column is slender, it will fail by buckling into the shape shown in the figure when the
load reaches the Euler buckling load Pc. The smallest load that produces buckling in a pin-
ended column is
Buckling of perfect columns
Columns are categorized into short or slender (long) according to their slenderness ratio:
Part II
C
Classification
ifi i off short and slender columns
In such cases, the buckling equation can still be used if the length is substituted
by the effective length of the column. The effective length is some proportion of
the actual column.
The ends of real columns are neither hinged nor fixed. Girders provide some
resistance to the rotation of the column. The end restraint lies between the
hinged and fixed conditions. The actual k value can be estimated from the
Jackson and Moreland alignment charts.
ACI 10.10.1
K Factor calculatoin
=
E c I c / Lc
E g I g / Lg
ACI 10.10.4.1
K Factor calculatoin
S i l end
Special d conditions:
diti
if end is pinned =
if end is fixed = 0
K Factor calculatoin
ACI 10.10.1
Alignment Charts
K Factor calculatoin
S i l end
Special d conditions:
diti
ACI 10.10.6.3
F columns
For l iin nonsway frames,
f the
h effective
ff i length
l h factor
f k is
i permitted
i d to
be taken as 1.0.
Note:
According to the above, you may start your analysis of a column in a
nonsway frame by assuming k = 1.0. If the column is found to be long, you
should find k from alignment chart.
(Th column
(The l is
i short
h t if):
if)
ACI 10.10.2
M1 M1
>0 <0
M2 M2
Column Design
Neglect
g k lu M
k lu 34 12 1 40
22 Slenderness
r r M2
[ Short ]
Moment
k lu k lu M
22 < 100 magnification 100 > > 34 12 1 .
r [ long ] r M2
Exact P
k lu k lu
> 100 analysis > 100
r [ long ]
r
Example
p
The frame shown in the figure consists of members with rectangular cross sections,
made of the same concrete.
concrete Considering buckling in the plane of the figure,
figure categorize
column bc as long or short if the frame is:
a)Nonsway
) y
b)Sway
270 kN.m 0.6x0.3
e
d
00.3x0.35
44.0 m
0.6x0.3
400 kN.m
0.3x00.4
4.5 m
9.0 m 7.5 m
S l ti
Solution
a- Nonsway
For a column to be short,
k lu M
34 12 1 40
r M2
Lu = 4-0.3-0.3=3.40 m
k is
i conservatively
i l taken
k as 1.0
10
270 kN.m
k lu 1(3.4)
= = 32.38
r 00.3(0.35)
3(0 35)
M1 270
34 12 = 34 12 = 42.1 > 40 k = 40
M2 400
400 kN.m
kN
kl
u = 32.38 < 40
r Double curvature
The column is classified as beingg short
12
(0.3)(0.6)3
I dc = 0.35 = 0.00189m
4
12
(0.3)(0.6)3
I ce = 0.35 = 0.00189m
4
12
0.00075
C =
E c c I / Lc
= 4 = 0.406
E g I g / Lg 0.00189 0.00189
+
9 7.5
0 00075 00.0112
0.00075 0112
+
b =
E c c I / Lc
= 4 4.5 = 0.945
E g I g / Lg 0.00189 0.00189
+
9 7.5
Solution
Solution
Part III
Interaction
i diagrams
i
Interaction diagrams
60
420
0.5 m
From examples of lecture 8, the shown
cross section was found to fail in the 420
conditions and under the applied
pp Pn 60
and Mn pairs shown in the table: 0.30m
s =0.001 y =0.0021 s
Pn (kN) 2038 1376 0 4190
Mn (kN.m) 352 407 212 0
Interaction diagrams
60
420
0.5 m
Case 1: The section failed (the strain 420
in the concrete reached 0.003) when 60
the strain in the steel reached 0.001.
0.30m
Case 2: The section failed (the strain in the concrete reached 0.003)
0 003) when the
strain in the steel reached the yield strain. In other words, the concrete and
steel failed simultaneously. This condition is called balance failure. The
corresponding loads are called balance axial load Pb and balance moment Mb.
Case 3: No axial load is applied to the section. The section failed when the
strain in the concrete reached 0.003. The strain in the steel was unknown.
Interaction diagrams
60
420
0.5 m
The pairs
Th i off momentt andd axial
i l load
l d
found for the section can be plot 420
together. The obtained curve is called 60
the interaction diagram of the section.
0.30m
Fail region
(0,4190)
(352, 2038)
Case 4
Case 2
Pn Case 1
(407, 1376)
Safe region
(212 0)
(212,
Mn Case 3
Interaction diagrams
60
0.5 m
moment that produce failure of the 420
given section. 60
Any combination of Pn and Mn outside 0.30m
the envelope will cause failure and
inside will not.
Fail region
(0,4190)
(352, 2038)
Case 4
Case 2
Pn Case 1
(407, 1376)
Safe region
(212 0)
(212,
Mn Case 3
Interaction diagrams
60
0.5 m
ultimate value, a straight line starting from 420
the origin with slope Pn/Mn = 1/e is 60
obtained.
b i d This hi line
li shows
h all
ll combinations
bi i
0.30m
of P and M for this eccentricity.
(0,4190) ((Mn, Pn )
(352, 2038)
Pn
Pn 1 (407, 1376)
=
Mn e
(212 0)
(212,
Mn
Interaction diagrams
60
0.5 m
eccentricity of the load is less than the 420
balance failure eb, produces a failure that 60
i ii
initiates by
b crushing
hi off the
h concrete on theh
0.30m
compression side of the member.
A ((Mn, Pn )
D
Pn
Pn 1 B
=
Mn e
C
Mn
Interaction diagrams
60
0.5 m
eccentricity of the load is larger than the 420
balance failure eb, produces a failure that 60
i ii
initiates by
b yielding
i ldi off steell before
b f the
h
0.30m
crushing of the concrete on the compression
side of the member (beam behavior).
A ((Mn, Pn )
D
Pn
Pn 1 B
=
Mn e
C
Mn
Interaction diagrams
Between B and
B dCC: Moment
M carrying
i capacity
i increases
i with
i h increasing
i i
axial load.
A ((Mn, Pn )
D
Pn
Pn 1 B
=
Mn e
C
Mn
Interaction diagrams
A ((Mn, Pn )
D
Pn
Pn 1 B
=
Mn e
C
Mn
Interaction diagrams
shown
825
820
820 bars
825
Pn 820
Mn
Design interaction diagrams
Tied columns:
Pn = r A g ( 0.85f c) + A st ( f y 0.85f c)
r = 0.80
= 0.65
0 65Po
0.65 = 0.65
0 65
0.52Po
0.65Mo
0
r = 0.85
= 0.75
= 0.75
0.65
420 MPa
Pn = r A g ( 0.85f c) + A st ( f y 0.85f c)
This equation takes into account the limited amount of eccentricity by the factor r.
e
0.1
01
h
Design
g pprocedure
1- Assume a cross section of the column. You may use (Ag = Pu/0.5fc).
2- Calculate e = Mu/Pu. If e/h < 0.1 for tied e/h < 0.05 for spiral, The column may be
designed as concentrically loaded (like in Design I). Otherwise continue.
3 Select
3- S l t th
the material
t i l properties l l t . If an exactt
ti andd calculate
4- Determine the appropriate design interaction diagram. If a chart with the exact
value of is not found, interpolate between the reinforcement ratios found from the
charts for the nearest values of .
5- Calculate Pu/Ag.
6- Calculate Mu/Agh.
7- Read g from the interaction diagram.
If g < 0.01
0 01 use g =0.01
0 01 or reduce
d th
the size
i off the
th column
l andd repeatt from
f partt 2.
2
If g > 0.08 increase the size of the column and repeat from part 2.
Design reinforcement for a 400 mm x 500 mm tied column. The column, which
is part of a braced frame, has an unsupported length of 3.0 m. It is subjected to a
factored axial load of 2400 kN in addition to a factored bending moment as
shown. The material properties are: fy = 420 MPa, and fc' = 30 MPa.
Solution
2400
500KN m
500KN.m
Lu = 3.0
30m
k is conservatively taken as 1.0
k lu 1(3 0)
1(3.0)
= = 20.0
r 0.3(0.5)
M1 500 500KN.m
34 12 = 34 12 = 22.0 < 40.0
M2 500
k lu 2400
= 20.0 < 22.0 column is classified as being short
r
Solution
Pu 500(103 )
e= = = 208mm
Mu 2400
e
= 0.42
0 42 > 0.1
0 1 Cannot use the concentrically loaded column design equation
h
Assuming 30 mm bars
500 2(40) 2(10) 30
= = 0.74
500
Pn Pu 2400(103 )
= = = 12 MPa = 120kg / cm 2
Ag bh 400(500)
M n Mu 500(106 )
= = = 5 MPa = 50 kg / cm 2
Ag h b h 2 400(5002 )
Solution
Example
Solution
Example 2
Example 2
Example 2
Example 2
Lecture 10
Design of slender columns
PART I: Non-sway frames
Primaryy v.s. secondary
y moments
One needs to find in order to determine the secondary moment and hence the
t t l design
total d i moment. t
Moment magnification
g method
k lu
< 100
r
Moment magnification
g method
Moment magnification
g method
E i l t momentt correction
Equivalent ti
If a bbeam-column
l in
i a non-sway
frame is loaded by unequal end
moments without transverse loads,
moments, loads
the maximum design moment will
occur either at one of the column
ends when the secondary moment
is small or between the two ends
when
h th the secondary
d momentt is
i
large, as shown in the figure.
E i l t momentt correction
Equivalent ti
ACI 10.10.6
10 10 6
M max = ns M 2 ns M 2,min
where
M2 = columns larger-end moment
ns = moment magnification factor for non-sway frame, given
by Cm
ns = 1.0
Pu
1
0.75Pc
2 EI
Pc = ACI 10.10.6
( klu )
2
M1 M1
>0 <0
M2 M2
Single
g curvature Double curvature
E
Example
l
Design
g a longg column in a non-swayy frame with an unsupported
pp
height of 7.0 m and a cross section of 50x50 cm that carries a service
dead load of 500 kN, a service live load of 400 kN and ultimate end
moments as shown
h bbelow.
l The
h material i are: fy = 420 MPa,
i l properties
and fc' = 28 MPa.
140KN.m
80KN m
80KN.m
140KN.m
80 kN.m
80KN.m
140 kN.m
kN m
Single curvature
0.4E c I g
EI =
1 + d
24871
3.49 1013
Pcr =
2 EI ( 3.49 10 )
13
7033kN
( kl u )
2
M 2 max = ns M 2ns
MPa = 50 kg/cm2
MP = 12.1
MPa k / 2
12 1 kg/cm
Reinforced Concrete Design II
Lecture 10
Design of slender columns
PART I: Non-sway frames
Primaryy v.s. secondary
y moments
One needs to find in order to determine the secondary moment and hence the
t t l design
total d i moment. t
Moment magnification
g method
k lu
< 100
r
Moment magnification
g method
Moment magnification
g method
E i l t momentt correction
Equivalent ti
If a bbeam-column
l in
i a non-sway
frame is loaded by unequal end
moments without transverse loads,
moments, loads
the maximum design moment will
occur either at one of the column
ends when the secondary moment
is small or between the two ends
when
h th the secondary
d momentt is
i
large, as shown in the figure.
E i l t momentt correction
Equivalent ti
ACI 10.10.6
10 10 6
M max = ns M 2 ns M 2,min
where
M2 = columns larger-end moment
ns = moment magnification factor for non-sway frame, given
by Cm
ns = 1.0
Pu
1
0.75Pc
2 EI
Pc = ACI 10.10.6
( klu )
2
M1 M1
>0 <0
M2 M2
Single
g curvature Double curvature
E
Example
l
Design
g a longg column in a non-swayy frame with an unsupported
pp
height of 7.0 m and a cross section of 50x50 cm that carries a service
dead load of 500 kN, a service live load of 400 kN and ultimate end
moments as shown
h bbelow.
l The
h material i are: fy = 420 MPa,
i l properties
and fc' = 28 MPa.
140KN.m
80KN m
80KN.m
140KN.m
80 kN.m
80KN.m
140 kN.m
kN m
Single curvature
Pcr =
2 EI ( 3.49 10 )
13
7033kN Note
N t that
th t k is
i conservatively
ti l
( kl u )
2
taken as 1.0
M 2 max = ns M 2ns
MPa = 50 kg/cm2
MP = 12.1
MPa k / 2
12 1 kg/cm
Reinforced Concrete Design II
Lecture 10
Design of slender columns
PART II: Sway frames
Moment Magnification in Sway Frames
ACI 10.10.7
The design moments in a long column in a sway frame is permitted by the ACI
code to be found from elastic analysis
analysis. However
However, it is specified that the analysis
is carried out in two parts:
1 One
1- O partt iis for
f obtaining
bt i i the
th moments
t due
d to
t gravity
it loads
l d only.
l
2- The second part is for obtaining the moments due to lateral sway loads.
The final moments are then established by adding the moments from the first
part to magnified values of the moment from the second part.
The design moments M1,max and M2,max at the ends of a compression member
aaree taken
ta e as
M 1,max = M 1ns + s M 1s
M 2,max = M 2 ns + s M 2 s
Moment Magnification in Sway Frames
ACI 10.10.7
NS S
Nonsway Sway
Moment Magnification in Sway Frames
ACI 10.10.7
M1ns
1 = factored end moment at the end M1 that develops due to loads that cause no
Moment Magnification in Sway Frames
1 ACI 10.10.7.4
s = 1
1
P u
0.75 P cr
Moment Magnification in Sway Frames
2 EI
Pc = ACI 10.10.6
10 10 6
( klu )
2
0.4E c I g
EI = ACI 10.10.6.1
1 + d
Moment Magnification in Sway Frames
3. By using direct P- analysis
Q=
P u o ACI 10.10.7.3
V u lc
Moment Magnification in Sway Frames
Load combinations
wD=60
60 kN/m , wL=40
40 kN/m
B F
PW=40 kN
0.6m D 0.6m
0.5m
5m
0.5m 0.5m
A C E
8m 8m
Columns 0.5x0.3
0 5x0 3 and Beams 0 6x0 3
0.6x0.3
Solution
1. Evaluate internal forces in story members
Effective moments of inertia are given by
Ibeam=0.35(0.3)(0.6)3/12=1.89x10-3 m4
Icolumn=0.7(0.3)(0.5)3/12=2.188x10-3 m4
Using a computer program, the normal forces and bending moments are
determined in the following slides.
Solution
Case 1 U = 1.2D.L+1.6L.L
Wu=1.2(60)+1.6(40)=136kN/m
( ) ( )
B F
D
423.6 kN.m
A C E
Solution
Case 2 U = 1.2D.L+1.0L.L+1.6W.L
1.2(60)+1.0(40)=112kN/m
B F 1.6(40)=64kN
1.6(40) 64kN F
D B D
348.8 kN.m 89.2 kN.m
A C E A C E
Solution
Case 3 U = 0.9D.L+1.3W.L
0.9(60) =54kN/m
B F 1.3(40)=52
1.3(40) 52 kN F
D B D
84.09 kN.m 72.5 kN.m
A C E A C E
Solution
Q = u o =
P 112(16)(29.4 0)103
= 0.165 > 0.05
V u lc 64(5)
Solution
C (1) 1.2D+1.6L
Case 1 2D 1 6L
Using the appropriate alignment chart (nonsway), k = 0.9, and
k lu M
lu = 5.0-0.3=
5 0 0 3 4.7m
47 34 12 1 40
r M2
For column to be short,
k lu 0.9(4.7) 0
= = 28.2 34 12 = 34 40 O.K
r 0.3(0.5) 423.6
i column
i.e l i short.
is h
Solution
Solution
5- Critical buckling loads
1
d =
max. ffactored sustained shear in storyy
= 0 .0 s = 1
total factored shear in story 1
P u
0 . 75 P
E c = 4700 f c ' = 4700 28 = 24 ,870 MPa
cr
Solution
6- Magnification factors
Solution
Lecture 11
Design of columns subjected to biaxial
moments
Biaxial bending in columns
Design equations
Design equations
B- Use the Bresler equation to check the axial capacity of the section:
1- Calculate Pnx from the interaction diagram assuming only Mux is applied.
2- Calculate Pny from the interaction diagram
g assumingg onlyy Muy is applied.
pp
3- Calculate P0.
4- Calculate Pn and check Pn Pu
Example 1
Determine the reinforcement of the square column shown in the figure below
and subjected to the shown factored biaxial bending moments and factored
axial load.
Solution
100 + 80 = 180
180kN
kN .m
2D
2-Determine
i the
h reinforcement:
i f
Solution
Solution
1 1 1 1
= +
Pn 2929 2585 4446
Pn = 1987kN
0 1Po = 445kN < Pn OK (Brelser
0.1 (B l eq. is
i applicable)
li bl )
Pn = 0.65(1987) = 1291kN > Pu = 1000kN OK
Example 2
Lecture 12
Design of eccentrically loaded single
footings
Footing
Footings
g are structural elements used to support
pp columns and walls and transmit their
loads to the underlying soil without exceeding its safe bearing capacity below the
structure.
Loads
B B Column
L L Beam
P P
M
Footing
Soil
Isolated Footings
Isolated or single footings are used to support single columns. This is one of the most
economical types of footings and is used when columns are spaced at relatively long
distances.
P kN
B C2
C1
Isolated Footings
Deformation of isolated footings
Isolated Footings
Deformation of isolated footings
C
Concentrically
t i ll Loaded
L d dF
Footings
ti
If the resultant of the loads acting at the base of the footing coincides with the centroid
of the footing area, the footing is concentrically loaded and a uniform distribution of
soil pressure is assumed in design.
Centroidal axis
P/A
E
Eccentrically
t i ll Loaded
L d d Footings
F ti
E
Eccentrically
t i ll Loaded
L d d Footings
F ti
The pressure distribution on the base of footing that supports combined concentric load
(P) and moment (M) is given by the flexural formula:
P
P My P Pe y
q max = = e
min A I A I
Centroidal axis
P Pe (L/2) P 6e
= = 1
A BL 3 /12 A L y
L
P/A
where My/I
e: The eccentricity of the load relative to the
centroidal axis of footing base area.
I: The moment of inertia about the centroidal
axis.
y: The distance from the centroidal axis to the qmin
point where the pressure is being calculated. qmax
E
Eccentrically
t i ll Loaded
L d d Footings
F ti
If loads are applied within the kern, then the soil pressure distribution will be
compressive over the entire area of the footing.
E
Eccentrically
t i ll Loaded
L d d Footings
F ti
E
Eccentrically
t i ll Loaded
L d d Footings
F ti
E
Eccentrically
t i ll Loaded
L d d Footings
F ti
Large eccentricities cause tensile stresses (uplift) on part of the base area of the
footing. In this case, the soil pressure cannot be calculated by the flexural
formula. To compute the soil pressure for such a situation it is necessary to
realize that the centroid of the upward soil pressure must coincide with the
centroid of the vertical component of the downward load (for equilibrium).
Assume that the distance to this point from the right end of the footing is a.
Then the soil pressure will spread over the distance 3a. The maximum soil
pressure is found as follows:
E
Example
l 1
Design an isolated footing to support an interior column 0.5m0.3m in cross section
and carry the following service loads and moments:
PD = 1000 kN and PL = 600 kN
MD = 120 kN.m
k and
d ML = 700 kN.m
k
Df=11.00
0.5
0.3
Solution
The footing may be designed by one of two methods:
Method 1: The footing is placed concentric with the center of the column. In this case,
the soil pressure under the footing will be trapezoidal or triangular.
Method 2: Move the center of the footing a distance equal to the eccentricity e from
the center of the column. In this case, the soil pressure under the footing becomes
uniformly distributed and the footing can be design as a concentrically loaded footing.
Not good for moments induced by EQ or wind due to load reversals.
L L
Method 1 Method 2
Solution
Method
et od 1
Solution
1- Select a trial footing depth
Assume that the footingg is 0.6 m thick
Check pressure:
M (120 + 70)
e= = = 0.119 < 6L = 64 = 0 . 67 (within the kern)
P (1000 + 600)
Ps M s C 1600 190 4.02
q min = = = 132 kPa
kP > 0
A I 10 13.33
Ps M s y 1600 190 4.02
q max = + = + = 1 89 kPa < q all , net OK
A I 10 13 33
13.33
L
Pu = 1.2 (1000 ) + 1.6(600) = 2160 kN
M u = 1.2 (120 ) + 1.6(70) = 256 kN .m 177.6 kPa
254.4 kPa
Pu M u C 2160 256 42
q u,m ax = + = + = 254.4 kN /m 2
A I 10 13.33
Pu M u C 2160 256 42
q u,m in = = = 177.6 kN /m 2
A I 10 13.33
Solution
L
P
M
B
254.4 kPa
177 6 kPa
177.6 kP
254.4 kPa
B L
177.6 kPa
254.4 kPa
254.4 kPa
x d2
Solution 1 2 3 4
d/2 d/2 d/2
d1
177.6 kPa
p1 254.4 kPa
p2 p3
p4
Slope
Pressure at key locations: 4 0.5 0.509
x3 = + + = 2.505
2 505m
254.4 177.6 2 2 2
Slope = = 0.0192kPa / mm
4000 p3 = 177.6 + 0.0192(2505) = 225.7kPa
4 0.5 0.509 4 0.5
x1 = = 1.496
1 496m x4 = + + 0.509
0 509 = 2.759
2 759m
2 2 2 2 2
p1 = 177.6 + 0.0192(1496) = 206.3kPa p 4 = 177.6 + 0.0192(2759) = 230.6kPa
4 0.5 4 0.5
x2 = + = 2.250
2 250m d1 = 0.509
0 509 = 1.241
1 241m
2 2 2 2
p 2 = 177.6 + 0.0192(2250) = 220.8kPa 4 0.5
d2 = = 1.750m
2 2
Solution
5- Check footing thickness for punching shear
C1+d
( 0.5 + 0.509 )( 0.3 + 0.509 ) = 1983.7kN
2..5m
Vu,max
, = 2160
2
C2+d
VC is the smallest of
4.0 m
0.33 fc ' bo d = 0.75
0 75 0.33 25 3636 509 = 2290 kN
d/2 d/2
2
0.17 fc ' 1 + bo d 177.6 kPa
c 225.7 kPa
254.4 kPa
2
=0.75 0.17 25 1 + 3636 509 = 2596 kN 206.3 kPa
0.5/0.3
d 40 509
0.083 fc ' 2 + s bo d=0.75 0.083 25 2 + 3636 509 = 4378kN
b o 509
VC = 2290 kN > Vu = 1983.7 kN OK
Solution
d
1.241 2.5 = 752 kN d
2..5m
2
Vc = 0.17 fc' bd = 0.75 0.17 25 2500 509
= 811 kN > Vu 4.0 m
1
d
In long direction (Sec 2-2)
230.6 kPa
177.6 + 254.4 2.5 0.3
Vu =
177.6 kPa 254.4 kPa
0.509 4.0
2 2
= 511 kN
Vc = 0.17 fc' bd
= 0.75 0.17 25 4000 509 = 1297 kN > Vu
Solution 1
5m
2.5
P1 =220.8 1.75 2.5=966kN
1
=0 5 (254.4
P2 =0.5 (254 4 220 8) 1.75
220.8) 1 75 22.5=73.5kN
5=73 5kN 40m
4.0
1.75 2
M u = 966 + 966 ( 1.75)=931 kN.m
2 3
177.6
0.85 25 254.4
2 931 106 220.8 kPa
= 1- 1- 2
420 0.9 ( 0.85 ) 25 2500 509
= 0.004 A s = 0.004 509 2500 = 5035 mm 2
As,min
s min = 0.0018 600 2500 = 2700 mm 2
254.4
Solution
2..5m
2
177.6 + 254.4 2
w ave = ( ) 4 = 864kN / m d3
2
w ave d 32 864 1.1
1 12 4.0 m
Mu = = = 523 kN .m
2 2
0.85 25 2 523 106
= 1-
1 11- 2
420 0.9 ( 0.85 ) 25 4000 509 177.6
254.4
= 0.00135
A s = 0.00135 509 4000=2754mm 2
A s ,min = 0.0018 4000 600 = 4320mm 2 > A s
Use A s = 4320mm 2
Solution
2..5m
2
2
Long side dimension of footing 4 d3
= = = 1.6
g 2.5
Short side dimension of footing 4.0 m
2
Central band reinforcement = 4320
1 + 1.6
= 3323mm 2
177.6
Use 1716mm in central band 254.4
F each
For h off th
the side
id bands,
b d
4320 3323
A s = = 500 mm
2
2
Use 316 mm in each of the two side bands.
Solution
2.5m
=0.8 for 18mm, =1.0 for normal weight concrete
C the smallest of 75
75+18/2=84mm
18/2 84mm
1
[2500-2(75)-2(18/2)]/(18)(2)=65mm 4.0 m
2.5
C the smallest of 75
75+16/2=83mm
16/2 83mm 2
5m
2
[4000-2(75)-2(16/2)]/(16)(2)=120mm
i.e., C is taken as 83mm 4.0 m
C + K tr 83 + 0 C + K tr
= = 5.2 > 2.5 i.e.,use = 2.5
db 16 db
420 (1.0)(1.0)(0.8)(1.0)
(1 0)(1 0)(0 8)(1 0)
l d = 16 = 388 mm
1.1 25 2.5
Available length
g =1100-75=1025> 300 mm > 388 OK
Solution
Solution
0.60 m
2.50 m
314
1716
314
1
1918
4.00 m
Solution
Method
et od 2
Solution
1- Select a trial footing depth
Assume that the footingg is 0.6 m thick
M = Pe
In order to have uniform soil
pressure under the footing, the
0.3
footing is to be positioned in
0.5
suchh a way to
t balance
b l the
th given
i
moment through shifting the L
centroid of the footing 119 mm
away from the centroid of the
column as shown in the figure.
Solution
Solution
Should use 1.2DL + 1.6LL
Pu = 1.2P
1 2PD + 1.6P
1 6PL = 69 tons
Solution
Solution
Solution
Sh ld use as 0.75
Should 0 75
Solution
0.85f c 2 105 M u
= 1 1 2
fy
0.85 f c bw d
0.85 250 2 105 0.87
= 1 1 2
= 0.00003
4200 0
0.85
85 0
0.99 250 400 (40
(40.9)
9)
Solution
Solution
Solution
Solution
Reinforced Concrete Design II
Lecture 13
Design of combined footings
C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Combined footings are used when two columns are so close that single footings cannot
be used. Or, when one column is located at or near a property line. In such a case, the
load on the footing will be eccentric and hence this will result in an uneven distribution
of load to the supporting soil.
P1 P2
P2 kN
L
PP1 kN
1 kN
B C2 C2
C1 C1
L1 L2 L2
C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Combined footings are used when:
(1) The two columns are so close that single footings cannot be used.
(2) When one column is located at or near a property line.
(3) A large difference exists between the magnitudes of the two column loads
C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Combined footings are either rectangular or trapezoidal. Rectangular footings are
favored due to their simplicity in terms of design and construction. However,
rectangular footings are not always practicable because of the limitations that may be
imposed on their longitudinal projections beyond the two columns or the large
diff
difference th
thatt may exist
i t between
b t the
th magnitudes
it d off the
th two
t column
l loads.
l d Under
U d these
th
conditions, the provision of a trapezoidal footing is more economical.
C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Deformation of combined footings
C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Deformation of combined footings
C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Deformation of combined footings
C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Pressure under combined footings and the shape of the footing
The shape of the footing is chosen such that the centroid of the area (of the footing base)
coincides with the resultant of the column loads supported by the footing. This leads to
producing
d i a constant uniform
if soil
il pressure under
d the
h footing.
f i
C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Pressure under combined footings and the shape of the footing
The shape of the footing is chosen such that the centroid of the area (of the footing base)
coincides with the resultant of the column loads supported by the footing. This leads to
producing
d i a constant uniform
if soil
il pressure under
d the
h footing.
f i
C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Pressure under combined footings and the shape of the footing
The shape of the footing is chosen such that the centroid of the area (of the footing base)
coincides with the resultant of the column loads supported by the footing. This leads to
producing
d i a constant uniform
if soil
il pressure under
d the
h footing.
f i
B2
B + 2B2 L
x bar = 1 3
B
1 + B 2
L B1 + B2 L = A
( )
c.g
2
Xbar
B1
C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Cases:
1- Property line from one side:
A- Rectangular
B- Trapezoid
A B
2- Property lines from two sides: R
A- Rectangular
B- Trapezoid X
3- No property lines:
A- Rectangular
B- Trapezoid
C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Cases:
L
1- Property line from one side:
A B
A- Rectangular R
X
X L/2
B- Trapezoid
L L
A B A B
R R
X X < L/2 X X L
C bi d F
Combined Footings
ti
Cases:
L
2- Property lines from two sides:
A B
A- Rectangular R
X
X = L/2
B- Trapezoid
L L
A B A B
R R
B- Trapezoid
L L
A B A B
R R
D i
Designed
d procedure
d
7- Compute the area of flexural reinforcement:
The flexural reinforcement required in the longitudinal direction is
calculated. Furthermore, the areas of flexural reinforcement under the
columns in the transverse (short) direction are computed. In computing this
reinforcement, it will be assumed that each column load is uniformly
distributed over a band centered under the column and has a width extending
a distance d/2 from its faces. This area of reinforcement is uniformly
di ib d across the
distributed h bbandd width
id h (C2+d),
d) and
d the
h rest off the
h ffooting
i isi
provided with shrinkage and temperature reinforcement.
8- Check bearing strength of column and footing concrete.
9 Check
9- Ch k ffor anchorage
h off th
the reinforcement.
i f t
10- Prepare neat design drawings showing footing dimensions and
provided reinforcement.
E
Example
l 1:
1 Property
P line
li from
f one side:
id
Design a combined footing to support the two columns A (exterior) and B (interior)
spaced at distance 6.0 m center-to-center as shown in the figure. Column A is
0.4mx0.4m and carries a dead load of 500 kN and a live load of 300 kN. Column B is
also 0.4mx0.4m
0 4mx0 4m in cross section but carries a dead load of 750kN and a live load of 450
kN. Use fc= 25 MPa, fy = 420 MPa, and qall(net) = 150 kN/m2
Property
PD=500kN PD=750kN
limit
PL=300kN PL=450kN
A B
0.4 0.4
0.4 0.4
6m
Solution
1- Select a trial footing depth
Assume that the footing is 0.8 m thick
Average effective depth d = 800 75 20 = 705 mm
2 Establish
2- E bli h the
h required
i d base
b area off the
h footing
f i
PA + PB 500 + 300 + 750 + 450
Ag = = = 1 3 .33 m 2
q all(net) 150
X
0.2 m 6m
X=3.8 m X=3.8 m
L th off footing
Length f ti L=2L 2 (3.80)
(3 80) = 7.60m
7 60
Width of footing B =13.33/7.6 =1.754 m, taken as 1.80 m.
Solution
A B
1105
8m
105
1.8
11
5
753 1105
7.6 m
Column A
The factored shear force Vu =1080197.4(1.105)(0.753) =916 kN
bo =2(400+705/2)+400+705=2610 mm
VC is the smallest of
0.33 fc ' bo d = 0.75 0.33 25 2610 705 = 2277 kN
2 2
0.17 fc ' 1 + bo d =0.75 0.17 25 1 + 2610 705 = 3519 kN
c 0.4/0.4
d 30 705
0 083 fc ' 2 + s bo d=0.75
0.083 d 0 75 00.083
083 25 2 + 2610 705 = 5786 kN
bo 2610
VC = 2277 kN > Vu = 916 kN OK
Solution
A B
1105
8m
105
1.8
11
5
753 1105
7.6 m
Column B
The factored shear force Vu =1620197.4(1.105)2 =1379 kN
bo =4(400+705)=4420 mm
VC is the smallest of
0.33 fc ' bo d = 0.75 0.33 25 4420 705 = 3856 kN
2 2
0.17 fc ' 1 + bo d =0.75 0.17 25 1 + 4420 705 = 5959 kN
c 0.4/0.4
d 40 705
0.083 fc ' 2 + s bo d=0.75 0.083 25 2 + 4420 705 = 8128 kN
b o 4420
VC = 3856 kN > Vu = 1379 kN OK
Solution
5- Draw S.F.D and B.M.D for footing
Distributed line load under footing:
w = q B = 197.37 1.8 = 355.26 kN/m
1080kN 1620 kN
Fy = 0
X3 =2.84 m 1122.6
798
x1=3.04m
497.4
1009 x1 x2
x2 = 6.2 3.04 = 3.16 m
1425.7
7.10
348
Solution
6- Check footing thickness for beam shear
Effective depth d= 8007510=715
800 75 10=715 mm (lower layer)
Maximum factored shear force Vu is located at distance d from the face of column B,
Vu,critical
u critical =798
798 kN
Vc = 0.17 fc' bd
= 0.75 0.17 251800 715 = 820 kN > Vu OK
7- Compute the areas of flexural reinforcement
a) Top longitudinal reinforcement
c) Short Direction
Effective depth, d= 8007516 8=700 mm (Upper layer)
7.6 m
1.8 m
0.4 0.4
04
0.4 04
0.4
400+350 400+700
750 1100
Solution
1080
0.7
1.8
8m
0.4 0.4
1.8
0.4 0.4
400+350 400+700
750 1100
2
wl 2 (1080/1.8) 1.8 0.4
M A,u = = = 147 kN.m
2 2 2
0.85 25 2 147 106
= 1- 1-
420 0.9 ( 0.85 ) 25 700 2
750
= 0.00107
A s,req = 0.00107 750 700 = 560 mm 2
A s ,min = 0.0018B h = 0.0018 750 800 = 1080 mm 2
A s ,min > A s ,req A s,req = A s,min Use616
Solution
Under Column B
7.6 m
1620
0.7
1.8
8m
0.4 0.4
1.8
0.4 0.4
400+350 400+700
750 1100
2
wl 2 (1620/1.8) 1.8 0.4
M B,u = = =220.5 kN.m
2 2 2
0.85 25 2 220.5 106
= 1- 1-
420 0.9 ( 0.85 ) 25 7002 1100
= 0.00109
As,req = 0.00109 1100 700 = 841mm 2
As ,min = 0.0018
0 0018 1100 800 = 1585 mm 2
As ,min > A s ,req A s,req = A s,min Use 816
Solution
Shrinkage reinforcement in the short direction for the rest of the footing
Solution
1316
0.75m 1.10 m
1820 T
1..80 m
@100
@100
16 B
16 B
81
14@
14@
61
1316 B
7.60 m
Example 2: No property lines:
Design a combined footing to support two columns A and B spaced at a distance
2.1 m center-to-center. Column A is 20 cm 30 cm and carries a dead load of 20
tons and a live load of 10 tons. Column B is 20 cm 40 cm in cross section but
carries a dead load of 30 tons and a live load of 15 tons. Width of footing is not to
exceed 1.0 m, and there is no property line restriction. Use fc= MPa, fy = 420
MPa, and qall(net)= 16.2 t/m2
Pa Pb
Solution
2.1 m
l1 x1 x2 l2
Continue as in Example 1
Reinforced Concrete Design III
Lecture 0
Syllabus
Reinforced Concrete Design III
Email nao204@lehigh.edu
2
Reinforced Concrete Design III
References:
Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and
commentary (ACI 318M-08). American Concrete Institute,
2008.
3
Reinforced Concrete Design III
References:
Loads and Load Paths in Buildings: Principles of Structural
Design. Narendra Taly.
4
Reinforced Concrete Design III
C- Design of walls
-Design of shear walls.
-Design of retaining walls.
-Design of basement walls.
6
Reinforced Concrete Design III
D- Design of footings
-Design of combined footings.
-Design of wall footings.
-Design of continuous footings.
-Design of strap footings.
-Design of mat footings.
7
Reinforced Concrete Design III
Grading
8
Reinforced Concrete Design III
Exam Policy
Mid-term exam:
Open book.
Final exam:
Open book.
9
Reinforced Concrete Design III
Homework Policy
You may get the HW points if you copy the solution from
other students. However, you will have lost your chance in
practicing the concepts through doing the HW. This will lead
you to loosing points in the exams, which you could have
gained if you did your HWs on your own.
11
Reinforced Concrete Design III
Distance (L,b,d,h): mm
Area (Ac,Ag,As): mm2
Volume (V): mm3
Force (P,V,N): N
Moment (M): N.mm
Stress (fy, fc): N/mm2 = MPa = 106 N/m2
Pressure (qs): N/mm2
Distributed load per unit length (wu): N/mm
Distributed load per unit area (qu): N/mm2
Weight per unit volume (g): N/mm3 14
Reinforced Concrete Design III
Distance (L,b,d,h): cm , m
Area (Ac,Ag,As): cm2, m2
Volume (V): cm3, m3
Force (P,V,N): kN
Moment (M): kN.m
Pressure (qs): kN/m2
Distributed load per unit length (wu): kN/m
Distributed load per unit area (qu): kN/m2
Weight per unit volume (g): kN/m3
15
Reinforced Concrete Design III
Unit conversions
1 m = 102 cm = 103 mm
1 m2 = 104 cm2 = 106 mm2
1 m3 = 106 cm3 = 109 mm3
1 kN = 103 N
1 kN.m = 106 N.mm
1 kN/m2 = 10-3 N/mm2
1 kN/m3 = 10-6 N/mm3
16
Reinforced Concrete Design III
ACI Equations
The equations taken from the ACI code will be indicated throughout the
slides by their section or equation number in the code provided in
shading.
Examples:
Ec 4700 f c ACI 8.5.1
Some of the original equations may have included the symbol l = 1.0
for normal weight concrete and omitted in slides.
17
Reinforced Concrete Design III
DO YOUR HOMEWORK!!!!!
18
Reinforced Concrete Design III
19
Reinforced Concrete Design III
Lecture 1
Analysis of continuous beams in single
and multistory structures.
Continuity in beams
Continuity tends to reduce the maximum moment on a beam and makes
it stiffer.
Some loads are fixed in their location and/or distribution, others can be
everywhere, somewhere or nowhere.
1- Analysis by computer
3
Continuity in beams Influence lines
4
Continuity in beams Influence lines
5
Continuity in beams Influence lines
6
Continuity in beams Influence lines
7
Continuity in beams Influence lines
8
Continuity in beams Influence lines
9
Continuity in beams Load patterns
Load Patterns using Qualitative Influence Lines
11
Continuity in beams Load patterns
12
Continuity in beams Load envelopes
13
Continuity in beams Load envelopes
14
Continuity in beams Load envelopes
Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: -1/11, +1/16, -1/11)
15
Continuity in beams Load envelopes
Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: -1/16, +1/14, -1/10)
16
Continuity in beams Load envelopes
Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: -1/24, +1/14, -1/10)
17
Continuity in beams Load envelopes
Bending moment envelope for typical span (moment coefficient: 0, +1/11, -1/10)
18
Continuous beams in single story
structures:
19
Continuity in beams ACI approximate method
Requirements: ACI 8.3.3
ACI Code permits the use of the following approximate moments and
shears for design of continuous beams and one-way slabs, provided:
There are two or more spans.
Spans are approximately equal, with the larger of two adjacent spans
not greater than the shorter by more than 20 percent.
Loads are uniformly distributed.
Unfactored live load does not exceed three times the unfactored dead
load.
Members are of similar section dimensions along their lengths
(prismatic).
20
Approximate Structural Analysis
ACI 8.3.3
l n = length of clear
span measured face-
to-face of supports.
Support is column
Spandrel girder
22
Continuous beams in multistory
structures
23
Equivalent rigid frame method (for gravity loads)
24
Equivalent rigid frame method (for gravity loads)
26
ACI approximate method
ACI 8.3.3
27
Equivalent rigid frame method (for lateral loads)
28
Example 1
The figure below shows a plan of a typical floor in a multistory reinforced concrete
building with 3m typical story height. The column dimensions are all 40cmX40cm. The
slab depth is 25 cm, and the beam depth is 50 cm. The live load is 2 kN/m2. The covering
materials weigh 2.25 kN/m2, equivalent partition load is equal to 0.75 kN/m2, and the live
load is 2 kN/m2. Use fc=25 MPa, fy=420 MPa. Determine using a computer program the
design moments in the beams in rows A and B and an exterior column. Beam B carries a
10 cm brick wall. A B
3@6 = 24
3@3 = 9
29 4@9 = 36
Continuous beam A
Ultimate own weight of slab = 1.20.2525 = 7.5 kN/m2
Ultimate own weight of beam = 1.20.50.425 = 6 kN/m
Ultimate floor covering material & partition load = 1.2(2.25+0.75) = 3.6 kN/m2
Ultimate floor live load = 1.62 = 3.2 kN/m2
31
Continuous beam A Live load case 1
32
Continuous beam A Live load case 2
33
Continuous beam A
Design moment:
1 2 3 4 5
Load Case 1 2 3 4 5
DL 104.47 130.42- 32.93 130.42- 104.47
LL1 34.81 17.25- 17.25- 17.25- 34.81
LL2 8.625 17.25- 25.95 17.25- 8.625
LL3 25.28 40.13- 18.51 11.61- 5.805
LL4 2.815 5.63- 11.44 22.88- 32.47
LL5 32.47 22.88- 11.44 5.63- 2.815
LL6 5.805 11.61- 18.51 40.13- 25.28
Maximum
34 Combo 139.28 170.55- 58.88 170.55- 139.28
Continuous beam A
Design moment:
150
100
50
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
-50
-100
-150
Maximum
35
Combo 139.28 170.55- 58.88 170.55- 139.28
Continuous beam B
Ultimate own weight of slab = 1.20.2525 = 7.5 kN/m2
Ultimate own weight of beam = 1.20.50.425 = 6 kN/m
Ultimate floor covering material load = 1.22.25 = 2.7 kN/m2
Ultimate partition load = 1.25.6 = 6.72 kN/m
Ultimate floor live load = 1.62 = 3.2 kN/m2
37
Continuous beam B Dead load case
38
Continuous beam B Live load case 1
39
Continuous beam B Live load case 2
40
Continuous beam B Design moment:
Load Case 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
DL 83- 72.42 135- 57.65 135- 72.42 83-
LL1 22.4- 19.72 24.5- 4.96- 24.5- 19.72 22.4-
LL2 2.64 2.6- 7.6- 18.7 7.6- 2.6- 2.64
LL3 19.5- 17 33- 16.2 21.5- 3 2.3
LL4 0.33 0.5- 3- 2 25.5- 19.4 22-
LL5 22- 19.4 25.5- 2 3- 0.5- 0.33
LL6 2.3 3 21.5- 16.2 33- 17 19.5-
Max
41 Combo 105.4- 92.14 168- 76.35 168- 92.14 105.4-
Continuous beam B Design moment:
100
50
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
-50
-100
-150
Max
42
Combo 105.4- 92.14 168- 76.35 168- 92.14 105.4-
Exterior column moment
+ = 52.76 kN.m
DL max LL
43
Reinforced Concrete Design III
Lecture
L t 2
Design of hollow block and ribbed slabs
PART I
One way ribbed slabs
Ribbed and hollow block slabs
Ribbed slabs consist of regularly spaced ribs monolithically built
with a toping slab. The voids between the ribs may be either light
material such as hollow blocks [figure 1] or it may be left unfilled
[figure 2].
Topping slab
Ribbed and hollow block slabs
The main advantage of using hollow blocks is the reduction in
weight by removing the part of the concrete below the neutral axis.
Additional advantages are:
1- Ease of construction.
2 Hollow
2- H ll bl k make
blocks k it possible
ibl to
t have
h smooth
th ceiling
ili which
hi h is
i
often required for architectural considerations.
33- Provides good sound and temperature insulation properties.
w u l c2
t
1240 f c
h 3.5 bw
bw 100
Flexural strength:
Ribs are designed as rectangular beams in the regions of negative
moment at the supports and as T-shaped beams in the regions of
positive moments between the supports.
Effective
ff i flange
fl width
id h be is
i taken
k as half
h lf the
h distance
di b
between ribs,
ib
center-to-center. b
e
Keyy components
p of ribbed slabs
c. Hollow blocks:
Hollow blocks are made of lightweight
g g concrete or other
lightweight materials. The most common concrete hollow block
sizes are 40 25 cm in plan and heights of 14, 17, 20, and 24 cm.
To avoid shear failures, the blocks are terminated near the support
and replaced
p byy solid pparts. Solid pparts are made under ppartitions
and concentrated walls.
P
Perpendicular
di l to t rib
ib direction
di ti (mm):
( ) Lc 2 = 400 n 2 + bw (n 2 1)
a- Dead Load (D
(D.L)
L) :
1- Weight of slab covering materials
2- Equivalent
q ppartition weight
g
3- Own weight of slab
b Live
b- Li LLoad
d (L
(L.L)
L)
tiles 22.55 cm
cement mortar 2.5 cm
sand 5 cm
slab
plaster 1.5 cm
Example
Find the total ultimate load per rib for the ribbed slab shown:
L dp
Load per rib
ib
Total dead load= 3.85 + 2.315 + 0.75 = 6.915 kN/m2
Ultimate load = 1.2(6.915) + 1.6(2) = 11.5 kN/m2
S1 S2
Mi i
Minimum Reinforcement
R i f t Ratio
R ti for
f Main
M i Reinforcement
R i f t
min A s ,shrinkage
A s ,min shrinkage = 0.0018 b h ACI 10.5.4
Summary of one
one-way
way ribbed slab design procedure
1. The direction of ribs is chosen.
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t
3. Provide shrinkage reinforcement for the topping slab in both
directions.
4. The factored load on each of the ribs is computed.
5. The shear force and bending moment diagrams are drawn.
6. The strength of the web in shear is checked.
7. Design the ribs as T-section shaped beams in the positive moment
regions and rectangular beams in the regions of negative moment.
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the
reinforcement are to be prepared.
p p
Example 1
Determine the arrangement
of blocks and width of
hidden beams for the plan
p
shown. The blocks used
have the size of 40 20 cm
in plan. The live load is 4
kN/m2.
Solution
Note that the width of hollow blocks in Gaza is 250 mm NOT 200 mm
Solution
Solution
Solution
Example 2
Design a oneone-way
way ribbed slab to cover a 3.8
3 8 m x 10 m panel,
panel shown in the
figure below. The covering materials weigh 2.25 kN/m2, equivalent
ppartition load is equal
q to 0.75 kN/m2, and the live load is 2 kN/m2.
Use fc=25 MPa, fy=420MPa
3.8 m
10 m
Solution
1. The direction of ribs is chosen:
Ribs are arranged in the short direction as shown in the figure
3.8 m
3
50m
5.0 50m
5.0
2. Determine h, and select the hollow block size, bw and t:
From ACI Table 9.5(a), hmin = 380/16 = 23.75cm use h = 24 cm.
L t width
Let b bw =10
idth off web, 10 cm
Use hollow blocks of size 40 cm 25 cm 17 cm (weight=0.17 kN)
pp g slab thickness = 24 17 = 7cm > lc/12 =40/12= 3.3cm > 5cm OK
Topping
For a unit strip of topping slab:
wu=[1.2(0.07 25 + 0.75 + 2.25) + 1.6(2)] 1m = 8.9 kN/m = 8.9 N/mm
w u l c2 8.9( 400 ) 2
t = = 16mm OK
1240 f c ( 0.9 )1240 25
Solution
3. Provide shrinkage
g reinforcement for the topping
pp g slab in both directions:
Area of shrinkage reinforcement, As=0.0018(1000)70=126 mm2
Use 5 6 mm/m in both directions.
1.0 m
= 0.24-
0 24 0.136 0 104 m3
0 136 = 0.104
0.25 m
Weight of concrete in 1m2
= 0.104 25 = 2.6 kN/m2
g of hollow blocks in 1m2
Weight
= 8 0.17= 1.36 kN/m2
0.4 m 0.1 m 0.4 m
7 cm
Total dead load /m2
= 2.25 + 0.75 + 2.6 + 1.36
0.244 m
= 7.0 kN/m2
Solution
wu=1.2(7)+1.6(2)=11.6
1.2(7) 1.6(2) 11.6 kN/m2
wu/m of rib =11.6x0.5= 5.8 kN/m of rib
5. Critical shear forces and bending moments are determined (simply supported beam):
Maximum factored shear force = wul/2 = 5.8 (3.8/2) = 11 kN
Maximum factored bending moment = wul2/8 = 5.8 (3.8)2/8 = 10.5 kN.m
6. Check rib strength for beam shear:
Effective depth d = 2420.60.6 =20.8 cm, assuming 12mm reinforcing
bars and 6 mm stirrups.
p
1.1V c = 1.1 0.75 0.17 25 100 208 = 14400 N = 14.4 kN > Vu,max = 11 kN
Solution
7. Design
g flexural reinforcement for the ribs:
There is only positive moments over the simply supported beam, and the
section of maximum positive moment is to be designed as a T-section
Assume that a<70mm and =0.90Rectangular
=0 90Rectangular section with b = be =500mm
50
0.85 25 2 10.5 106
= 1 1 7
kN.m
420 0.9 0.85
0 85 25 500 2082 24
105 k
As
= 0.0013
10
As = be d = 0.0013 500 208 = 135 mm 2
As f y 157 420
a= = = 6.2 mm < 70mm
0.85f c 'b e 0.85 25 500
The assumption is right
Solution
Check As,min
s min
0.25 f c ' 1.4
A s,min = max bw d ; bw d
f y fy
A s,min = 70 mm 2 < A s,sup = 157 mm 2 OK
Check =0.9
=0 9 (ductility of the section)
a 6.2
c= = = 7 .3 mm
1 00.85
85
dc 208 7 .3
t = 0.003 = 0.003
c 7.3
t = 0.083 >> 0 .005 Tension controlled = 0 .9 OK
Solution
8. Neat sketches showing arrangement of ribs and details of the reinforcement are to be
prepared
110 m
110 m
110 m
110 m
3.8 m A A
5.0 m 5.0 m
6mm stirrups 6mm mesh
@25 cm @20 cm
7cm
24cm
17cm
210mm 10 40 cm 10 210mm
S i A-A
Section AA
PART II
Two way ribbed slabs
Method of analysis
R i Li
i
Method of coefficients
1.0m
w = ws + wl
wS
S
w s = w
w l = w wl
L
Rectangularity ratio:
Case
Method of coefficients
0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85
0 35
0.35 0 29
0.29 0 25
0.25 0 21
0.21 0 18
0.18 0 16
0.16 0 14
0.14 0 12
0.12 0 11
0.11 0 09
0.09 0 08
0.08
0.292 0.355 0.411 0.470 0.526 0.577 0.623 0.663 0.699 0.730 0.757
0.292 0.240 0.198 0.165 0.137 0.114 0.095 0.079 0.067 0.056 0.047
l n (800 + f y /1.4)
h max =
36000
S L
qu(S/2)
Long beam
qu(S/2)
L
m
L
Short beam
S
An equivalent
q uniformlyy distributed load can be established for a beam in a two
way system.
For a triangular load distribution, the equivalent shear force coefficient Cs is
equal to 0.5 and the equivalent bending moment coefficient Cb is equal to 0.67.
Lon
ng beam
qu(S/2)
L
L
Short beam
S
For a trapezoidal load distribution, Cs and Cb are given in the following table.
Shear and moment equivalent load coefficients for trapezoidal load distribution
r =L/S 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0
Cs 0.500 0.545 0.583 0.615 0.643 0.667 0.688 0.706 0.722 0.737 0.750
Cb 0.667 0.725 0.769 0.803 0.830 0.852 0.870 0.885 0.897 0.908 0.917
wu 0.5 wu 0.67 wu
S S S
wu Cs wu Cb wu
L L L
Example
p 3
Design the two-way ribbed slab shown in the figure below. The covering
materials weigh 1.5 kN/m2, equivalent partition load is equal to 0.75
kN/ 2, concrete
kN/m t hollow
h ll bl k are 40cm25cm17cm
blocks 40 25 17 i dimension,
in di i
each 17 kg in weight and the live load is 4 kN/m2. All beams are 30 cm
wide. Use fc=30 MPa, fy=420 MPa.
8.0 m
8.0 m
8.0 m 8.0 m
S l ti
Solution:
l n = 800 30 = 770cm
S l ti
Solution:
2- Determine
ee e thee total
o factored
c o ed load
o d on
o thee slab:
s b
V l
Volume off hhollow
ll blocks 2[0 4 0.25
bl k = 2[0.4 0 25 0.17] 0 034 m3
0 17] = 0.034
S l ti
Solution:
L 8
r= = =1.0
S 8
8m
w1=w2=0.35(14.1) =4 92 kN/m2
=0 35(14 1) =4.92
8m
0.62 m
wu/m of rib =4.92x0.62=
=4 92x0 62= 3.06
3 06 kN/m of rib
0.5
Direction 1
0.4
S l ti
Solution:
4- Determine
ee e thee shear
s e force
o ce and
d bending
be d g moments:
o e s
Direction 1
55- C
Check
ec web width
w d for
o be
beam sshear:
e
Direction 1
Reinforcement is closest to the outside surface of concrete.
Effective depth d = 23 2 0.60 0.8 = 19.6 cm, assuming 16 mm
reinforcing bars and 6 mm stirrups.
1 1V c = 1.1
1.1 1 1 0.75
0 75 0.17
0 17 30 120 196 = 18067 N
= 18.1 kN > Vu,max = 13.5 kN
Direction 2
Effective depth d = 23 2 0.60 1.6 - 0.8 = 18.0 cm, assuming 16 mm
reinforcing bars and 6 mm stirrups.
S l ti
Solution:
66- Design
es g rib
b reinforcement:
e o ce e
Direction 1
S l ti
Solution:
66- Design
es g rib
b reinforcement:
e o ce e
Direction 2
S l ti
Solution:
77- Design
es g drawing:
d w g
S l ti
Solution:
77- Design
es g drawing:
d w g
Lecture 3
Equivalent Frame Method
(EFM)
R i Li
i
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Analysis
y of each equivalent
q frame in its entiretyy shall be ppermitted.
Alternatively, for gravity loading, a separate analysis of each floor or
roof with far ends of columns considered fixed shall be permitted.
ACI 13.7.2.5
4- Distribute
4 Di ib the
h obtained
b i d moments in
i the
h transverse
direction using the same DDM procedure
1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member ((Ksb)):
kEI sb
Ks =
l1
C
Concept off E
Equivalent
i l Column:
C l
The joint rotations for the two cases below can be easily calculated
from structural analysis.
13.2.4.
2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):
Cross section of torsioanl arms
X= min(hb, 4 hf)
9 E cs C
Kt = The summation is for the
c2 3
l 2 (1 ) arms on both sides
l2
0.63x x 3y
C = 1
y 3
4 EI
4EI
K c1 =
lc
For symmetric
y conditions:
K eq
K c1 = K c 2 =
2
When the unfactored live load is variable but does not exceed three-
quarters of the unfactored dead load, or the nature of live load is such that
all
ll panels
l will
ill be
b loaded
l d d simultaneously,
i lt l it shall
h ll be
b permitted
itt d to
t assume
that maximum factored moments occur at all sections with full factored
live
ve load
oad on
o entire
e e slab
s ab system.
sys e .
ACI 13.7.6.2
Example
p
Find the equivalent 2D frame for a typical storey of the E-W interior frame of
the flat pplate structure shown below. The slab is 25 cm thick. All columns are
35x35 cm in cross section. Storey height = 3.0 m. Ultimate distributed load
over the slab = 15 kN/m2.
76m
7.6 76m
7.6 76m
7.6 7.6 m
6.0 m
6.0 m
6.0 m
6.0 m
Solution
0- Extract a single storey from 3D frame for separate analysis
3.0 m
30m
3.0
Solution
1- Determine the stiffness of the slab beam members
l 2 h s3 600(25) 3
I sb = = = 781250cm 4
12 12
c1 35
= = 0.046
l 1 760
c2 35
= = 0.058
l 2 600
k = 4.047
kEI sb 4.047(781250) E
Ks = = = 4160 E
l1 760
Solution
2.a- Determine the stiffness of the columns
c 1c 23 35(35) 3
I sb = = = 125052cm 4
12 12
l c = 300cm
l u = 300 25 = 275cm
l c 300
= = 1.1
lu 275
t a = t a = 25 / 2 = 12.5
t a 12.5
= = 1.0
t b 12.5
k = 5.09
kEI c
Kc = =
lc
5.09(125052) E
Kc = = 2122 E
300
Solution
2.b- Determine the stiffness of the torsional arms
0.63x x 3 y
C = 1 35cm
y 3
0.63(25) (25) 3 35
C = (1 )( ) = 100260cm 4 25cm
35 3
9 E cs C
Kt =
c
l 2 (1 2 ) 3
l2
9(100260) E
K t = 2( ) = 3602 E
35 3
600(1 )
600
Solution
2.c- Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns
Kt Kc
K ec =
Kt + Kc
3602 E (2 2122 E )
K ec = = 1948 E
3602 E + 2122 E
Solution
3- Analyse the frame using ETABS to obtain the longitudinal distribution of
moments.
moments
wu = (15)(6) = 90 kN/m
Lecture 3
Equivalent Frame Method
(EFM)
R i Li
i
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Analysis
y of each equivalent
q frame in its entiretyy shall be ppermitted.
Alternatively, for gravity loading, a separate analysis of each floor or
roof with far ends of columns considered fixed shall be permitted.
ACI 13.7.2.5
4- Distribute
4 Di ib the
h obtained
b i d moments in
i the
h transverse
direction using the same DDM procedure
1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member ((Ksb)):
kEI sb
Ks =
l1
C
Concept off E
Equivalent
i l Column:
C l
The joint rotations for the two cases below can be easily calculated
from structural analysis.
13.2.4.
2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):
Cross section of torsioanl arms
X= min(hb, 4 hf)
9 E cs C
Kt = The summation is for the
c2 3
l 2 (1 ) arms on both sides
l2
0.63x x 3y
C = 1
y 3
4 EI
4EI
K c1 =
lc
For symmetric
y conditions:
K eq
K c1 = K c 2 =
2
When the unfactored live load is variable but does not exceed three-
quarters of the unfactored dead load, or the nature of live load is such that
all
ll panels
l will
ill be
b loaded
l d d simultaneously,
i lt l it shall
h ll be
b permitted
itt d to
t assume
that maximum factored moments occur at all sections with full factored
live
ve load
oad on
o entire
e e slab
s ab system.
sys e .
ACI 13.7.6.2
Example
p
Find the equivalent 2D frame for a typical storey of the E-W interior frame of
the flat pplate structure shown below. The slab is 25 cm thick. All columns are
35x35 cm in cross section. Storey height = 3.0 m. Ultimate distributed load
over the slab = 15 kN/m2.
76m
7.6 76m
7.6 76m
7.6 7.6 m
6.0 m
6.0 m
6.0 m
6.0 m
Solution
0- Extract a single storey from 3D frame for separate analysis
3.0 m
30m
3.0
Solution
1- Determine the stiffness of the slab beam members
l 2 h s3 600(25) 3
I sb = = = 781250cm 4
12 12
c1 35
= = 0.046
l 1 760
c2 35
= = 0.058
l 2 600
k = 4.047
kEI sb 4.047(781250) E
Ks = = = 4160 E
l1 760
Solution
2.a- Determine the stiffness of the columns
c 1c 23 35(35) 3
I sb = = = 125052cm 4
12 12
l c = 300cm
l u = 300 25 = 275cm
l c 300
= = 1.1
lu 275
t a = t a = 25 / 2 = 12.5
t a 12.5
= = 1.0
t b 12.5
k = 5.09
kEI c
Kc = =
lc
5.09(125052) E
Kc = = 2122 E
300
Solution
2.b- Determine the stiffness of the torsional arms
0.63x x 3 y
C = 1 35cm
y 3
0.63(25) (25) 3 35
C = (1 )( ) = 100260cm 4 25cm
35 3
9 E cs C
Kt =
c
l 2 (1 2 ) 3
l2
9(100260) E
K t = 2( ) = 3602 E
35 3
600(1 )
600
Solution
2.c- Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns
Kt Kc
K ec =
Kt + Kc
3602 E (2 2122 E )
K ec = = 1948 E
3602 E + 2122 E
Solution
3- Analyse the frame using ETABS to obtain the longitudinal distribution of
moments.
moments
wu = (15)(6) = 90 kN/m
Lecture 3
Equivalent Frame Method
(EFM)
R i Li
i
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Analysis
y of each equivalent
q frame in its entiretyy shall be ppermitted.
Alternatively, for gravity loading, a separate analysis of each floor or
roof with far ends of columns considered fixed shall be permitted.
ACI 13.7.2.5
4- Distribute
4 Di ib the
h obtained
b i d moments in
i the
h transverse
direction using the same DDM procedure
1- Stiffness of Slab Beam Member ((Ksb)):
kEI sb
Ks =
l1
C
Concept off E
Equivalent
i l Column:
C l
The joint rotations for the two cases below can be easily calculated
from structural analysis.
13.2.4.
2.b Stiffness of the Torsional Arms ((Kt)):
Cross section of torsioanl arms
X= min(hb, 4 hf)
9 E cs C
Kt = The summation is for the
c2 3
l 2 (1 ) arms on both sides
l2
0.63x x 3y
C = 1
y 3
K eq
K c1 = K c 2 =
2
When the unfactored live load is variable but does not exceed three-
quarters of the unfactored dead load, or the nature of live load is such that
all
ll panels
l will
ill be
b loaded
l d d simultaneously,
i lt l it shall
h ll be
b permitted
itt d to
t assume
that maximum factored moments occur at all sections with full factored
live
ve load
oad on
o entire
e e slab
s ab system.
sys e .
ACI 13.7.6.2
Example
p
Find and analyze the equivalent 2D frame for a typical storey of the E-W
interior frame of the flat pplate structure shown below. The slab is 25 cm thick.
All columns are 35x35 cm in cross section. Storey height = 3.0 m. Ultimate
distributed load over the slab = 15 kN/m2.
76m
7.6 76m
7.6 76m
7.6 7.6 m
N
6.0 m
6.0 m
6.0 m
6.0 m
Solution
0- Extract a single storey from 3D frame for separate analysis
3.0 m
30m
3.0
Solution
1- Determine the stiffness of the slab beam members
l 2 h s3 600(25) 3
I sb = = = 781250cm 4
12 12
c1 35
= = 0.046
l 1 760
c2 35
= = 0.058
l 2 600
k = 4.047
kEI sb 4.047(781250) E
Ks = = = 4160 E
l1 760
Solution
2.a- Determine the stiffness of the columns
c 2c 13 35(35) 3
Ic = = = 125052cm 4
12 12
l c = 300cm
l u = 300 25 = 275cm
l c 300
= = 1.1
lu 275
t a = t a = 25 / 2 = 12.5
t a 12.5
= = 1.0
t b 12.5
k = 5.09
kEI c
Kc =
lc
5.09(125052) E
Kc = = 2122 E
300
Solution
2.b- Determine the stiffness of the torsional arms
0.63x x 3 y
C = 1
y 3 35cm
0.63(25) (25) 3 35
C = (1 )( ) = 100260cm 4 25cm
35 3
9 E cs C
Kt =
c2 3
l 2 (1 )
l2
9(100260) E
Kt = 2 = 3602 E
600(1 35 ) 3
600
Solution
2.c- Determine the stiffness of the equivalent columns
Kt Kc
K ec =
Kt + Kc
3602 E (2 2122 E )
K ec = = 1948 E
3602 E + 2 2122 E
Solution
3- Analyze the frame using ETABS to obtain the longitudinal distribution of
moments.
moments
wu = (15)(6) = 90 kN/m
Lecture 4
Calculation of earthquake loads using
IBC 2009
PART I
Introduction
Introduction:
Mechanism of Earthquakes:
Introduction:
Tectonic Plates
Introduction:
The focus is the point of initial movement on the fault where slip occurs.
occurs
Seismic waves radiate from the focus. The epicenter is the point on the
earths surface directly above the focus.
Introduction:
Strike-slip fault
Introduction:
Normal fault
Introduction:
Thrust fault
Introduction:
Effects of earthquakes on structures
Introduction:
Introduction:
Basic structural dynamics
Introduction:
Basic structural dynamics
Introduction:
Basic structural dynamics
Introduction:
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:
Introduction:
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:
Introduction:
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:
3 Model
M d l Codes
C d iin th
the U
U.S.
S
Introduction:
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:
I
International
i l Building
B ildi Code (IBC) published by International
C d (IBC):
Code Council (2000 ,1st edition). To replace the 3 model codes for
national and international use.
Introduction:
Methods of analysis
Introduction:
Equivalent lateral force analysis:
PART II
Determination of base
shear
V = CS W
The base shear is a percentage, CS of the total dead load W.
Seismic Response
p Coefficient CS
The IBC and UBC provisions are based on consideration of the site
conditions of the structure and application of maximum considered
earthquake ground motion maps for site class B.
Seismic Response
p Coefficient CS
To calculate the seismic response coefficient, the following must first be
obtained:
Fv
Ss & S1, must be modified for the soil conditions at the site. The
maximum considered earthquake spectral response accelerations adjusted
f site
for it class
l effects,
ff t are:
S MS = FaS s
S M 1 = Fv S 1
2
S DS = S MS
3
2
S D1 = S M 1
3
Determination of base shear:
T = C t hn x
hn = The height of the building in meter above the base to the highest
level of the structure.
PART III
Vertical distribution of
seismic loads
Fx = C vxV
where
h
w x hx k
C vx = n
i i
w h
i =1
k
wi,w
wx= the portion of the dead load at or assigned to level i or x
hi,hx= height above the base to level i or x
k = an exponent
p related to the buildingg pperiod as follows:
For buildings with T0.5 seconds, k=1.0.
If T2.5 seconds, k=2.0.
For
F bbuildings
ildi with
ith a period
i d between
b t 0 5 andd 2.5
0.5 2 5 seconds,
d it may be
b taken
t k
as 2.0 or determined by linear interpolation between 1.0 and 2.0:
Overturning moment
n
M x = Fi (hi hx )
i =x
PART IV
Horizontal distribution of
seismic loads
ey
Ly
Center of mass:
L
C.M
xm =
xW ym =
yW ex
W W yr
Center of rigidity:
x
xr =
x x I xi yr =
yII yj xr
I xi I yj Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
Torsional eccentricityy
The stiffnesses of structural members may y
change causing a relocation of the CR.
Therefore the IBC imposes an accidental
Therefore, Lx
minimum eccentricity that must be added to
the calculated eccentricity.
C.R
e min,x = 0.05L x
Vx
ey
i y = 0.05L y
Ly
e min,
L
ex C.M
etx = e x e min,x
yr
= x m x r 0.05L x
etyt = e y e min,
i y x
= y m y r 0.05L y xr
Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
Torsional moment
M Tx =V x ety y
Lx
M Ty =V y etx
C.R
Torsional stiffness of all walls
Vx
ey
K t = I xii x i + I yjj y j
Ly
2 2
L
i j ex C.M
yr
x
xr
Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
Vx
ey
Ly
Fyj = Fvj FTj ex C.M
I xj M Ty I xj x j
Fyj = Vy
I xj Kt yr
x
xr
Vy
W3 W1 W3 W1 W3 W1
C.R C.R C.R MTx
ey
ey
ey
Vx
= +
Ly
W2 W2 W2
Fv2 FT2
Fx 1 = Fv 1 FT 1 Fx 2 = Fv 2 + FT 2
Reduce M Tx by using: etx = e x + e min,x
etx = e x e min,x
PART V
Example
Example
Determine the EQ induced forces in walls W1 and W2 acting in their principal
di ti Th
direction. The walls
ll are partt off a residential
id ti l building
b ildi to
t be
b built
b ilt in
i Gaza
G City.
Cit The
Th
2
floor dead load is 9 kN/m . The thickness of all shear walls = 30 cm.
6 3@18m
6m 3@18
W1
3m6sstory
6m3@118m W2
Elevation
4m
Plan
Example
p
Part I: Base shear calculation
1- Ss and S1: Mapped spectral accelerations
1
Ss = 1.24g
S1 = 0.56g
Site class D
Fa = 1.0
Fv = 1.5
Fv
Example
5- SDS and SD1: Maximum earthquake
q spectral
p response
p accelerations
2 2
S DS = S MS = 1.24 g = 0.83g
3 3
2 2
S D 1 = S M 1 = 0.84 g = 0.56 g
3 3
R=6
Example
7- Seismic Use Group:
Example
9- CT and x : factors for calculating the fundamental period
Ct = 0.055 x = 3/4
Example
10- Ta: Approximate fundamental period:
S DS 0 83
0.83
CS = = = 0.138 Controls
R / I 6 /1.0
S D1 0.56
C s ,max = = = 0.19
T (R / I ) 0.48(6 /1)
S DS S D1
0.044S DS I = 0.036 C S = = 0.138 = 0.19
R /I T (R / I )
Example
12- V : Design Base Shear
w i = 18 18 9 = 2916kN
W = 6 2916 = 17496kN
V = C sW = 0.138 17496 = 2410kN
T = 0.48 k = 1.0
Example
Part II: Vertical distribution of seismic loads
Floor wi hi wihik w x hx k Fx Vx Mx
n
w
i =1
h
i i
k
6 2916 18 . . 0 0
5 2916 15 . . . .
4 2916 12 . . . .
3 2916 9 .
.
.
.
2 2916 6 . . . .
1 2916 3 . . . .
0 0 0 0 0 0
. .
17496 183708
Example
Part II: Vertical distribution of seismic loads
n
M x = Fi (hi hx )
i =x
6
M 6 = 1 Fi ( hi h6 ) = F6 (h6 h6 ) = 0
i =6
6
M 5 = 1 Fi ( hi h5 ) = F5 (h5 h5 ) + F6 (h6 h5 )
i =5
= 0 + 688.73(3) = 2066.2kN .m
6
M 4 = 1 Fi ( hi h4 ) = F4 (h4 h4 ) + F5 (h5 h4 ) + F6 (h6 h4 )
i =4
= 0 + 573.94(3)
573 94(3) + 688.73(6)
688 73(6) = 5854.2
5854 2kN
kN .m
#
Example
Part III: Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
W1
Center of mass:
ym =
yW =
18
= 9m
W 2
Center of rigidity:
yr =
yI yj
Ii =
bi l i 3 yr
I yj 12 W2
ety = e y e min, y
ey
= y m y r 0.05L y
= 9 13.9 0.9 = 4m ; 5.8m
W2
K t = I yj y j 2 = 1749.6m 6
j
Fxi = Fv 1 FTi
I yi M Tx I yi y i
Fxi = Vx
I yi Kt
M Tx =V x ety
Example
Part III: Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
Fv11 FT1
Lx
W1 W1 W1
CR
C.R C.R C.R
Vx
ey
ey
ey
C.M Ly
= + MTx
W2 W2 W2
Fv2 FT2
1.66
1 (2410 5.8)0
5 8)0
Fx 2 = 2410 + = 551kN Forces are added use = 5.8 m
7 1749.6
Lecture 4
Calculation of earthquake loads using
IBC 2009
PART I
Introduction
Introduction:
Mechanism of Earthquakes:
Introduction:
Tectonic Plates
Introduction:
The focus is the point of initial movement on the fault where slip occurs.
occurs
Seismic waves radiate from the focus. The epicenter is the point on the
earths surface directly above the focus.
Introduction:
Strike-slip fault
Introduction:
Normal fault
Introduction:
Thrust fault
Introduction:
Effects of earthquakes on structures
Introduction:
Introduction:
Basic structural dynamics
Introduction:
Basic structural dynamics
Introduction:
Basic structural dynamics
Introduction:
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:
Introduction:
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:
Introduction:
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:
3 Model
M d l Codes
C d iin th
the U
U.S.
S
Introduction:
Building Codes, Standards, and Specifications:
I
International
i l Building
B ildi Code (IBC) published by International
C d (IBC):
Code Council (2000 ,1st edition). To replace the 3 model codes for
national and international use.
Introduction:
Methods of analysis
Introduction:
Equivalent lateral force analysis:
PART II
Determination of base
shear
V = CS W
The base shear is a percentage, CS of the total dead load W.
Seismic Response
p Coefficient CS
The IBC and UBC provisions are based on consideration of the site
conditions of the structure and application of maximum considered
earthquake ground motion maps for site class B.
Seismic Response
p Coefficient CS
To calculate the seismic response coefficient, the following must first be
obtained:
Fv
Ss & S1, must be modified for the soil conditions at the site. The
maximum considered earthquake spectral response accelerations adjusted
f site
for it class
l effects,
ff t are:
S MS = FaS s
S M 1 = Fv S 1
2
S DS = S MS
3
2
S D1 = S M 1
3
Determination of base shear:
T = C t hn x
hn = The height of the building in meter above the base to the highest
level of the structure.
PART III
Vertical distribution of
seismic loads
Fx = C vxV
where
h
w x hx k
C vx = n
i i
w h
i =1
k
wi,w
wx= the portion of the dead load at or assigned to level i or x
hi,hx= height above the base to level i or x
k = an exponent
p related to the buildingg pperiod as follows:
For buildings with T0.5 seconds, k=1.0.
If T2.5 seconds, k=2.0.
For
F bbuildings
ildi with
ith a period
i d between
b t 0 5 andd 2.5
0.5 2 5 seconds,
d it may be
b taken
t k
as 2.0 or determined by linear interpolation between 1.0 and 2.0:
Overturning moment
n
M x = Fi (hi hx )
i =x
PART IV
Horizontal distribution of
seismic loads
ey
Ly
Center of mass:
L
C.M
xm =
xW ym =
yW ex
W W yr
Center of rigidity:
x I yI x
xr = x xi
yr = yj
I xi I yj
xr
Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
Torsional eccentricityy
The stiffnesses of structural members may y
change causing a relocation of the C.R.
Therefore the IBC imposes an accidental
Therefore, Lx
minimum eccentricity that must be added to
the calculated eccentricity.
C.R
e min,x = 0.05L x
Vx
ey
i y = 0.05L y
Ly
e min,
L
ex C.M
etx = e x e min,x
yr
= x m x r 0.05L x
etyt = e y e min,
i y x
= y m y r 0.05L y xr
Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
y
Torsional moment Lx
M Tx =V x ety
C.R
M Ty =V y etx Vx
ey
Ly
L
ex C.M
yr
x
xr
Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
i j
W3, Ix3
y2
C.R
Vx
C.M
For the example of walls shown in the plan:
K t = I x 3 x 3 2 + I y 1 y 12 + I y 2 y 2 2 y1
W1 Iy1
W1, x
Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
Vx
ey
Ly
Fyj = Fvj FTj ex C.M
I xj M Ty I xj x j
Fyj = Vy
I xj Kt yr
x
K t = I xi x i 2 + I yj y j 2 xr
i j Vy
W3 W1 W3 W1 W3 W1
C.R C.R C.R
MTx
ey
ey
ey
Vx
= +
Ly
W2 W2 W2
Fv2 FT2
Fx 1 = Fv 1 FT 1 Fx 2 = Fv 2 + FT 2
Reduce M Tx by using: etx = e x + e min,x
etx = e x e min,x
PART V
Example
Example
Determine the EQ induced forces in walls W1 and W2 acting in their strong principal
di ti Th
direction. The walls
ll are partt off a residential
id ti l building
b ildi to
t be
b built
b ilt in
i Gaza
G City.
Cit The
Th
2
floor dead load is 9 kN/m . The thickness of all shear walls = 30 cm.
6 3@18m
6m 3@18
W1
3m6sstory
6m3@118m
W4 W3
W2
Elevation
4m
Plan
Example
p
Part I: Base shear calculation
1- Ss and S1: Mapped spectral accelerations
1
Ss = 1.24g
S1 = 0.56g
Site class D
Fa = 1.0
Fv = 1.5
Fv
Example
5- SDS and SD1: Maximum earthquake
q spectral
p response
p accelerations
2 2
S DS = S MS = 1.24 g = 0.83g
3 3
2 2
S D 1 = S M 1 = 0.84 g = 0.56 g
3 3
R=6
Example
7- Seismic Use Group:
Example
9- CT and x : factors for calculating the fundamental period
Ct = 0.055 x = 3/4
Example
10- Ta: Approximate fundamental period:
S DS 0 83
0.83
CS = = = 0.138 Controls
R / I 6 /1.0
S D1 0.56
C s ,max = = = 0.19
T (R / I ) 0.48(6 /1)
S DS S D1
0.044S DS I = 0.036 C S = = 0.138 = 0.19
R /I T (R / I )
Example
12- V : Design Base Shear
w i = 18 18 9 = 2916kN
W = 6 2916 = 17496kN
V = C sW = 0.138 17496 = 2410kN
T = 0.48 k = 1.0
Example
Part II: Vertical distribution of seismic loads
Floor wi hi wihik w x hx k Fx Vx Mx
n
w
i =1
h
i i
k
6 2916 18 . . 0 0
5 2916 15 . . . .
4 2916 12 . . . .
3 2916 9 .
.
.
.
2 2916 6 . . . .
1 2916 3 . . . .
0 0 0 0 0 0
. .
17496 183708
Example
Part II: Vertical distribution of seismic loads
n
M x = Fi (hi hx )
i =x
6
M 6 = 1 Fi ( hi h6 ) = F6 (h6 h6 ) = 0
i =6
6
M 5 = 1 Fi ( hi h5 ) = F5 (h5 h5 ) + F6 (h6 h5 )
i =5
= 0 + 688.73(3) = 2066.2kN .m
6
M 4 = 1 Fi ( hi h4 ) = F4 (h4 h4 ) + F5 (h5 h4 ) + F6 (h6 h4 )
i =4
= 0 + 573.94(3)
573 94(3) + 688.73(6)
688 73(6) = 5854.2
5854 2kN
kN .m
#
Example
Part III: Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
W1
Center of mass:
ym =
yW =
18
= 9m
W 2 W4 W3
Center of rigidity:
yr =
yI yj
Ii =
bi l i 3 yr
I yj 12 W2
Wall y b L Iy yIy
. . . 97.2
. . yr = = 13.9
13 9m
7
SUM .
Example
Part III: Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
ety = e y e min, y
ey
W4 W3
= y m y r 0.05L y
= 9 13.9 0.9 = 4m ; 5.8m
W2
K t = I xi x i 2 + I yj y j 2
i j
0.3 63 0.3 43
I y1 = Ix 3 = Ix 4 = = 5.4m 4 Iy2 = = 1.6m 4
12 12
y 2 = y r = 13.9m
y 1 = 18 y r = 4.1m
x 3 = x 4 = 18 / 2 = 9m (due
(d tot symmetry)
t )
W1 W1 W1
CR
C.R C.R C.R
Vx W4 W3
ey
ey
W3
ey
W3 W4
C.M Ly
= W4
+ MTx
W2 W2 W2
I yi M Tx I yi y i Fv2 FT2
Fxi = Vx
I yi Kt M Tx =V x ety
5.4 (2410 4)5.4 4.1 Forces are subtracted use e = 4 m
Fx 1 = 2410 = 1692kN
7 1275
1.6 (2410 5.8)1.6 13.9
Fx 2 = 2410 + = 794kN Forces are added use e = 5.8 m
7 1275
Reinforced Concrete Design
g III
Lecture 5
Calculation of wind loads using IBC 2009
PART I
Introduction
Introduction:
Wind loads come from the kinetic energy in the airflow converted to
pressure on the structure.
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Wind speed and pressure change with height and terrain, and this is accounted
for by the factor Kz.
Introduction:
Introduction:
Introduction:
Methods of analysis:
Method 1: Simplified procedure
Method 2: Analytical procedure
M h d 3:
Method 3 Wind
Wi d tunnell procedure
d
Introduction:
Methods of analysis:
Method 1: Simplified procedure
Introduction:
Methods of analysis:
Method 2: Analytical procedure
Introduction:
Methods of analysis:
Method 3: Wind tunnel procedure
PART II
Determination of wind
pressure
Determination of wind p
pressure:
Design
g pprocedure
Determination of wind p
pressure:
Design
g pprocedure
Determination of wind p
pressure:
in any direction.
Determination of wind p
pressure:
Determination of wind p
pressure:
Determination of wind p
pressure:
Determination of wind p
pressure:
7- The wind directionality factor, Kd :
Determination of wind p
pressure:
Determination of wind p
pressure:
Determination of wind p
pressure:
9- The velocity pressure exposure coefficient, Kz:
Determination of wind p
pressure:
q z = 0.613K z K zt K dV 2 I
Determination of wind p
pressure:
12- Design
g wind ppressure
p = qqGC p q i (GC pi )
where
q = qz is the velocity pressure evaluated at height z above the ground
on the windward wall, or q = qh the pressure (suction) on the roof,
leeward walls, and sidewalls, evaluate at the mean roof height, h,
qi is the internal pressure or suction on the interior of the walls and
roof of the building evaluate at the mean roof height,
G = gust effect factor,
Cp = external
t l pressure coefficient,
ffi i t andd
(GCpi ) = internal pressure coefficient.
Determination of wind p
pressure:
12- Design
g wind ppressure
p = qqGC p q i (GC pi )
Therefore
q
Windward:
q = qz
Leeward:
q = qh
qi = qh
Determination of wind p
pressure:
12- Design
g wind ppressure
p = qqGC p q i (GC pi )
Therefore
Windward:
p = q z GC p q h (GC pi )
Leeward:
p = q hGC p q h (GC ppi )
Determination of wind p
pressure:
Load combinations
PART V
Example
Example
Determine the wind forces in walls W1 and W2 acting in their principal
strong direction. The walls are part of a residential building to be built in
Gaza City. The thickness of all shear walls = 30 cm.
6 3@18
6m3@18m
W1
3m6sstory
6m3@118m W2
Elevation
4m
Plan
Example
p
1- Basic wind speed V:
V = 40 m/s
2- Exposure terrain
Terrain B (may also conservatively consider terrain D)
3- Occupancy category:
C t
Category II
4 Importance
4- I factor,
f I:
I = 1.00
Example
p
G = 0.85
Kd = 0.85
Example
p
Example
p
10- External pressure coefficient, Cp:
L/B = 18/18 = 1
q z = 0.613
0 613K z K zt K dV 2 I
12- Design
g wind ppressure
p = qGC p q h (GC pi )
Example
p
Leeward Side:
q z = 0.613K z K zt K dV 2 I
q18 = 0.613(0.85)(1.0)(0.85)(40)
( )( )( )( ) 2 ((1.0)) = 709N / m 2
p = q hGC p q h (GC pi )
p = 709(0.85)( 0.5) 709(0.18) = 429; 174N / m 2
USE :
p = 0.429 kN / m 2
Force in each wall = pressure x height of building x tributary width
F = 0.429 18 18 / 2 = 69.45kN
Example
Leeward Side:
Tributary area
6 3@18
6m3@18m
W1
Tributary hheight
6m3@118m
Tributaryy width
T
W2
Elevation
4m
Plan
q z = 0.613K z K zt K dV 2 I
Example
p p = q z GC p q h (GC pi )
Windward Side: GCpi = + 0.18; - 0.18
Height
H i ht Height
H i ht F
Force F
Force
qz p+ p- max p
Level of top of level Kz in wall 1 in wall 2
(N/m2) (N/m2) (N/m2) (kN/m2)
(m) (m) (kN) (kN)
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
.
. .
.
. .
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
.
.
. .
. .
.
.
.
Sum . .
Example
p
Pressure distribution:
0.61 kN/m2
0.59 kN/m2
/ 2
0.56 kN/m
0.53 kN/m2
0.429 kN/m2
0.50 kN/m2
0.48 kN/m2
0.45 kN/m2
Force in each level = max pressure at the level x height of the level x tributary width
15.40 kN
15.88 kN
15.62 kN
7.10 kN 69.45 kN
6.79 kN
6.49 kN
18.72 kN
Lecture 6
Calculation of earthquake loads using
UBC 97
PART I
Introduction
M th d off analysis:
Methods l i
The following are methods provided by the UBC-97:
Simplified Static
The simplified static lateral-force procedure may be used for the following
structures off Occupancy Category 4 or 5:
Buildings of any occupancy (including single-family dwellings) not more than
three stories in height excluding basements that use light-frame construction.
Other buildings not more than two stories in height excluding basements.
Static
The static lateral force procedure may be used for the following structures:
All structures, regular or irregular, in Seismic Zone 1 and in Occupancy
Categories 4 and 5 in Seismic Zone 2.2
Regular structures under 73.152 m in height.
Irregular structures not more than five stories or 19.812 m in height (Section
4 3 1 4)
4.3.1.4)
Methods of analysis:
Dynamic
The dynamic lateral-force procedure shall be used for all other structures,
including the following:
Structures 73.152 m or more in height.
Structures having a stiffness, weight or geometric vertical irregularity of Type 1, 2
or 3, or structures having irregular features.
Structures over five stories 19.812 m in height
g in Seismic Zones 3 and 4 not
having the same structural system throughout their .
Structures, regular or irregular, located on Soil Profile Type S that has a period
F
Regular vs
vs. irregular structures
Regular structures
R l structures have
Regular h no significant
i ifi physical
h i l discontinuities
di i i i ini plan
l or vertical
i l
configuration or in their lateral-force-resisting systems such as the irregular
features described in the following slides.
Irregular structures
Structures having
g anyy of the features listed in Table 16-L or 16-M.
Regular vs
vs. irregular structures
Irregular structures
Stiffness Irregularities
Regular vs
vs. irregular structures
Irregular structures
Regular vs
vs. irregular structures
Irregular structures
Re-entrant Corners
Regular vs
vs. irregular structures
Irregular structures
Nonparallel Systems
Diaphragm discontinuity
Regular vs
vs. irregular structures
Irregular structures
Torsional Irregularities
PART II
Determination of base
shear
Base shear V
To calculate the seismic base shear, the following must be obtained:
When the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail to determine the site
class, Soil profile SD shall be used unless the building official or geotechnical data
determines that Site Class E or F soil is likely to be present at the site.
Cv
T = C t hn 3 / 4
hn = The height of the building in meter above the base to the highest
level of the structure.
Ct = 0.0853
0 0853 for steel moment
moment-resisting
resisting frames.
frames
0.0731 for reinforced concrete moment-resisting frames.
0.0731 for eccentric braced frames.
0.0488 for all other buildings.
W : The total seismic dead load and applicable portions of other loads listed
below.
1 In storage and warehouse occupancies,
1. occupancies a minimum of 25 percent of the floor
live load shall be applicable.
2. Where a partition load is used in the floor design, a load of not less than 0.50
kN/ 2 shall
kN/m h ll be
b included.
i l d d
3. Total weight of permanent equipment shall be included.
8- V: Base shear
The seismic response coefficient is determined from the
formula:
Cv I
V = W
RT
The total design base shear need not exceed the following
2.5C a I
V max = W
R
The total design base shear shall not be less than the following:
Vmin = 0.11 Ca IW
PART III
Vertical distribution of
seismic loads
n
V = Ft + Fi
i =1
The remaining portion of the total base shear (V-Ft) is distributed over
the height including the top by the formula
(w x hx )
Fx = (V Ft ). n
w
i =1
i hi
i=6 F6 + Ft
i=5
hi Wx
i=4
i=3 Fx
W1
h4 i=2
hx
i=1
h1
Overturning moment
The overturning moment M at storey x (Mx) is given by the
following equation:
n
M x = Ft (hn hx ) + Fi (hi hx )
i =x
PART IV
Horizontal distribution of
seismic loads
ey
Ly
Center of mass:
L
C.M
xm =
xW ym =
yW ex
W W yr
Center of rigidity:
x I yI x
xr = x xi
yr = yj
I xi I yj
xr
Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
Torsional eccentricityy
The stiffnesses of structural members may y
change causing a relocation of the C.R.
Therefore the IBC imposes an accidental
Therefore, Lx
minimum eccentricity that must be added to
the calculated eccentricity.
C.R
e min,x = 0.05L x
Vx
ey
i y = 0.05L y
Ly
e min,
L
ex C.M
etx = e x e min,x
yr
= x m x r 0.05L x
etyt = e y e min,
i y x
= y m y r 0.05L y xr
Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
y
Torsional moment Lx
M Tx =V x ety
C.R
M Ty =V y etx Vx
ey
Ly
L
ex C.M
yr
x
xr
Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
i j
W3, Ix3
y2
C.R
Vx
C.M
For the example of walls shown in the plan:
K t = I x 3 x 3 2 + I y 1 y 12 + I y 2 y 2 2 y1
W1 Iy1
W1, x
Vy
Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
Vx
ey
Ly
Fyj = Fvj FTj ex C.M
I xj M Ty I xj x j
Fyj = Vy
I xj Kt yr
x
K t = I xi x i 2 + I yj y j 2 xr
i j Vy
W3 W1 W3 W1 W3 W1
C.R C.R C.R
MTx
ey
ey
ey
Vx
= +
Ly
W2 W2 W2
Fv2 FT2
Fx 1 = Fv 1 FT 1 Fx 2 = Fv 2 + FT 2
Reduce M Tx by using: etx = e x + e min,x
etx = e x e min,x
PART V
Example
Example
Determine the EQ induced forces in walls W1 and W2 acting in their strong principal
di ti Th
direction. The walls
ll are partt off a residential
id ti l building
b ildi to
t be
b built
b ilt in
i Gaza
G City.
Cit The
Th
2
floor dead load is 9 kN/m . The thickness of all shear walls = 30 cm.
6 3@18m
6m 3@18
W1
3m6sstory
6m3@118m
W4 W3
W2
Elevation
4m
Plan
Example
p
Part I: Base shear calculation
SD
Example
p
3- Ca and Cv: Seismic coefficients
Ca= 0.22
Cv= 0.32
Ca
Cv
Example
p
4- Structural system coefficient, R
R = 5.5
55
Example
p
5- I: occupancy importance factor
I = 1.0
10
Example
p
6- Ta: Approximate fundamental period:
T = C t hn 3 / 4 = 0.0488(18)3 / 4 = 0.43sec
7 W:
7- W Total
T t l Dead
D d Load
L d
w i = 18 18 9 = 2916kN
W = 6 2916 = 17496kN
8- V: Base shear
Cv I 0 .3 2 1 .0
V = W = 17496 = 2387k N
RT 5 .5 0 .4 3
2 .5C a I 2 .5 0 .2 2 1 .0
V m ax = W = 17496 = 1750k N
R 5 .5
V m in = 0 .1 1C a IW = 0 .1 1 0 .2 2 1 .0 1 7 4 9 6 = 4 2 3 k N
V = 1 7 5 0 k N
Example
Part II: Vertical distribution of seismic loads
(w x hx ) (w x hx )
Fx = (V Ft ). n
=V . n
w
i =1
i hi w
i =1
i hi
Note:
If Ft was not 0.0, the extra force at the top would be
calculated and added to F6
Example
Part II: Vertical distribution of seismic loads
Floor wi hi wihi w x hx Fx Vx Mx
n
w
i =1
i hi
6 2916 18 . . 0 0
5 2916 15 . . . .
4 2916 12 . . . .
3 2916 9 .
.
. .
2 2916 6 . . . .
1 2916 3 . . .
0 0 0 0 0 .
.
7496 183708
Example
Part II: Vertical distribution of seismic loads
n n
M x = Ft ( hn hx ) + Fi ( hi hx ) = Fi ( hi hx )
i =x i =x
6
M 6 = Fi ( hi h6 ) = F6 (h6 h6 ) = 0
i =6
6
M 5 = Fi ( hi h5 ) = F5 (h5 h5 ) + F6 ( h6 h5 )
i =5
= 0 + 499.89(3) = 1499.7 kN .m
6
M 4 = Fi ( hi h4 ) = F4 (h4 h4 ) + F5 (h5 h4 ) + F6 ( h6 h4 )
i =4
Example
Part III: Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
W1
Center of mass:
ym =
yW =
18
= 9m
W 2 W4 W3
Center of rigidity:
yr =
yI yj
Ii =
bi l i 3 yr
I yj 12 W2
Wall y b L Iy yIy
. . . 97.2
. . yr = = 13.9
13 9m
7
SUM .
Example
Part III: Horizontal distribution of seismic loads
ety = e y e min, y
ey
W4 W3
= y m y r 0.05L y
= 9 13.9 0.9 = 4m ; 5.8m
W2
K t = I xi x i 2 + I yj y j 2
i j
0.3 63 0.3 43
I y1 = Ix 3 = Ix 4 = = 5.4m 4 Iy2 = = 1.6m 4
12 12
y 2 = y r = 13.9m
y 1 = 18 y r = 4.1m
x 3 = x 4 = 18 / 2 = 9m (due
(d tot symmetry)
t )
W1 W1 W1
CR
C.R C.R C.R
Vx W4 W3
ey
ey
W3
ey
W3 W4
C.M Ly
= W4
+ MTx
W2 W2 W2
I yi M Tx I yi y i Fv2 FT2
Fxi = Vx
I yi Kt M Tx =V x ety
5.4 (1750 4)5.4 4.1 Forces are subtracted use e = 4 m
Fx 1 = 1750 = 1229kN
7 1275
1.6 (1750 5.8)1.6 13.9
Fx 2 = 1750 + = 577 kN Forces are added use e = 5.8 m
7 1275
Reinforced Concrete Design
g III
Lecture 7
Calculation of wind loads using UBC 97
PART I
Introduction
Introduction:
UBC procedures for wind load calculations:
Introduction:
In mph:
Introduction:
UBC procedures for wind load calculations:
Any building, including those not covered by the UBC, may be designed
using wind-tunnel test results.
Introduction:
Determination of wind p
pressure:
Design
g pprocedure
Determination of wind p
pressure:
Determination of wind p
pressure:
(m)
- .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Determination of wind p
pressure:
Determination of wind p
pressure:
6- Wind stagnation
g ppressure, qs:
q s = 0.613V 2
pressure, p:
7 Design wind pressure
7-
P = C eC q q s I w
Determination of wind p
pressure:
Load combinations
PART III
Example
Example
Determine the wind forces in walls W1 and W2 acting in their principal strong
di ti The
direction. Th wallsll are partt off a residential
id ti l building
b ildi to
t be
b built
b ilt in
i Gaza
G City.
Cit The
Th
thickness of all shear walls = 30 cm.
6 3@18
6m3@18m
W1
3m6sstory
6m3@118m
W2
Elevation
4m
Plan
Example
p
1- Basic wind speed V:
V = 35 m/s
2- Exposure category:
Example
p
4- Combined height,
g , exposure
p and ggust factor coefficient,, Ce:
(m)
- .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Example
p
5- The pressure coefficient, Cq:
Example
p
6- Wind stagnation pressure, qs:
7 Design
7- i d pressure, p:
D i wind
P = C eC q q s I w
Leeward Side:
P = 0.95
0 95 00.5
5 751 11.0
0 = 357 N / m 2
Force in each wall= pressure x height of building x tributary width
F = 0.357 18 18 / 2 = 58kN
Windward Side:
P = C e 0.8
0 8 751 1.0
1 0 = 601C e N / m 2
Force in each wall = pressure x height of building x tributary width
F = 0.601C e 18 18 / 2 = 97.32C e kN
Example
Tributary area
6 3@18
6m3@18m
W1
Tributary hheight
6m3@118m
Tributaryy width
T
W2
Elevation
4m
Plan
Example
p
Windward Side:
Height Height Force Force
P
Level of top of level Ce in wall 1 in wall 2
(N/m2)
(m) (m) (kN) (kN)
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . .
. . . . .
Sum
.
.
Example
p
Pressure distribution:
0 571 kN/m2
0.571
0 508 kN/m2
0.508
0.457 kN/m2
0.357 kN/m2
0.433 kN/m2
0.403 kN/m2
0.373 kN/m2
Force in each level = max pressure at the level x height of the level x tributary width
15 40 kN
15.40
14.08
14 08 kN
6.16 kN 58 kN
5.84 kN
5.43 kN
15.42 kN
Lecture 7
Calculation of wind loads using UBC 97
PART I
Introduction
Introduction:
UBC procedures for wind load calculations:
Introduction:
In mph:
Introduction:
UBC procedures for wind load calculations:
Any building, including those not covered by the UBC, may be designed
using wind-tunnel test results.
Introduction:
Determination of wind p
pressure:
Design
g pprocedure
Determination of wind p
pressure:
Determination of wind p
pressure:
(m)
- .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Determination of wind p
pressure:
Determination of wind p
pressure:
6- Wind stagnation
g ppressure, qs:
q s = 0.613V 2
pressure, p:
7 Design wind pressure
7-
P = C eC q q s I w
Determination of wind p
pressure:
Load combinations
PART III
Example
Example
Determine the wind forces in walls W1 and W2 acting in their principal strong
di ti Th
direction. The walls
ll are partt off a residential
id ti l building
b ildi to
t be
b built
b ilt in
i Gaza
G City.
Cit The
Th
thickness of all shear walls = 30 cm.
6 3@18
6m3@18m
W1
3m6sstory
6m3@118m
W2
Elevation
4m
Plan
Example
p
1- Basic wind speed V:
V = 35 m/s
2- Exposure category:
Example
p
4- Combined height,
g , exposure
p and ggust factor coefficient,, Ce:
(m)
- .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Example
p
5- The pressure coefficient, Cq:
Example
p
6- Wind stagnation pressure, qs:
7 Design
7- i d pressure, p:
D i wind
P = C eC q q s I w
Leeward Side:
P = 0.95
0 95 00.5
5 751 11.0
0 = 357 N / m 2
Force in each wall= pressure x height of building x tributary width
F = 0.357 18 18 / 2 = 58kN
Windward Side:
P = C e 0.8
0 8 751 1.0
1 0 = 601C e N / m 2
Force in each wall = pressure x height of level x tributary width
Tributary area
6 3@18
6m3@18m
W1
Tributary hheight
6m3@118m
Tributaryy width
T
W2
Elevation
4m
Plan
Example
p
Windward Side:
Height Height Force Force
P
Level of top of level Ce in wall 1 in wall 2
(N/m2)
(m) (m) (kN) (kN)
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . .
. . . . .
Sum
.
.
Example
p
Pressure distribution:
0 571 kN/m2
0.571
0 508 kN/m2
0.508
0.457 kN/m2
0.357 kN/m2
0.433 kN/m2
0.403 kN/m2
0.373 kN/m2
Force in each level = max pressure at the level x height of the level x tributary width
15 40 kN
15.40
14.08
14 08 kN
6.16 kN 58 kN
5.84 kN
5.43 kN
15.42 kN
Lecture 8
Design of Shear Walls
PART I
Introduction
Part I:
Structural walls:
Structural walls are walls proportioned to resist combinations of shears,
moments, and axial forces. A shear wall is a structural wall.
- The way the wall supports and braces the rest of the structure.
Part I:
T
Types off structural
t t l walls:
ll
Bearing walls:
These are walls that are laterally supported and braced by the rest of the
structure, that resist primarily in-plane vertical loads acting downward
on the top of the wall. The vertical load may act eccentrically with
respect to the wall thickness causing weak axis bending.
Part I:
Shear walls:
Walls that primarily resist lateral loads due to wind or earthquakes acting
on the building and acting parallel to the plane of the wall are called
shear walls. These walls often provide lateral bracing to the rest of the
structure. They resist gravity loads transferred to them by the parts of
th structure
the t t tributary
t ib t to
t the
th wall,ll plus
l the
th lateral
l t l loads
l d andd moments t
about strong axis of the wall.
Part I:
T
Types off structural
t t l walls:
ll
Nonbearingg walls:
Walls that do not support gravity in-plane loads other than their own
weight.
g These walls mayy resist shears and moments due to pressures
p or
loads acting on one or both sides of the wall. Examples are basement
walls and retaining walls used to resist lateral soil pressures.
Part I:
Wall assemblies:
They are groups of walls that are interconnected to act as a single member
to resist lateral forces. Their three
three-dimensional
dimensional shape serves to enclose
stairwells and elevator shafts.
Part I:
Tilt-up walls:
These are very slender
Th l d wallsll that
h are cast in i a horizontal
h i l position
i i adjacent
dj
to the structure. They are then tilted into their intended vertical
position and fastened to the foundation, to the roof or floor diaphragm,
and to the adjacent panels. They are designed to resist vertical and
lateral loads.
Part I:
L d combinations
Load bi ti
Part I:
1- Critical combination for combined (axial load and moment)
normal stress calculations:
For axial load: U = 1.2D + 1.0Ev + 1.0L (9-5)
For moment: U = 1.0Eh (9-5)
where:
Ev = 0.2SDSD
Eh = QE
= the reliability factor (see next slide)
QE = the effect of horizontal seismic forces
Note: Combo 9-5 controls for this analysis for giving maximum effect of both axial and bending.
Part I:
Note: Only horizontal shear and horizontal forces contributing to the overturning
moment are involved in these analyses and these are normally causes by wind and EQEQ.
Part I:
Redundancy factor
6.1
6 1
1 = 2 1.5
rmax A B
Part I:
Part I:
Part I:
C
Coupled
l d shear
h walls:
ll
These are shear walls that are connected (coupled) by beams or
slabs or both spanning across a doorway or similar
opening. The two walls act as one solid cantilever if the
coupling-beam stiffness is high. Each wall segment in that
case is
i called
ll d pier.
i
Part I:
Shear wall foundations:
Because tensile uplift stresses are difficult to resist, they should
b avoided.
be id d This
Thi is
i done
d by
b increasing
i i theth size
i off the
th wall
ll
footing. If footing size becomes excessive, possible
solutions are:
Part I:
Part I:
lw
Terminology
hw = height of wall
wall.
h = thickness of wall.
hw
h
PART II
Layout, Size, Drift Control, and
Minimum Wall Reinforcement
Part II:
Layout of buildings with structural walls:
The major considerations in selecting a structural system for a
multistory building with structural walls are:
(1) The building must have enough rigidity to withstand the service loads without
excessive deflections or vibrations.
(2) It is desirable that the wall be loaded with enough vertical load to resist any
uplift of parts of the wall foundations due to lateral walls.
(3) The locations of frames and walls should minimize torsional deformations of
the building about the vertical axis of the building.
(4) The walls must have adequate strength in shear and in combined flexure and
axial loads.
Part II:
Required size of wall:
Initial sizing based on wind induced deflection:
hw = height of wall
By setting the service-load story drift (slope) equal to the maximum
top, the minimum total Ig for the walls parallel
allowable slope at top
to the wind direction is:
Part II:
Required size of wall:
Minimum wall thickness:
h
lw
Part II:
Required size of wall:
When EQ-resistant
Wh EQ i t t construction
t ti i being
is b i considered,
id d it is i tot beb
remembered that the relatively stiff parts of the structure will
attract more forces than will the more flexible parts. A structure
with reinforced shear walls is quite stiff and thus will attract large
EQ forces. If the shear walls are brittle and fail, the rest of the
structure mayy not be able to take the shock. But if the shear walls
are ductile (and they will be if properly reinforced), they will be
very effective in resisting EQ forces.
Part II:
Story Drift Limits:
Story drift:
The difference between the deflections of the center of mass of the top and
bottom of the story considered. Story drift control is important for:
3- Human comfort.
P-delta
P delta effects should be included in the
Part II:
Story Drift Limits:
Story drift:
Part II:
Story Drift Limits:
ACI 11.9.3/4
11 9 3/4
Part II:
Story Drift Limits:
Part II:
Story Drift Limits:
Part II:
Distributed and concentrated reinforcement:
The reinforcement in shear walls is generally made up of:
Part II:
Distributed shear reinforcement:
Shear reinforcement for structural walls always consists of evenly
distributed vertical and horizontal reinforcement. In many cases, shear
cracks are inclined with respect to a horizontal line less than 45 degrees,
so vertical reinforcement is just as effective if not more effective as
horizontal reinforcement.
Part II:
Distributed and concentrated reinforcement:
Reinforcement in two layers:
Acv = lw h
Part II:
Minimum wall reinforcement: ACI 11.9.9
Part II:
Minimum wall reinforcement: ACI 11.9.9
Av , horiz
t ,min = 0.0025
h 2
hs
Maximum spacing h
S1,max = smaller of {lw/3, 45 cm, 3h} lw
S2,max = smaller of {lw/5, 45 cm, 3h}
Notes
hw
If 2 0 l t
2.0
lw
Av ,vert and Av , horiz are for two bars if two curtains are used
Part II:
Ties for vertical reinforcement
PART III
Design of
boundary elements
Part III:
Boundary elements:
Boundary elements are regions at the ends of the cross section of the wall that are
reinforced as columns as given in ACI 21.6.4.4 (with some exceptions), with
the reinforcement enclosed by hoop reinforcement. They generally are thicker
than the walls to give room for concentrated vertical reinforcement that is tied
like a tied column. However, the ACI allows them to have the same thickness
as the
h wall.
ll Boundary
B d elements
l strengthen
h the
h edges
d off the
h walls
ll to resist
i stress
reversals and prevent reinforcement buckling near the edges.
Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
Two methods are provided by the ACI to determine the need for
boundary elements:
(1) Displacement-based approach (ACI 21.9.6.2): This applies to walls that are
effectivelyy continuous from the base of the structure to the top
p of the wall and
are designed to have a single critical section for axial loads and bending at the
base of the wall. In this case, boundary elements are required if:
lw
c> u / hw 0.007
600 (u / hw )
where:
c = depth from the extreme compression fiber to the neutral axis.
lw = horizontal length of the entire wall or of a segment of wall considered in the
direction of the shear force.
u = design
g displacement,
p , defined as the total lateral displacement
p deflection at the
top of the building for the design-basis earthquake.
Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
Two methods are provided by the ACI to determine the need for boundary
elements:
(1) Displacement-based approach (ACI 21.9.6.2): In the vertical direction, the special
boundaryy elements must extend from the critical section a distance ggreater than or
equal to: max{lw ; Mu/4Vu}.
Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
Two methods are provided by the ACI to determine the need for
boundary elements:
(2) Stress-based approach (ACI 21.9.6.3):
I this
In hi case, BE are required
i d if:
if
Pu M u lw
+ 0.2f c '
Ag Ig 2
Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
If special boundary elements are not required by ACI 21.9.6.2/3, then:
(1) If the longitudinal reinforcement ratio at the wall boundary is greater than
2.8/fy, provide boundary elements where the maximum longitudinal spacing of
transverse reinforcement in the boundary element shall not exceed 200 mm.
Otherwise:
needed. Horizontal reinforcement terminating at the
No boundary element is needed
edges of structural walls without boundary elements shall have a standard hook
engaging the edge reinforcement or the edge reinforcement shall be enclosed in
U stirrups having the same size and spacing as
U-stirrups as, and spliced to,
to the horizontal
reinforcement.
Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
ACI 21.9.6.4(b)
In flanged sections:
In flanged sections, the boundary element shall include the effective flange
width in compression and shall extend at least 300 mm into the web.
300 mm
Part III:
Design of longitudinal reinforcement in the boundary
elements:
(c)
Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:
Transverse reinforcement benefits:
(1) To confine the concrete.
(2) To prevent buckling of the compression bars.
(3) To provide adequate shear strength.
(4) To confine
fi lap
l splices.
li
Seismic hook:
A hook on a stirrup, hoop or cross-tie having a bend not less than 135
degrees.
Cross tie:
Continuous reinforcing bar having a seismic hook at one end and a hook
not less than 90 at the other end.
end The 90 degree hooks are alternated
end for end.
Hoop:
A closed tie.
Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:
Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:
Area of hoop and crossties: ACI 21.6.4.4
The total cross-sectional area of rectangular hoop reinforcement, Ash, shall
not be less than required by
Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:
Spacing of hoop and crossties: ACI 21.6.4.3
Spacing of transverse reinforcement s shall not exceed the smallest of:
The value of so shall not exceed 150 mm and need not be taken
less than 100 mm.
Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:
3
o
Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:
Anchorage of horizontal reinforcement of the wall web in the
boundary element:
Horizontal reinforcement in the wall web shall be anchored to develop fy within
the confined core of the boundary element.
AC 21.7.5
ACI 21
For a bar with 90 degree hook:
f y db
5.4 f c
ld
l dh max 8d b
150mm
l d = 3.25l dh
Part III:
General notes
PART IV
Flexural strength analysis of shear walls
Part IV:
M d = M n M u
M d Design moment strength (also known as moment resistance)
Mu Internal ultimate moment
Part IV:
Case 2:
Walls with boundary elements and walls with flanges.
Case 3:
Wall assemblies.
Part IV:
Case 1: Flexural strength of rectangular walls with
uniform reinforcement:
Assumptions:
Part IV:
Case 1: Flexural strength of rectangular walls with
uniform reinforcement:
Derivation of expressions:
A st f y Nu
= =
A h
w fc ' Aw hff c '
Part IV:
Case 1: Flexural strength of rectangular walls with
uniform reinforcement:
Procedure:
A st f y
=
A w h fc '
Nu
=
Aw hf c '
M d = M n M u ?
Part IV:
Case 1: Flexural strength of rectangular walls with
uniform reinforcement:
Load and resistance factors:
Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Examples:
Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Width of flanges for flexural analysis: ACI 21.9.5.2
l
B 1 = min
i 2
0.25hw
Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Flanges for BE design: ACI 21.9.6.4(b)
In flanged sections, the boundary element shall include the effective flange
width in compression and shall extend at least 300 mm into the web.
300 mm
Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Derivation of expressions:
T = As f y
T + Nu
a=
0.85bf c
a l a
M n = T (d ) + N u ( w )
2 2
d = 0.8lw
Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Procedure:
As is based on minimum
reinforcement requirements
or an initial
i iti l guess.
T = As f y
T + Nu
a=
0.85bf c
a l a
M n = T (0.8lw ) + N u ( w )
2 2
Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Reinforcement:
M 1 =0
M 3 =0
T1 T3
As 1 = > A s ,min As 3 = > A s ,min As2 is based on minimum
0.9f y 0.9f y reinforcement requirements.
PART V
Shear strength analysis of shear walls
Part V:
V d = V n V u
Vd Design shear strength (also known as shear resistance)
The -factor for shear is 0.75. However, if shear strength is less than the shear
corresponding
co espo d g too thee development
deve op e ofo thee flexural
e u strength
s e g of w thee -
o thee wall
factor for shear is 0.6.
ACI 9.3.4(a)
Part V:
Vu = Vn
Vu
Vs = V c
Part V:
Case 2:
For 0 50Vc minimum
F Vu 0.50V i i shear
h reinf.
i f is
i required
i d (ACI 11.9.9).
11 9 9)
Case 3:
For Vu < 0.50Vc min. shear reinf. is required (ACI 11.9.9 or ACI 14.3)
.
Part V:
Case 2:
F Vu V
For Vn minimum
i i shear
h reinf.
i f is
i required
i d (ACI 11.9.9).
11 9 9)
.
Summary:
Part V:
(
V n = Acv c f c ' + t f y ) ACI 21.9.4
where c is
0.25 for hw/lw 1.5
0.17 for hw/lw 2
varies linearly between 0.25 & 0.17 for hw/lw between 1.5 & 2
hw = height of entire wall of wall considered
lw = length of entire wall in the direction of shear force
Acv = hlw
.
Part V:
Part V:
ACI 11.9.6
Part V:
Avf yd Av fyd
Vs = s = ACI Eq
Eq. 11-15
11 15
s Vs
h Av = the
where th area off shear
h reinforcement
i f t within
ithi spacing
i s
Part V:
PART VI
Example 1
Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:
Check the shear wall layout against the ASCE-7 code drift limits. Consider
only the E-W direction.
N
6 3@18
6m3@18m
W1
3m6sstory
6m3@118m
W4 W3
W2
Elevation
4m
Plan
Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:
Pu = 3129 = 324 kN
6m3@118m
W4 W3
4m
Plan
Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:
From lecture 4:
I E = 1.0, g
0
0.7 I = 0.7(5.4
0 ( 4 + 1
1.6)
6) = 4
4.9
9 m 4
Floor Fx
6 .
5 .
4 .
3 .
2 .
1 .
.
0 0
Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:
max
Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:
Cd
Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:
From ETABS, the elastic deflections xe are obtained as shown in the table:
Story xe x max
. . . .
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
PART VI
Example 2
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
From the equivalent lateral force analysis, the base shear was
found as V = 3030 kN, and the overturning moment at base as
M = 48150 kN.m.
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
SD1 = 0.15g and SDS = 0.6g From the tables, the seismic design categories are C and D.
Use D
= 1.3
13
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
hlw 3 0.5 83
Ig = = = 21.33m 4
12 12
A g = 8 0.5 = 4m 2
c = lw / 2 = 8 / 2 = 4 m
Pu M u c 38000 103 62600 106 4000
fc = = = 21.3MPa
Ag Ig 4 10 6
21.33 1012
0 2f c = 00.2(30)
f c ,max = 0.2 2(30) = 6MPa < f = 21.3
21 3MPac
Boundary elements are needed.
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
Also h = 50 cm > 25 cm
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
Av , horiz 402
s2 = = =320mm
h (0.0025) 500(0.0025)
Smax = smaller
ll off {l w /5,
/5 45 cm, 3h} 16@30cm
= smaller of { 800/5,45,3(50)}
= smaller of { 160,45,150}
160,45,150}= 45 cm
cm>ss 2
Use 116 @ 30cm at each side of the wall in the horizontal direction
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
(
V n = Acv c f c ' + t f y )
V n = 4 106 0.17 (
0 17 30 + 0.00268
0 00268 420 )
V n = 8227 103 N = 8227 kN
d = 0.8
0 8lw = 6400mm
0.83 f c ' hd = 0.83 30 500 6400 = 14546kN > V n
Wall cross section is adequate
V n = 0.6 8227 kN = 4396kN >V u
f y db f y db 420 16
= = 227 mm
5.4 f c 5.4 f c 5.4 30
l dh max 8d b = max 8(16) = 128mm
150mm 150mm
l dh = 227 mm
l d = 3.25
3 25l dh = 33.25(227)
25(227) = 800mm
Use depth of boundary element le = 1300mm
and width of boundary element bb= 850 mm
l e = 1.3m
bw = 0.5
0 5m b = 0.85
0 85m
lw = 8m
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
Short direction:
bc = 1300 2(40 + 16 / 2) = 1204mm
sb f 100 1204 30 bc
A sh = 0.09 c c = 0.09 = 774mm 2
fy 420
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
Long direction:
bc = 850 2(40
( + 16 / 2)) = 754mm
sb f 100 754 30
A sh = 0.09 c c = 0.09 = 485mm 2
fy 420
bc
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
850 mm
m
500 mm
1300 mm 1300 mm
8000 mm
The end
Lecture 8
Design of Shear Walls
PART I
Introduction
Part I:
Structural walls:
Structural walls are walls proportioned to resist combinations of shears,
moments, and axial forces. A shear wall is a structural wall.
- The way the wall supports and braces the rest of the structure.
Part I:
T
Types off structural
t t l walls:
ll
Bearing walls:
These are walls that are laterally supported and braced by the rest of the
structure, that resist primarily in-plane vertical loads acting downward
on the top of the wall. The vertical load may act eccentrically with
respect to the wall thickness causing weak axis bending.
Part I:
Shear walls:
Walls that primarily resist lateral loads due to wind or earthquakes acting
on the building and acting parallel to the plane of the wall are called
shear walls. These walls often provide lateral bracing to the rest of the
structure. They resist gravity loads transferred to them by the parts of
th structure
the t t tributary
t ib t to
t the
th wall,ll plus
l the
th lateral
l t l loads
l d andd moments t
about strong axis of the wall.
Part I:
T
Types off structural
t t l walls:
ll
Nonbearingg walls:
Walls that do not support gravity in-plane loads other than their own
weight.
g These walls mayy resist shears and moments due to pressures
p or
loads acting on one or both sides of the wall. Examples are basement
walls and retaining walls used to resist lateral soil pressures.
Part I:
Wall assemblies:
They are groups of walls that are interconnected to act as a single member
to resist lateral forces. Their three
three-dimensional
dimensional shape serves to enclose
stairwells and elevator shafts.
Part I:
Tilt-up walls:
These are very slender
Th l d wallsll that
h are cast in i a horizontal
h i l position
i i adjacent
dj
to the structure. They are then tilted into their intended vertical
position and fastened to the foundation, to the roof or floor diaphragm,
and to the adjacent panels. They are designed to resist vertical and
lateral loads.
Part I:
L d combinations
Load bi ti
Part I:
1- Critical combination for combined (axial load and moment)
normal stress calculations:
For axial load: U = 1.2D + 1.0Ev + 1.0L (9-5)
For moment: U = 1.0Eh (9-5)
where:
Ev = 0.2SDSD
Eh = QE
= the reliability factor (see next slide)
QE = the effect of horizontal seismic forces
Part I:
Eh = QE
= the reliability factor (see next slide)
QE = the effect of horizontal seismic forces
Part I:
Redundancy factor
6.1
6 1
1 = 2 1.5
rmax A B
Part I:
Part I:
Part I:
C
Coupled
l d shear
h walls:
ll
These are shear walls that are connected (coupled) by beams or
slabs or both spanning across a doorway or similar
opening. The two walls act as one solid cantilever if the
coupling-beam stiffness is high. Each wall segment in that
case is
i called
ll d pier.
i
Part I:
Shear wall foundations:
Because tensile uplift stresses are difficult to resist, they should
b avoided.
be id d This
Thi is
i done
d by
b increasing
i i theth size
i off the
th wall
ll
footing. If footing size becomes excessive, possible
solutions are:
Part I:
Part I:
lw
Terminology
hw = height of wall
wall.
h = thickness of wall.
hw
h
PART II
Layout, Size, Drift Control, and
Minimum Wall Reinforcement
Part II:
Layout of buildings with structural walls:
The major considerations in selecting a structural system for a
multistory building with structural walls are:
(1) The building must have enough rigidity to withstand the service loads without
excessive deflections or vibrations.
(2) It is desirable that the wall be loaded with enough vertical load to resist any
uplift of parts of the wall foundations due to lateral walls.
(3) The locations of frames and walls should minimize torsional deformations of
the building about the vertical axis of the building.
(4) The walls must have adequate strength in shear and in combined flexure and
axial loads.
Part II:
Required size of wall:
Initial sizing based on wind induced deflection:
hw = height of wall
By setting the service-load story drift (slope) equal to the maximum
top, the minimum total Ig for the walls parallel
allowable slope at top
to the wind direction is:
Part II:
Required size of wall:
Minimum wall thickness:
h
lw
Part II:
Required size of wall:
When EQ-resistant
Wh EQ i t t construction
t ti i being
is b i considered,
id d it is i tot beb
remembered that the relatively stiff parts of the structure will
attract more forces than will the more flexible parts. A structure
with reinforced shear walls is quite stiff and thus will attract large
EQ forces. If the shears walls are brittle and fail, the rest of the
structure mayy not be able to take the shock. But if the shear walls
are ductile (and they will be if properly reinforced), they will be
very effective in resisting EQ forces.
Part II:
Story Drift Limits:
Story drift:
The difference between the deflections of the center of mass of the top and
bottom of the story considered. Story drift control is import for:
3- Human comfort.
P-delta
P delta effects should be included in the
Part II:
Story Drift Limits:
Story drift:
Part II:
Story Drift Limits:
ACI 11.9.3/4
11 9 3/4
Part II:
Story Drift Limits:
Part II:
Story Drift Limits:
Part II:
Distributed and concentrated reinforcement:
The reinforcement in shear walls is generally made up of:
Part II:
Distributed shear reinforcement:
Shear reinforcement for structural walls always consists of evenly
distributed vertical and horizontal reinforcement. In many cases, shear
cracks are inclined with respect to a horizontal line less than 45 degrees,
so vertical reinforcement is just as effective if not more effective as
horizontal reinforcement.
Part II:
Distributed and concentrated reinforcement:
Reinforcement in two layers:
Acv = lw h
Part II:
Minimum wall reinforcement: ACI 11.9.9
Part II:
Minimum wall reinforcement: ACI 11.9.9
Av , horiz
t ,min = 0.0025
h 2
hs
Maximum spacing h
S1,max = smaller of {lw/3, 45 cm, 3h} lw
S2,max = smaller of {lw/5, 45 cm, 3h}
Maximum spacing
hw
If 2 0 l t
2.0
lw
Av ,vert and Av , horiz are for two bars if two curtains are used
Part II:
Ties for vertical reinforcement
PART III
Design of
boundary elements
Part III:
Boundary elements:
Boundary elements are regions at the ends of the cross section of the wall that are
reinforced as columns as given in ACI 21.6.4.4 (with some exceptions), with
the reinforcement enclosed by hoop reinforcement. They generally are thicker
than the walls to give room for concentrated vertical reinforcement that is tied
like a tied column. However, the ACI allows them to have the same thickness
as the
h wall.
ll Boundary
B d elements
l strengthen
h the
h edges
d off the
h walls
ll to resist
i stress
reversals and prevent reinforcement buckling near the edges.
Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
Two methods are provided by the ACI to determine the need for
boundary elements:
(1) Displacement-based approach (ACI 21.9.6.2): This applies to walls that are
effectivelyy continuous from the base of the structure to the top
p of the wall and
are designed to have a single critical section for axial loads and bending at the
base of the wall. In this case, boundary elements are required if:
lw
c> u / hw 0.007
600 (u / hw )
where:
c = depth from the extreme compression fiber to the neutral axis.
lw = horizontal length of the entire wall or of a segment of wall considered in the
direction of the shear force.
u = design
g displacement
p , defined as the total lateral displacement
p deflection at the
top of the building for the design-basis earthquake.
Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
Two methods are provided by the ACI to determine the need for boundary
elements:
(1) Displacement-based approach (ACI 21.9.6.2): In the vertical direction, the special
boundaryy elements must extend from the critical section a distance ggreater than or
equal to: max{lw ; Mu/4Vu}.
Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
Two methods are provided by the ACI to determine the need for
boundary elements:
(2) Stress-based approach (ACI 21.9.6.3):
I this
In hi case, BE are required
i d if:
if
Pu M u lw
+ 0.2f c '
Ag Ig 2
Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
If special boundary elements are not required by ACI 21.9.6.2/3, then:
(1) If the longitudinal reinforcement ratio at the wall boundary is greater than
2.8/fy, provide boundary elements where the maximum longitudinal spacing of
transverse reinforcement in the boundary element shall not exceed 200 mm.
Otherwise:
needed. Horizontal reinforcement terminating at the
No boundary element is needed
edges of structural walls without boundary elements shall have a standard hook
engaging the edge reinforcement or the edge reinforcement shall be enclosed in
U stirrups having the same size and spacing as
U-stirrups as, and spliced to,
to the horizontal
reinforcement.
Part III:
Boundary elements requirement:
ACI 21.9.6.4(b)
In flanged sections:
In flanged sections, the boundary element shall include the effective flange
width in compression and shall extend at least 300 mm into the web.
300 mm
Part III:
Design of longitudinal reinforcement in the boundary
elements:
(c)
Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:
Transverse reinforcement benefits:
(1) To confine the concrete.
(2) To prevent buckling of the compression bars.
(3) To provide adequate shear strength.
(4) To confine
fi lap
l splices.
li
Seismic hook:
A hook on a stirrup, hoop or cross-tie having a bend not less than 135
degrees.
Cross tie:
Continuous reinforcing bar having a seismic hook at one end and a hook
not less than 90 at the other end.
end The 90 degree hooks are alternated
end for end.
Hoop:
A closed tie.
Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:
Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:
Area of hoop and crossties: ACI 21.6.4.4
The total cross-sectional area of rectangular hoop reinforcement, Ash, shall
not be less than required by
Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:
Spacing of hoop and crossties: ACI 21.6.4.3
Spacing of transverse reinforcement s shall not exceed the smallest of:
The value of so shall not exceed 150 mm and need not be taken
less than 100 mm.
Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:
3
o
Part III:
Detailing of boundary elements:
Anchorage of horizontal reinforcement of the wall web in the
boundary element:
Horizontal reinforcement in the wall web shall be anchored to develop fy within
the confined core of the boundary element.
AC 21.7.5
ACI 21
For a bar with 90 degree hook:
f y db
5.4 f c
ld
l dh max 8d b
150mm
l d = 3.25l dh
Part III:
General notes
PART IV
Flexural strength analysis of shear walls
Part IV:
M d = M n M u
M d Design moment strength (also known as moment resistance)
Mu Internal ultimate moment
Part IV:
Case 2:
Walls with boundary elements and walls with flanges .
Case 3:
Wall assemblies.
Part IV:
Case 1: Flexural strength of rectangular walls with
uniform reinforcement:
Assumptions:
Part IV:
Case 1: Flexural strength of rectangular walls with
uniform reinforcement:
Derivation of expressions:
A st f y Nu
= =
A h
w fc ' Aw hff c '
Part IV:
Case 1: Flexural strength of rectangular walls with
uniform reinforcement:
Procedure:
A st f y
=
A w h fc '
Nu
=
Aw hf c '
M d = M n M u ?
Part IV:
Case 1: Flexural strength of rectangular walls with
uniform reinforcement:
Load and resistance factors:
Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Examples:
Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Width of flanges for flexural analysis: ACI 21.9.5.2
l
B 1 = min
i 2
0.25hw
Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Flanges for BE design: ACI 21.9.6.4(b)
In flanged sections, the boundary element shall include the effective flange
width in compression and shall extend at least 300 mm into the web.
300 mm
Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Derivation of expressions:
T = As f y
T + Nu
a=
0.85bf c
a l a
M n = T (d ) + N u ( w )
2 2
Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Procedure:
As is based on minimum
reinforcement requirements
or an initial
i iti l guess.
T = As f y
T + Nu
a=
0.85bf c
a l a
M n = T (d ) + N u ( w )
2 2
Part IV:
Case 2: Flexural strength of shear walls with BE or flanges:
Reinforcement:
M 1 =0
M 3 =0
T1 T3
As 1 = As 3 = As2 is based on minimum
0.9f y 0.9f y reinforcement requirements.
PART V
Shear strength analysis of shear walls
Part V:
V d = V n V u
Vd Design shear strength (also known as shear resistance)
The -factor for shear is 0.75. However, if shear strength is less than the shear
corresponding
co espo d g too thee development
deve op e ofo thee flexural
e u strength
s e g of w thee -
o thee wall
factor for shear is 0.6.
ACI 9.3.4(a)
Part V:
Vu = Vn
Vu
Vs = V c
Part V:
Case 2:
For 0 50Vc minimum
F Vu 0.50V i i shear
h reinf.
i f is
i required
i d (ACI 11.9.9).
11 9 9)
Case 3:
For Vu < 0.50Vc min. shear reinf. is required (ACI 11.9.9 or ACI 14.3)
.
Part V:
Case 2:
F Vu V
For Vn minimum
i i shear
h reinf.
i f is
i required
i d (ACI 11.9.9).
11 9 9)
.
Summary:
Part V:
(
V n = Acv c f c ' + t f y ) ACI 21.9.4
where c is
0.25 for hw/Lw 1.5
0.17 for hw/Lw 2
varies linearly between 0.25 & 0.17 for hw/Lw between 1.5 & 2
hw = height of entire wall of wall considered
Lw = length of entire wall in the direction of shear force
Acv = hLw
.
Part V:
Part V:
ACI 11.9.6
Part V:
Avf yd Av fyd
Vs = s = ACI Eq
Eq. 11-15
11 15
s Vs
h Av = the
where th area off shear
h reinforcement
i f t within
ithi spacing
i s
Part V:
PART VI
Example 1
Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:
Check the shear wall layout against the ASCE-7 code drift limits. Consider
only the E-W direction.
N
6 3@18
6m3@18m
W1
3m6sstory
6m3@118m
W4 W3
W2
Elevation
4m
Plan
Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:
Pu = 3129 = 324 kN
6m3@118m
W4 W3
4m
Plan
Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:
From lecture 4:
I E = 1.0, g
0
0.7 I = 0.7(5.4
0 ( 4 + 1
1.6)
6) = 4
4.9
9 m 4
Floor Fx
6 .
5 .
4 .
3 .
2 .
1 .
.
0 0
Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:
max
Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:
Cd
Part VI:
Example 1: Drift Check:
From ETABS, the elastic deflections xe are obtained as shown in the table:
Story xe x max
. . . .
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
PART VI
Example 2
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
From the equivalent lateral force analysis, the base shear was
found as V = 3030 kN, and the overturning moment at base as
M = 48150 kN.m.
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
SD1 = 0.15g and SDS = 0.6g From the tables, the seismic design categories are C and D.
Use D
= 1.3
13
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
bw lw 3 0.5 83
Ig = = 21.33m 4
12 12
A g = 8 0.5 = 4m 2
c = lw / 2 = 8 / 2 = 4 m
Pu M u c 38000 103 62600 106 4000
fc = = = 21.3MPa
Ag Ig 8000 500 21.33 1012
0 2f c = 00.2(30)
f c ,max = 0.2 2(30) = 6MPa < f = 21.3
21 3MPac
Boundary elements are needed.
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
Also h = 50 cm > 25 cm
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
Av , horiz 402
s2 = = =320mm
h (0.0025) 500(0.0025)
Smax = smaller
ll off {l w /5,
/5 45 cm, 3h} 16@30cm
= smaller of { 800/5,45,3(50)}
= smaller of { 800/5,45,3(50)}
800/5,45,3(50)}= 45 cm
cm>ss 2
Use 116 @ 30cm at each side of the wall in the horizontal direction
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
(
V n = Acv c f c ' + t f y )
V n = 4000000 0.17 (
0 17 30 + 0.00268
0 00268 420 )
V n = 8227 103 N = 8227 kN
d = 0.8
0 8lw = 6400mm
0.83 f c ' hd = 0.83 30 500 6400 = 14546kN >V n
Wall cross section is adequate
V n = 0.6 8227 kN = 4396kN >V u
f y db f y db 420 16
= = 227 mm
5.4 f c 5.4 f c 5.4 30
l dh max 8d b = max 8(16) = 128mm
150mm 150mm
l dh = 227 mm
l d = 3.25
3 25l dh = 33.25(227)
25(227) = 800mm
Use depth of boundary element le = 1300mm
and width of boundary element bb= 850 mm
l e = 1.3m
bw = 0.5
0 5m b = 0.85
0 85m
lw = 8m
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
Short direction:
bc = 1300 2(40 + 16 / 2) = 1204mm
sb f 100 1204 30 bc
A sh = 0.09 c c = 0.09 = 774mm 2
fy 420
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
Long direction:
bc = 850 2(40
( + 16 / 2)) = 754mm
sb f 100 754 30
A sh = 0.09 c c = 0.09 = 485mm 2
fy 420
bc
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
Part VI:
Example 2: Shear wall reinforcement design
850 mm
m
500 mm
1300 mm 1300 mm
8000 mm
The end
Lecture 9
Design of Mat Foundations
PART I
Introduction
Part I:
Mat foundations:
Part I:
Mat foundations:
A mat (raft) foundation is essentially a very large spread footing that
usually encompasses the entire footprint of the structure (but this is not
a requirement).
If the bearing capacity of the soil is so low that even using mat
foundations is insufficient , deep foundations such as piles must be
used.
used
Mat foundations develop large bearing areas and their continuity and
rigidity provides some advantages as explained next.
next
Part I:
Types of mat foundations:
Part I:
Types of mat foundations:
Part I:
Reasons for using mat foundations:
1- The structure loads are so high or the soil conditions are so poor that the
spread footings would be exceptionally large. If spread footings would
cover more than about one half of the building area, a mat will be more
economical.
2 The
2- h soil
il is
i very erratic
i andd prone to excessive
i differential
diff i l settlements.
l
The continuity and rigidity of the mat foundation helps in reducing
differential settlement of individual columns relative to each other.
4- The uplift loads are larger than what spread footings can accommodate.
Part I:
Reasons for using mat foundations:
5- Lateral loads are not uniformly distributed through the structure and
thus may cause differential horizontal movements in spread footings.
Part I:
Philosophies of designing mat foundations:
Considers the mat far more rigid than the surrounding soils, so flexure of the
mat (there are no flexural deflections) doesnt affect the distribution of the
b i pressure andd becomes
bearing b simple
i l to define.
d fi However, these h deflections
d fl i
are important because they influence the bearing pressure distribution.
Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:
gg
This is a method suggested byy ACI Committee 336 ((1988)) with design
g
aids. It may be used with computer programs.
Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:
Finite-grid method.
Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:
Finite-element method.
Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:
Finite-element method.
Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:
Finite-element method.
Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:
Coefficient (modulus) of subgrade reaction :
Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:
Coefficient (modulus) of subgrade reaction :
Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:
Coefficient (modulus) of subgrade reaction :
Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:
Coefficient (modulus) of subgrade reaction :
Approximate value:
Part I:
Methods of designing mat foundations:
Spring stiffness:
PART II
The conventional rigid design method
Part II:
Design procedure:
ACI 15.7 specifies that the depth of footing above reinforcement is not to be
less than 15 cm for footings on soil.
soil Noting that 7.5
7 5 cm of clear concrete
cover is required if concrete is cast against soil, a practical minimum depth
i taken
is k as 25
2 cm. The
h depth
d h off the
h ffooting
i isi first
fi selected
l d andd later
l
checked for punching and beam shear. As a role of thumb, it is a common
practice to assume the thickness of the mat for multistory buildings to be
equal to the number of stories multiplied by 80 mm to 100 mm.
Part II:
Design procedure:
Df
hc
qall(net)
where
hc is the assumed footingg depth,
p ,
Df is the distance from ground surface to the contact surface between footing base and soil,
c is the weight density of concrete, and
s is the weight density of soil on top of footing.
Part II:
Design procedure:
Th X-coordinate
The X di off the
h resultant
l off loads:
l d
P1x 1 + P2 x 2 + P3x 3 + ...
X '=
Ptotal
t t l
B
e x = X '
2
L
e y =Y '
2
Total moments:
Part II:
Design procedure:
All the
th loads
l d have
h to
t be
b factored.
f t d
Part II:
Design procedure:
The ACI Code assumes that failure takes place on vertical planes located at distance d/2
from the faces of the column.
ACI 11.11.1.2
Part II:
Design procedure:
5- Check footing
g thickness for p
punching
g shear [[contd.]]
The depth of the footing must be checked so that the shear capacity of the concrete equals
or exceeds the critical shear forces produced by factored loads
Vu Vc
The critical punching shear force Vu can be evaluated under an interior column as follows
V u = Pu qu (C 1 + d )(C 2 + d )
C1 + d
C1
ACI 11.11.1.2
C2 + d
C2
Since there are two layers of reinforcement, an average value of d may be used:
d = h 7.5cm db , where db is the bar diameter.
Part II:
Design procedure:
c
V C = 0.33 f c 'bo d C1
C2 + d
C2
s d
V C = 0.083 2 + f c 'bo d
bo
Divide the raft into several strips in the X-direction (B1, B2, B3) and in the Y-
direction (B4, B5, B6, B7)
q (u ) B + q (u ) E
q (u )avg =
2
Part II:
Design procedure:
R B E = q (u )avg B 2 L
Part II:
Design procedure:
The modified columns loads are obtained by multiplying each of the applied
loads by the factor given by:
P(u )avg
=
PB E
The shear & bending moment diagrams can be drawn using regular structural analysis.
The same process should be carried out for all the strips in the mat foundation.
Part II:
Design procedure:
If not
not, enlarge depth of mat
Part II:
Design procedure:
0.85f c 2M u
= 1 1 2
fy 0.85 f B d
c
A s ,reqq = B d
A s ,min = 0.0018Bh A s ,req
Part II:
Design procedure:
10 Check
10- Ch k reinforcing
i f i barsb for
f anchorage
h lengths.
l th
See notes from Design I
PART III
Example
Part III:
Example:
Part III:
Column Pd Pl Pserv Pu
S
Sum
Part III:
S l ti
Solution:
Assume h = 75 cm
Ptotal = P1 + P2 + P3 + ...
P1x 1 + P2 x 2 + P3x 3 + ...
X '=
Ptotal
P1 y 1 + P2 y 2 + P3 y 3 + ...
Y '=
Ptotal
Part III:
P1 y 1 + P2 y 2 + P3 y 3 + ... 116096
Y '= = = 7.75m
Ptotal 14980
B 12.4
e x = X ' = 6.24 = 0.04 m
2 2
L 15.4
e y = Y ' = 7.75 = 0.05 m
2 2
Total moments:
Corners x y q
A .- . .
C .
. .
. .
.
D .- .- .
F
. -
.
.
q max = 81.5 < 120kN/m 2 OK
Part III:
4 Calculate ultimate pressure under the columns:
4-
Column x y q
Mx = Ptotal ey = 19288 (0.05)
(0 05)
= 966 kN.m - . .
- . .
My = Ptotal ex = 19288 (0.04) - .- .
= 773 kN.m
- .- .
My
. .
Ptotal M x
q= y x . .
A Ix Iy
19288 966 773 .- .
= + y + x
190.96 3774 2446.8 .- .
.
.
. .
-
.
.
.- .
Part III:
C2 + d
C2
VC is the smallest of
0.33 fc ' bo d = 0.75 0.33 30 4220 655 = 3747 kN
2 2
0 17 fc ' 1 + bo d = 0.75
0.17 0 75 00.17
17 30 1 + 4220 655 = 5790 kN
c 0.4/0.4
d 40 655
0.083 fc ' 2 + s bo d = 0.75 0.083 30 2 + 4220 655 = 7736 kN
bo 4220
VC = 3747 kN Compare with punching shear under internal columns (see next)
Part III:
C2 + d
bo = ( 0.40 + 0.655) +2(0.40+0.655/2)=2.51 m
C2
VC is the smallest of
0.33 fc ' bo d = 0.75 0.33 30 2510 655 = 2228 kN
2 2
0.17 fc ' 1 + bo d = 0.75 0.17 30 1 + 2510 655 = 3444 kN
c 0.4/0.4
0 4/0 4
d 30 655
0.083 fc ' 2 + s bo d = 0.75 0.083 30 2 + 2510 655 = 5509 kN
bo 2510
VC = 2228 kN Compare with punching shear under external columns (see next)
Part III:
C1
C2
C2 + dd/2
bo = 2(0.40+0.655/2)=1.455m
VC is the smallest of
00.33 fc ' bo d = 0.75
0 0.33 30 14
1455 6655 = 1291 kN
k
2 2
0.17 fc ' 1 + bo d = 0.75 0.17 30 1 + 1455 655 = 1996 kN
c 0.4/0.4
0 4/0 4
s d 20 655
0.083 fc ' 2 + b
o d = 0.75 0.083 30 2 + 1455 655 = 3575 kN
b o 1455
VC = 1291 kN Compare with punching shear under corner columns (see next)
Part III:
Summary:
Column Pu qu Vu Vc Check
.
.
.
OK
. . . OK
. . . OK
. . . OK
. . . OK
.
.
. OK
. . . OK
.
. .
. .
. OK
O
. . . OK
. . . OK
. . . OK
. . . OK
Part III:
q (u )5 + q (u )8 102.99 + 99.1
102 99 1
q (u )avg = = = 101kN / m 2
2 2
Column P P
R B E = q (u )avg B 2 L = 101 6 15.4 = 9333kN
.
PB E = P(u )5 + P(u )6 + P(u )7 + P(u )8 .
= 1400 + 3720 + 3720 + 1400 = 10240kN
.
.
R B E + PB E 9333 + 10240
P(u )avg = = = 9787 kN
2 2
P(u )avg 9787
q modd = = = 636kN / m
L 15.4
Part III: . . . .
and moment
diagrams for
strip GHJI:
-
P -
Column P -
.
.
.
.
. .
Part III:
. . . .
3555 2 = 0
636x2 1338 3555.2
636 x1
x2=7.7m
x2
636x3 1338 3555.2 3555.2 = 0 x3
x3=13.3m
7 Check
7- Ch k footing
f ti thithickness
k ffor b
beam shear
h
Vc = 0.75 0.17 30 6000 655 = 2745 kN > 1966kN OK
Part III:
F maximum
For i positive
iti momentt (1901 kN.m):
kN )
1901
Moment per unit width= = 317 kN .m / m
6
0.85f c 2M u
= 1 1 2
fy
0.85 f c Bd
Part III:
F maximum
For i negative
ti momentt (1901 kN.m):
kN )
1141
Moment per unit width= = 190kN .m / m
6
0.85f c 2M u
= 1 1 2
fy
0.85 f c B d
Part III:
10 Check
10- Ch k reinforcing
i f i barsb for
f anchorage
h lengths.
l th
See notes from Design I